Gen Cap Benton Harbor LDHA, LLC Hayward Wells Apts Construction/Hayward Wells Estates... · • LEED2.13 for Neighborhood Development Certification • 2.14 Local Economic Development

Construction Handbook

Gen Cap Benton Harbor LDHA, LLC

Hayward Wells Apts 604 8th Street.

Benton Harbor, Michigan 49022

A/E Project No. 4-0860

Bids & Permits

September 8, 2017

HOOKER | DE JONG

Architects & Engineers

316 Morris Avenue

Studio Suite 410

Muskegon, MI 49440

P 231 | 722 | 3407

F 231 | 722 | 2589

Gen Cap Benton Harbor LDHA, LLC Hooker DeJong, Inc.Hayward Wells Apts 4-0860Issuance - Bids & Permits Issued: 2017.09.08

00 01 10 - 1TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 00 01 10TABLE OF CONTENTS

PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS1.01 DIVISION 00 -- PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

A. 00 01 10 - Table of ContentsB. 00 31 00 - Enterprise Green Communities Checklist/ Criteria

1.02 DC - DESIGN CRITERIAA. DC D0 - Design-Build Cover SheetB. DC D3 - Plumbing CriteriaC. DC D4 - HVAC CriteriaD. DC D6 - Electrical Criteria

SPECIFICATIONS2.01 DIVISION 01 -- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. 01 15 00 - Disclaimer for use of Electronic Cad FilesB. 01 30 00 - Administrative RequirementsC. 01 45 33 - Code-Required Special InspectionsD. 01 57 13 - Temporary Erosion and Sediment ControlE. 01 60 00 - Product RequirementsF. 01 61 16 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions

1. 01 61 16.01 - Accessory Material VOC Content Certification FormG. 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout RequirementsH. 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and DisposalI. 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals

2.02 DIVISION 02 -- EXISTING CONDITIONS A. 02 41 00 - Demolition

2.03 DIVISION 03 -- CONCRETE A. 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete

2.04 DIVISION 04 -- MASONRY (NOT USED)2.05 DIVISION 05 -- METALS (NOT USED)2.06 DIVISION 06 -- WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

A. 06 05 73 - Wood TreatmentB. 06 10 00 - Rough CarpentryC. 06 17 53 - Shop-Fabricated Wood TrussesD. 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry

2.07 DIVISION 07 -- THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION A. 07 21 00 - Thermal InsulationB. 07 21 26 - Blown InsulationC. 07 25 00 - Weather BarriersD. 07 31 13 - Asphalt ShinglesE. 07 46 46 - Fiber Cement SidingF. 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim


00 01 10 - 2TABLE OF CONTENTS

G. 07 71 00 - Roof SpecialtiesH. 07 71 23 - Manufactured Gutters and DownspoutsI. 07 72 00 - Roof AccessoriesJ. 07 84 13 - Opening and Penetration FirestoppingK. 07 92 00 - Joint SealantsL. 07 92 00.13 - Joint Sealant Usage ScheduleM. 07 92 00.14 - Joint Sealants Products Schedule

2.08 DIVISION 08 -- OPENINGS A. 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and FramesB. 08 14 16 - Flush Wood DoorsC. 08 32 00 - Sliding Glass DoorsD. 08 53 13 - Vinyl Windows

2.09 DIVISION 09 -- FINISHES A. 09 05 61 - Common Work Results for Flooring PreparationB. 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board AssembliesC. 09 65 00 - Resilient FlooringD. 09 91 13 - Exterior PaintingE. 09 91 23 - Interior Painting

2.10 DIVISION 10 -- SPECIALTIES A. 10 14 00 - SignageB. 10 28 00 - Toilet, Bath, and Laundry AccessoriesC. 10 44 00 - Fire Protection SpecialtiesD. 10 55 00 - Postal SpecialtiesE. 10 56 23 - Wire Storage Shelving

2.11 DIVISION 12 -- FURNISHINGS A. 12 21 13 - Horizontal Louver BlindsB. 12 35 30 - Residential CaseworkC. 12 36 00 - CountertopsD. 12 93 13 - Bicycle Racks

2.12 DIVISION 31 -- EARTHWORK A. 31 10 00 - Site ClearingB. 31 22 00 - GradingC. 31 23 16 - ExcavationD. 31 23 23 - FillE. 31 31 16 - Termite Control

2.13 DIVISION 32 -- EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS A. 32 17 23.13 - Painted Pavement MarkingsB. 32 17 26 - Tactile Warning SurfacingC. 32 92 19 - Seeding

END OF SECTION 00 01 10

2015 ENTERPRISE GREEN COMMUNITIES CRITERIA CHECKLIST

M = MANDATORY

# = OPTIONAL POINTS

2015 Enterprise Green Communities Criteria Checklist

This checklist provides an overview of the technical requirements within the Enterprise Green Communities Criteria. To achieve Enterprise Green Communities Certification, all projects must achieve compliance with the Criteria mandatory measures applicable to that construction type. Additionally, New Construction projects must achieve 35 optional points, Substantial Rehab projects must achieve 30 optional points, and Moderate Rehab projects must also achieve 30 optional points.

1. INTEGRATIVE DESIGN

O YES O NO O MAYBE M 1.1a Goal SettingDevelop an integrative design process that works best for your project team and intentions. At minimum, document:

1. A statement of the overall green development goals of the project and the expected intended outcomes from addressing those goals.

2. A summary of the integrative process that was used to select the green building strategies, systems and materials that will be incorporated into the project.

3. A description of how progress and success against these goals will be measured throughout the completion of design, construction and operation to ensure that the green features are included and correctly installed.

O YES O NO O MAYBE M 1.1b Criteria Documentation Create design and construction documentation to include information on implementation of appropriate Enterprise Green Communities Criteria.

O YES O NO O MAYBE 9 1.1c Designing for Project Performance Identify how the expected performance of your project compares to the actual performance of other projects in your portfolio and/or community.

O YES O NO O MAYBE M 1.2a Resident Health and Well-Being: Design for HealthIdentify potential resident health factors and design your project to address resident health and well-being by using the matrix provided on pages 22 and 23.

O YES O NO O MAYBE 12 1.2b Resident Health and Well-Being: Health Action PlanAt pre-design and continuing throughout the project life cycle, collaborate with public health professionals and community stakeholders to assess, identify, implement and monitor achievable actions to enhance health-promoting features of the project and minimize features that could present health risks. Specifically, create a Health Action Plan and integrate the selected interventions and a plan for monitoring and evaluating progress per the full criterion.

O YES O NO O MAYBE M 1.3a Resilient Communities: Design for Resilience (New Construction and Substantial Rehab only)Given your project building type, location and expected resident population, identify a project characteristic that would most likely impact your project’s ability to withstand an unexpected weather event or loss of power. Select at least one criterion from the given list that would help mitigate that impact, and incorporate this within your project plans and design. Include a short narrative providing your rationale for selecting this criterion above the others.

chadg

Text Box

X

chadg

Text Box

X

chadg

Text Box

X

chadg

Text Box

General Capital, Hayward Wells Apts, Benton Harbor


M = MANDATORY

# = OPTIONAL POINTS

INTEGRATIVE DESIGN (continued)

O YES O NO O MAYBE 15 1.3b Resilient Communities: Multi-Hazard Risk / Vulnerability Assessment Carry out a Vulnerabilities Assessment and implement building elements designed to enable the project to adapt to, and mitigate, climate impacts given the project location, building /construction type and resident population.

SUBTOTAL OPTIONAL POINTS

2. LOCATION + NEIGHBORHOOD FABRIC

New Construction: All new construction projects must earn optional points under Criterion 2.8 Access to Public Transportation, OR earn 8 optional points through selecting one or more of the following:

• 2.7 Preservation of and Access to Open Space

• 2.9 Improving Connectivity to the Community

• 2.12 Access to Fresh, Local Foods

• 2.13 LEED for Neighborhood Development Certification

• 2.14 Local Economic Development and Community Wealth Creation

O YES O NO O MAYBE M 2.1 Sensitive Site ProtectionDo not locate new projects, including buildings, built structures, roads or parking areas, on portions of sites that meet any of the following provisions:

1. Land within 100 feet of wetlands, including isolated wetlands or streams. Maintain or establish riparian buffer using native vegetation where possible. Bike and foot paths are allowed if at least 25 feet from the wetlands boundary.

2. Land on slope greater than 15%.

3. Land with prime soils, unique soils or soils of state significance per USDA designations.

4. Public parkland.

5. Land that is specifically identified as an existing habitat for any species on federal or state threatened or endangered lists.

6. Land that is within the Special Flood Hazard Areas (SFHA) as identified by FEMA on the Flood Insurance Rate Map.

O YES O NO O MAYBE M 2.2 Connections to Existing Development and Infrastructure (Except for projects located on rural tribal lands, in colonias communities, or in communities with populations of less than 10,000)

Locate the project on a site with access to existing roads, water, sewers and other infrastructure within or contiguous to (having at least 25% of the perimeter bordering) existing development. Connect the project to the pedestrian grid.

O YES O NO O MAYBE M 2.3 Compact DevelopmentAt a minimum, build to the residential density (dwelling units /acre) of the census block group in which your project is located.

O YES O NO O MAYBE 5 or 7 2.4 Compact DevelopmentExceed the residential density (dwelling units / acre) of the census block group in which your project is located. Exceed by 2x for [5 points]; exceed by 3x for [7 points].

chadg

Text Box

X

chadg

Text Box

X

chadg

Text Box

X


M = MANDATORY

# = OPTIONAL POINTS

LOCATION + NEIGHBORHOOD FABRIC (continued)

O YES O NO O MAYBE M 2.5 Proximity to Services Locate the project within a 0.5-mile walk distance of at least four, or a 1-mile walk distance of at least seven, of the listed services. For projects that qualify as Rural / Tribal / Small Town, locate the project within 5 miles of at least four of the listed services.

O YES O NO O MAYBE M 2.6 Preservation of and Access to Open Space for Rural / Tribal / Small Towns Set aside a minimum of 10% (minimum of 0.25 acre) of the total project acreage as non-paved open space for use by all residents OR locate the project within a 0.25-mile walk distance of dedicated public non-paved open space that is a minimum of 0.75 acres.

O YES O NO O MAYBE 6 max 2.7 Preservation of and Access to Open SpaceSet aside a percentage of non-paved open space for use by all residents. 20% [2 points]; 30% [4 points]; 40% + written statement of preservation /conservation policy for set-aside land [6 points].

O YES O NO O MAYBE 8 or 10 2.8 Access to Public TransportationLocate projects within a 0.5-mile walk distance of transit services combined (bus, rail and /or ferry), constituting at least 60 or more transit rides per weekday, with some type of weekend ride option. [8 points]

For projects that qualify as Rural / Tribal / Small Town, locate the project within a 5-mile distance of at least one of the following transit options: 1) vehicle share program; 2) dial-a-ride program; 3) employer vanpool; 4) park-and-ride; or 5) public–private regional transportation. [8 points]

For an additional 2 points: Locate the project along dedicated bike trails or lanes that lead to transit services or stations (bus, rail and ferry) within 3 miles.

O YES O NO O MAYBE 2 to 8 2.9 Improving Connectivity to the CommunityImprove access to community amenities through at least one of the transit, auto or biking mobility measures listed.

O YES O NO O MAYBE 5 max 2.10 Passive Solar Heating / Cooling Design and build with passive solar design, orientation and shading that meet specificed guidelines.

O YES O NO O MAYBE 4 2.11 Brownfield Site or Adaptive Reuse BuildingRehabilitate an existing structure that was not previously used as housing or locate the project on a brownfield site.

O YES O NO O MAYBE 6 2.12 Access to Fresh, Local FoodsPursue one of three options to provide residents and staff with access to fresh, local foods, including neighborhood farms and gardens, community-supported agriculture, or proximity to farmers markets.

O YES O NO O MAYBE 4 2.13 LEED for Neighborhood Development CertificationLocate building(s) in a Stage 2 Pre-Certified or Stage 3 Certified Neighborhood Development.

O YES O NO O MAYBE 6 max 2.14 Local Economic Development and Community Wealth CreationDemonstrate that local preference for construction employment and subcontractor hiring was part of your bidding process [2 points] OR demonstrate that you achieved at least 20% local employment [3 points] OR provide physical space for small business, nonprofits, and /or skills and workforce education [3 points].



M = MANDATORY

# = OPTIONAL POINTS

3. SITE IMPROVEMENTS

O YES O NO O MAYBE M 3.1 Environmental RemediationConduct an environmental site assessment to determine whether any hazardous materials are present on-site; mitigate any found.

O YES O NO O MAYBE M 3.2 Erosion and Sedimentation Control (Except for infill sites with buildable area smaller than one acre)Implement EPA’s Best Management Practices for Construction Site Stormwater Runoff Control, or local requirements, whichever is more stringent.

O YES O NO O MAYBE M 3.3 Low-Impact DevelopmentProjects located on greenfields must meet the list of low-impact development criteria.

O YES O NO O MAYBE M 3.4 Landscaping If providing plantings, all should be native or adapted to the region, appropriate to the site’s soil and micro climate, and none of the new plants is an invasive species. Reseed or xeriscape all disturbed areas.

O YES O NO O MAYBE M 3.5a Efficient Irrigation and Water Reuse If irrigation is used, install an efficient irrigation or water reuse system per the guidelines.

O YES O NO O MAYBE 4 or 8 3.5b Efficient Irrigation and Water Reuse Install an efficient irrigation system equipped with a WaterSense-labeled weather-based irrigation controller (WBIC) OR at least 50% of the site’s irrigation should be satisfied by reusing water.

O YES O NO O MAYBE 4 or 8 3.6 Surface Stormwater Management Retain, infiltrate and /or harvest the first 1.0 inch of rain that falls [4 points] OR as calculated for a 24-hour period of a one-year (1) storm event, so that no stormwater is discharged to drains / inlets. [8 points] For both options, permanently label all storm drains and inlets.

O YES O NO O MAYBE 1 3.7 Reducing Heat-Island Effect: Paving Use light-colored, high-albedo materials and/or an open-grid pavement, with a minimum solar reflectance of 0.3, over at least 50% of the site’s hardscaped area.


4. WATER CONSERVATION

O YES O NO O MAYBE M 4.1 Water-Conserving Fixtures Install water-conserving fixtures in all units and any common facilities with the following specifications. Toilets: WaterSense-labeled and 1.28 gpf; Urinals: WaterSense-labeled and 0.5 gpf; Showerheads: WaterSense-labeled and 2.0 gpm; Kitchen faucets: 2.0 gpm; Lav faucets: WaterSense-labeled and 1.5 gpm

AND for all single-family homes and all dwelling units in buildings three stories or fewer, the static service pressure must not exceed 60 psi.

chadg

Text Box

X

chadg

Text Box

X

chadg

Text Box

X

chadg

Text Box

X

chadg

Text Box

X


M = MANDATORY

# = OPTIONAL POINTS

WATER CONSERVATION (continued)

O YES O NO O MAYBE 6 max 4.2 Advanced Water Conservation Reduce water consumption either by installing water-conserving fixtures in all units and all common space bathrooms with the following specifications: Toilets: WaterSense-labeled and 1.1 gpf [1 point]; Showerheads: WaterSense-labeled and 1.5 gpm [1 point]; Kitchen faucets: 1.5 gpm and lav faucets: WaterSense-labeled and 1.0 gpm [1 point]ORReduce total indoor water consumption by at least 30% compared to the baseline indoor water consumption chart, through a combination of your choosing. [6 points maximum]

O YES O NO O MAYBE 4 4.3 Leaks and Water Metering Conduct pressure-loss tests and visual inspections to determine if there are any leaks; fix any leaks found; and meter or submeter each dwelling unit with a technology capable of tracking water use. Separately meter outdoor water consumption.

O YES O NO O MAYBE 4 4.4 Efficient Plumbing Layout and DesignTo minimize water loss from delivering hot water, the hot water delivery system shall store no more than 0.5 gallons of water in any piping/manifold between the hot water source and any hot water fixture.

O YES O NO O MAYBE 6 max 4.5 Water Reuse Harvest, treat, and reuse rainwater and/or greywater to meet a portion of the project’s total water needs: 10% reuse [3 points]; 20% reuse [4 points]; 30% reuse [5 points]; 40% reuse [6 points]

O YES O NO O MAYBE 8 4.6 Access to Potable Water During EmergenciesProvide residents with access to potable water in the event of an emergency that disrupts normal access to potable water, including disruptions related to power outages that prevent pumping water to upper floors of multifamily buildings or pumping of water from on-site wells, per one of the three options.


5. ENERGY EFFICIENCY

O YES O NO O MAYBE M 5.1a Building Performance Standard (New Construction: single-family and low-rise multifamily)Certify each dwelling unit in the project through the ENERGY STAR New Homes program.

O YES O NO O MAYBE M 5.1b Building Performance Standard (New Construction: mid-rise and high-rise multifamily, with some exceptions)

Certify the project through the ENERGY STAR Multifamily High-Rise program (MFHR) OR follow the combined MFHR and LEED Commissioning Path outlined in the criterion.

Exception: Multifamily buildings that are four or five stories, in which all dwelling units have their own heating, cooling and hot water systems, should comply with Criterion 5.1a and certify each dwelling unit per ENERGY STAR Certified New Homes.

chadg

Text Box

X

chadg

Line

chadg

Line

chadg

Text Box

2

chadg

Text Box

X

chadg

Text Box

X

chadg

Text Box

X

chadg

Text Box

X

chadg

Text Box

X


M = MANDATORY

# = OPTIONAL POINTS

ENERGY EFFICIENCY (continued)

O YES O NO O MAYBE M 5.1c Building Performance Standard (Substantial and Moderate Rehab: single-family and low-rise multifamily)

For each dwelling unit, achieve a HERS Index score of 85 or less.

Exception: Substantial rehabs of buildings with walls made only of brick/masonry that are three stories or fewer and built before 1980, as well as moderate rehabs of buildings that are three stories or fewer and built before 1980, are permitted to instead achieve a HERS Index score of 100 or less for each dwelling unit.

O YES O NO O MAYBE M 5.1d Building Performance Standard (Substantial and Moderate Rehab: mid-rise and high-rise)Demonstrate that the energy performance of the completed building will be equivalent to ASHRAE 90.1-2010 using an energy model created by a qualified energy services provider per Appendix G.

O YES O NO O MAYBE 5 to 12 5.2a Additional Reductions in Energy UseDesign and construct a building that is projected to be at least 5% more efficient than what is required of the project by Criteria 5.1a–d. (Projects receiving points in Criterion 5.2a may not receive points per Criterion 5.2b)

O YES O NO O MAYBE 12 5.2b Advanced Certification: Nearing Net ZeroCertify the project in a program that requires advanced levels of building envelope performance such as PHIUS, Living Building Challenge and/or DOE Zero Energy Ready Home. (Projects receiving points in Criterion 5.2b may not receive points per Criterion 5.2a)

O YES O NO O MAYBE M 5.3 Sizing of Heating and Cooling EquipmentSize and select heating and cooling equipment in accordance with the Air Conditioning Contractors of America (ACCA) Manuals J and S or ASHRAE handbooks.

O YES O NO O MAYBE M 5.4 ENERGY STAR Appliances If providing appliances, install ENERGY STAR clothes washers, dishwashers and refrigerators. If appliances will not be installed or replaced at this time, specify that, at the time of installation or replacement, ENERGY STAR models must be used.

O YES O NO O MAYBE M 5.5 LightingFollow the guidance for high-efficacy lighting controls and other characteristics for all permanently installed lighting fixtures in project dwelling units, common spaces and exterior

5.6 Electricity Meter

O YES O NO O MAYBE M New Construction and Substantial Rehab

O YES O NO O MAYBE 6 Moderate Rehab (Except for single-room occupancy and designated supportive housing dwelling units)Install individual or submetered electric meters for all dwelling units.

O YES O NO O MAYBE 4 5.7a Photovoltaic / Solar Hot Water ReadyOrient, design, engineer, wire and /or plumb the development to accommodate installation of photovoltaic (PV) or solar hot water system in the future.

chadg

Text Box

X

chadg

Text Box

X

chadg

Text Box

X

chadg

Text Box

X

chadg

Text Box

X

chadg

Text Box

X

chadg

Text Box

X


M = MANDATORY

# = OPTIONAL POINTS

ENERGY EFFICIENCY (continued)

O YES O NO O MAYBE 10 max 5.7b Renewable Energy Install photovoltaic (PV) panels or other electric-generating renewable energy source to provide a specified percentage of the project’s estimated total energy demand or water heating energy demand. (Projects may earn points through Criterion 5.7b or 5.8b, but not both.)

5% 10% 20% 30% 40%Single-story / Single-family — — 6 8 10

2 to 3 stories — 6 8 10 —

4 stories or more 6 8 10 — —

O YES O NO O MAYBE 8 5.8a Resilient Energy Systems: FloodproofingConduct floodproofing, including perimeter floodproofing (barriers /shields), of lower floors.Design and install building systems as specified by the full criterion so that the operation of those systems will not be grossly affected in case of a flood.

O YES O NO O MAYBE 4 to 8 5.8b Resilient Energy Systems: Islandable PowerProvide emergency power through an islandable photovoltaic (PV) system or an efficient and portable generator that will offer at least limited electricity for critical circuits during power outages per one of the three options listed. (Projects may earn points through Criterion 5.7b or 5.8b, but not both.)


6. MATERIALS

O YES O NO O MAYBE M 6.1 Low / No VOC Paints, Coatings and PrimersAll interior paints and primers must have VOC levels, in grams per liter, less than or equal to the thresholds established by South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule 1113.

O YES O NO O MAYBE M 6.2 Low / No VOC Adhesives and SealantsAll adhesives and sealants (including caulks) must have VOC levels, in grams per liter, less than or equal to the thresholds established by the South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule 1168.

O YES O NO O MAYBE 3 max 6.3 Recycled Content MaterialIncorporate building materials that are composed of at least 25% post-consumer recycled content or at least 50% post-industrial recycled content. [1 point]

Building materials that make up at least 75% of their project component each receive 1 point.

O YES O NO O MAYBE 4 max 6.4 Regional MaterialsUse products that were extracted, processed and manufactured within 500 miles of the project for a minimum of 50%, based on cost, of the building materials’ value.

Select any or all of these options (each material can qualify for 1 point):

• Framing materials

• Exterior materials (e.g., siding, masonry, roofing)

• Flooring materials

• Concrete /cement and aggregate material

• Drywall / interior sheathing materials

chadg

Text Box

X

chadg

Text Box

X

chadg

Text Box

X

chadg

Text Box

X

chadg

Text Box

X

chadg

Text Box

X

chadg

Text Box

X

chadg

Text Box

X ? X X


M = MANDATORY

# = OPTIONAL POINTS

MATERIALS (continued)

O YES O NO O MAYBE 1 6.5 Certified, Salvaged and Engineered Wood ProductsFor at least 25% of all structural wood products, by cost or value, commit to using either FSC-certified, salvaged products or engineered framing materials without urea formaldehyde.

O YES O NO O MAYBE M 6.6 Composite Wood Products that Emit Low / No FormaldehydeAll composite wood products must be certified as compliant with California 93120 Phase 2 OR, if using a composite wood product that does not comply with California 93120 Phase 2, all exposed edges and sides must be sealed with low-VOC sealants, per Criterion 6.2.

O YES O NO O MAYBE M 6.7a Environmentally Preferable FlooringDo not install carpets in building entryways, laundry rooms, bathrooms, kitchens / kitchenettes, utility rooms or any rooms built on foundation slabs. Where installed, all carpet products must meet the Carpet and Rug Institute’s Green Label or Green Label Plus certification for carpet, pad and carpet adhesives. Any hard surface flooring products must be either ceramic tile or solid unfinished hardwood floors, or meet the Scientific Certification System’s FloorScore program criteria (including pre-finished hardwood flooring).

O YES O NO O MAYBE 6 6.7b Environmentally Preferable Flooring: Throughout BuildingUse non-vinyl, non-carpet floor coverings throughout each building in the project.

O YES O NO O MAYBE M 6.8 Mold Prevention: Surfaces Use materials that have durable, cleanable surfaces throughout bathrooms, kitchens and laundry rooms. Materials installed in these rooms should not be prone to deterioration due to moisture intrusion or encourage the growth of mold.

O YES O NO O MAYBE M 6.9 Mold Prevention: Tub and Shower Enclosures Use moisture-resistant backing materials such as cement board, fiber cement board or equivalent per ASTM #D3273 behind tub / shower enclosures. Projects using a one-piece fiberglass tub / shower enclosure are exempt from this requirement.

O YES O NO O MAYBE 12 max 6.10 Asthmagen-Free materialsDo not install products that contain ingredients that are known to cause or trigger asthma. Key products to avoid are:• Insulation: Do not use spray polyurethane foam (SPF) or formaldehyde-containing fiberglass

batts. [4 points]• Flooring: Do not use flexible vinyl (PVC) roll or sheet flooring or carpet-backed with vinyl

with phthalates. Do not use fluid applied finish floors. [4 points]• Wall coverings: Do not use wallpaper made from vinyl (PVC) with phthalates or site-applied

high-performance coatings that are epoxy or polyurethane based. [4 points]• Composite wood: Use only ULEF products for cabinetry, subflooring and other interior

composite wood uses. [4 points]

O YES O NO O MAYBE 5 6.11 Reduced Heat-Island Effect: Roofing Use an ENERGY STAR–certified roofing product for 100% of the roof area OR install a “green” (vegetated) roof for at least 50% of the roof area and ENERGY STAR–certified roofing product for the remainder of the roof area.

chadg

Text Box

X

chadg

Text Box

X

chadg

Text Box

X

chadg

Text Box

X

chadg

Rectangle

chadg

Text Box

X

chadg

Text Box

X

chadg

Text Box

X

chadg

Text Box

X


M = MANDATORY

# = OPTIONAL POINTS

MATERIALS (continued)

O YES O NO O MAYBE M or 6.12 Construction Waste Management

6 max Commit to following a waste management plan that reduces non-hazardous construction and demolition waste through recycling, salvaging or diversion strategies through one of the three options. Achieve optional points by going above and beyond the requirement.

O YES O NO O MAYBE 3 6.13 Recycling Storage Provide separate bins for the collection of trash and recycling for each dwelling unit and all shared community rooms (if applicable).

Additionally, in multifamily buildings, provide at least one easily accessible, permanent and dedicated indoor area for the collection and storage of materials for recycling. In single-family homes, points will be accrued only if curb-side recycling pickup is available.

Collected materials should include, at a minimum, paper, cardboard, glass, metals and plastics.


7. HEALTHY LIVING ENVIRONMENT

7.1 Ventilation

O YES O NO O MAYBE M New Construction and Substantial Rehab

O YES O NO O MAYBE 12 max Moderate Rehab

For each dwelling unit, in full accordance with ASHRAE 62.2-2010, install a local mechanical exhaust system in each bathroom [4 points], a local mechanical exhaust system in each kitchen [4 points], and a whole-house mechanical ventilation system [4 points].

For each multifamily building of four stories and more, in full accordance with ASHRAE 62.1-2010, install a mechanical ventilation system for all hallways and common spaces [3 points].

For all project types, in addition to the above requirements:

• All systems and associated ductwork must be installed per manufacturer’s recommendations.

• All individual bathroom fans must be ENERGY STAR labeled, wired to turn on with the light switch, and equipped with a humidistat sensor, timer or other control (e.g., occupancy sensor, delay off switch, ventilation controller).

• If using central ventilation systems with rooftop fans, each rooftop fan must be direct-drive and variable-speed with speed controller mounted near the fan. Fans with design CFM 300-2000 must also have an ECM motor.

O YES O NO O MAYBE M 7.2 Clothes Dryer Exhaust Clothes dryers must be exhausted directly to the outdoors using rigid-type ductwork (except for condensing dryers, which must be plumbed to a drain).

chadg

Text Box

X

chadg

Text Box

X

chadg

Text Box

X

chadg

Text Box

X


M = MANDATORY

# = OPTIONAL POINTS

HEALTHY LIVING ENVIRONMENT (continued)

O YES O NO O MAYBE M 7.3 Combustion Equipment For new construction and rehab projects, specify power-vented or direct vent equipment when installing any new combustion appliance for space or water heating that will be located within the conditioned space.

In Substantial and Moderate Rehabs, if there is any combustion equipment located within the conditioned space for space or water heating that is not power-vented or direct vent and that is not scheduled for replacement, conduct initial combustion safety testing per the given guidelines.

Install one hard-wired carbon monoxide (CO) alarm with battery backup function for each sleeping zone, placed per National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 720.

O YES O NO O MAYBE 9 or 11 7.4 Elimination of Combustion Within the Conditioned Space No combustion equipment may be used for cooking (to include, but not limited to ranges, cooktops, stoves, ovens) as part of the building project [9 points] OR no combustion equipment may be used as part of the building project [11 points].

O YES O NO O MAYBE M 7.5 Vapor Retarder StrategiesInstall vapor barriers that meet specified criteria appropriate for the foundation type.

O YES O NO O MAYBE M 7.6 Water Drainage (For all New Construction projects and those Rehab projects that include replacing particular assemblies called out below)

Provide drainage of water away from walls, windows and roofs by implementing the list of techniques.

O YES O NO O MAYBE M 7.7 Mold Prevention: Water Heaters Provide adequate drainage for water heaters that includes drains or catch pans with drains piped to the exterior of the dwelling.

O YES O NO O MAYBE M 7.8 Radon MitigationFor New Construction in EPA Zone 1 areas, install passive radon-resistant features below the slab and a vertical vent pipe with junction box within 10 feet of an electrical outlet in case an active system should prove necessary in the future. For Substantial Rehab projects in EPA Zone 1, test and mitigate per the specified protocols.

O YES O NO O MAYBE M 7.9 Garage Isolation

• Provide a continuous air barrier between the conditioned space and any garage space to prevent the migration of any contaminants into the living space. Visually inspect common walls and ceilings between attached garages and living spaces to ensure that they are air-sealed before insulation is installed.

• Do not install ductwork or air handling equipment in a garage.

• Fix all connecting doors between conditioned space and garage with gaskets or otherwise make substantially airtight with weather stripping.

• Install one hard-wired carbon monoxide (CO) alarm with battery backup function for each sleeping zone of the project, placed per National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 720.

O YES O NO O MAYBE M 7.10 Integrated Pest Management Seal all wall, floor, and joint penetrations with low-VOC caulking or other appropriate nontoxic sealing methods to prevent pest entry.

chadg

Text Box

X

chadg

Text Box

X

chadg

Text Box

X

chadg

Text Box

X

chadg

Text Box

X

chadg

Text Box

X

chadg

Text Box

X

chadg

Text Box

X


M = MANDATORY

# = OPTIONAL POINTS

HEALTHY LIVING ENVIRONMENT (continued)

O YES O NO O MAYBE 9 7.11a Beyond ADA: Universal Design (New Construction)Design a minimum of 15% of the dwelling units (no fewer than one) in accordance with ICC /ANSI A117.1, Type A, Fully Accessible guidelines. Design the remainder of the ground-floor units and elevator-reachable units in accordance with ICC /ANSI A117.1, Type B.

O YES O NO O MAYBE 7 or 9 7.11b Beyond ADA: Universal Design (Substantial and Moderate Rehab)Design a minimum of 10% of the dwelling units (one, at minimum) in accordance with ICC /ANSI A117.1, Type A, Fully Accessible guidelines. [7 points]

For an additional 2 points: Design the remainder of the ground-floor units and elevator-reachable units with accessible unit entrances designed to accommodate people who use a wheelchair.

O YES O NO O MAYBE M 7.12 Active Design: Promoting Physical Activity Within the BuildingSituate at least one building stairway per the criterion to encourage use OR emphasize at least one strategy inside the building designed to increase frequency and duration of physical activity per the criterion.

O YES O NO O MAYBE 10 7.13 Active Design: Staircases and Building CirculationA staircase must be accessible and visible from the main lobby as well as visible within a 25-foot walking distance from any edge of lobby. Ensure that no turns or obstacles prevent visibility of or accessibility to the qualifying staircase from the lobby, and that the staircase is encountered before or at the same time as the elevators.

From the corridor, accessible staircases should be made visible by: Providing transparent glazing of at least 10 square feet (1 square meter) at all stair doors or at a side light OR providing magnetic door holds on all doors leading to the stairs OR removing door enclosures / vestibules.

O YES O NO O MAYBE 9 7.14 Interior and Outdoor Activity Spaces for Children and AdultsProvide an on-site dedicated recreation space with exercise or play opportunities for adults and /or children that is open and accessible to all residents; see criterion for specifics.

O YES O NO O MAYBE M 7.15 Reduce Lead Hazards in Pre-1978 Buildings (Substantial Rehab)Conduct lead risk assessment or inspection to identify lead hazards, then control for these per EPA or state / local laws and requirements.

O YES O NO O MAYBE 10 7.16 Smoke-Free BuildingImplement and enforce a no-smoking policy in all common and individual living areas, and within a 25-foot perimeter around the exterior of all residential projects.


chadg

Text Box

X

chadg

Text Box

X

chadg

Text Box

X

chadg

Text Box

X

chadg

Text Box

X

chadg

Text Box

X


M = MANDATORY

# = OPTIONAL POINTS

8. OPERATIONS, MAINTENANCE + RESIDENT ENGAGEMENT

O YES O NO O MAYBE M 8.1 Building Operations & Maintenance (O&M) Manual and Plan (For all multifamily projects)Develop a manual with thorough building operations and maintenance guidance and a complementary plan. The manual and plan should be developed over the course of the project design, development and construction stages, and should include sections/chapters addressing the list of topics.

O YES O NO O MAYBE M 8.2 Emergency Management Manual (For all multifamily projects)Provide a manual on emergency operations targeted toward operations and maintenance staff and other building-level personnel. The manual should address responses to various types of emergencies, leading with those that have the greatest probability of negatively affecting the project. The manual should provide guidance as to how to sustain the delivery of adequate housing throughout an emergency and cover a range of topics, including but not limited to:• communication plans for staff and residents• useful contact information for public utility and other service providers• infrastructure and building “shutdown” procedures

O YES O NO O MAYBE M 8.3 Resident ManualProvide a guide for homeowners and renters that explains the intent, benefits, use and maintenance of their home’s green features and practices. The Resident Manual should encourage green and healthy activities per the list of topics.

O YES O NO O MAYBE M 8.4 Resident and Property Staff OrientationProvide a comprehensive walk-through and orientation for all residents, property manager(s) and buildings operations staff. Use the appropriate manuals (see Criteria 8.1, 8.2, 8.3) as the base of the curriculum, and review the project’s green features, operations and maintenance procedures, and emergency protocols.

O YES O NO O MAYBE M 8.5 Project Data Collection and Monitoring System: 100% Owner-Paid Utility Accounts; 15% Tenant-Paid Utility Accounts

For rental properties: Collect and monitor project energy and water performance data for 100% of owner-paid utilities and 15% of tenant-paid utilities for at least 5 years. This data must be maintained in a manner that allows staff to easily access and monitor it, enabling them to make informed operations and capital planning decisions. Also allow Enterprise access to this data.

For owner-occupied units: Collect and monitor energy and water performance data in a manner that allows for easy access and review and provides the ability to influence home operations. Also allow Enterprise access to this data.

O YES O NO O MAYBE 7 or 11 8.6 Project Data Collection and Monitoring System: Greater than 15% Tenant-Paid Utility AccountsCollect and monitor project energy and water performance data for at least 5 years. This data must be maintained in a manner that allows staff to easily access and monitor it, enabling them to make informed operations and capital planning decisions. Also allow Enterprise access to this data. 16–60% of units [7 points]; 60–100% of units [11 points].


TOTAL OPTIONAL POINTS

chadg

Text Box

X

chadg

Text Box

X

chadg

Text Box

X

chadg

Text Box

X

chadg

Text Box

X

chadg

Text Box

X

Gen Cap Benton Harbor LDHA, LLC Hooker DeJong, Inc. Hayward Wells Apts 4-0860 Issuance: Bids & Permits 2017.09.08

DC D0 - 1 DESIGN/ BUILD MEPF CRITERIA COVER SHEET

SECTION DC D0 – DESIGN/ BUILD MEPF CRITERIA COVER SHEET

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

The Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing and Fire Protection systems will be delivered on a Design / Build basis. The design of each system must follow the scope specifications in the sections to follow. Any var-iations between the final design and these scope specifications must be identified by subcontractor and approved by Oakwood Construction prior to construction start. Each Design / Builder will be the engineer of record for their final design construction documents. The final construction documents must be fully code compliant, Enterprise Green Communities 2015 compli-ant, include equipment schedules and calculations, and be in a format which allows permits to be issued by the local and / or state authorities having jurisdiction. The cost of the design and permit must be in-cluded in the cost of the work. The Mechanical subcontractor must submit application for natural gas service timely to the utility com-pany, and is responsible for coordinating location of all gas meters and equipment and scheduling service installation. The Electrical subcontractor must submit application for electric service timely to the utility company, and is responsible for coordinating location of all electric meters and equipment and scheduling service instal-lation. Oakwood Construction will host MEPF coordination meetings to assist the Design / Build subcontractors in coordinating their designs with each other so that each subcontractor can efficiently install their sys-tems with a minimum of conflicts and collisions. Final coordinated drawings must be submitted to Oakwood Construction within 60 days of contract award. Submittals including shop drawings, cut sheets, material / color samples, which comply with the code and Enterprise Green Communities 2015 standards, must be submitted to Oakwood Construction within 30 days of contract award.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 NOT USED

END OF SECTION DC D0


DC D0 - 2 DESIGN/ BUILD MEPF CRITERIA COVER SHEET


DC D3 - 1PLUMBING CRITERIA

SECTION DC D3PLUMBING CRITERIA

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Refer to Enterprise Green Communities (EGC) Checklist for added project performancerequirements.

B. Plumbing elements comprise the following:1. Domestic Water: All elements required to distribute water to fixtures, including piping and

equipment for water cooling, heating and storage.a. Water Distribution: Piping within the building, serving fixtures. specialties, and

equipment.b. Plumbing Equipment: Pumps, tanks, filters, and treatment equipment.

2. Sanitary Waste: All elements required for removal of sanitary waste, including piping,venting, discharge and disposal, and equipment.

3. Rain Water Drainage: All elements required for drainage of rain water from building areasin which it may accumulate and drainage of clear wastes from building services; notincluding gutters and downspouts or subdrainage.

4. Plumbing Fixtures: All fixtures necessary for sanitation, occupancy, and use, that areconnected to water supply or drainage; not including water heating or conditioningequipment or kitchen appliances.a. Fixtures Required: As specified by code.

1) Lavatories: One in each bathroom.2) Lavatories: At public and private restrooms and bathrooms.3) Kitchen Sinks: Double compartment; one in each residential kitchen and

kitchenette on first floor.4) Drinking Fountains: one on first floor and within 10 feet of the restrooms.

(a) Include bottle filler on first floor high/low water cooler.5) Showers: One in each residential bathroom.6) Outdoor Supplies: Not more than 75 feet apart on building facade and one on

each facade of building.C. Utility Sources and Outlets:

1. Water Source: Existing public utility.2. Sewage Disposal: Existing service to be maintained.3. Rain Water Drainage Outlet: Existing public utility storm drainage system independent of

sanitary sewer.D. Products: Where specific products are required or allowed, use products complying with the

additional requirements specified elsewhere.PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

A. Water Piping, Buried:1. Use the following:

a. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic pipe and fittings, with solvent welded joints.B. Water Piping, Not Buried:

1. Use one of the following:a. Hot Water: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC) plastic pipe and fittings, with

solvent welded joints.b. Cold Water: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC) plastic pipe and fittings, with

solvent welded joints.2. Do not use:

a. Acrylonitrile butadiene styrene (ABS) plastic pipe.



b. Copper pipe or tube.c. Galvanized steel pipe.d. Polybutylene (PB) plastic pipe or tubing.e. Cross-linked polyethylene (PEX) plastic pipe or tubing.f. Cross-linked polyethylene/aluminum/cross-linked polyethylene (PEX/AL/PEX) pipe or

tubing.g. Polyethylene/aluminum/polyethylene (PE/AL/PE) pipe or tubing.

C. Insulating Materials: 1. Use one of the following:

a. Cellular glass.b. Fiberglass.c. Flexible cellular elastomeric.

D. Valves For Shut-Off or Isolation of Equipment, Fixtures, and Parts of Systems:1. Use one of the following:

a. Ball valves.b. Gate valves.

2. Do not use:a. Butterfly valves.

E. Valves For Flow Control, Throttling, or Bypass:1. Use one of the following:

a. Ball valves.b. Gate valves.

2. Do not use:a. Butterfly valves.

F. Water Heating Method:1. Use the following:

a. Gas-fired water heaters with storage tanks for units and community space.1) Storage at 140 deg F with a building mixing valve set at 120 deg F.

b. Provisions for Gas-fired water heater in community space (separate water and gasmeters)

2. Do not use:a. Electric water heaters.

2.02 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING AND EQUIPMENTA. Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping, Buried:

1. Use one or more of the following:a. Cast iron pipe and fittings, hub-and-spigot, with neoprene or lead/oakum joint seals.b. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) DWV pipe and fittings, with solvent welded or gasketed

joints.B. Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping, Not Buried:

1. Use one or more of the following:a. Cast iron pipe and fittings, hubless, with neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamps.b. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) DWV pipe and fittings, with solvent welded joints.

C. Floor Drains:1. Use one of the following:

a. Cast iron.b. Copper.c. PVC.

2.03 RAIN WATER PIPING AND DRAINSA. Rain Water Piping, Not Buried:

1. Use one or more of the following:



a. Cast iron pipe, hubless, with neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamps.b. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) DWV pipe and fittings, with solvent welded joints.

B. Rain Water Piping, Buried:1. Use one of the following:

a. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe and fittings, with solvent welded or gasketed joints.C. Roof Drains, Area Drains, and Floor Drains:

1. Use one or more of the following:a. Bronze.b. Stainless steel.

2.04 PLUMBING FIXTURESA. Water Closets:

1. Use the following:a. Tank type.b. Vitreous china.c. Floor mounted fixturesd. Elongated Bowle. 16-1/2 inch rim height.f. 1.28 GPFg. Closed front toilet seat with slow close lid

B. Lavatories:1. Use the following:

a. Integral solid plastic resin (By Others).b. 1.0 GPM single handle (EPA Water Sense) ADA faucet

C. Kitchen Sinks:1. Use the following:

a. Stainless steel, undercoated.b. Countertop-mounted drop in fixture.c. Two compartmentd. Overall size 33 inches by 22 inchese. Standard: 8-1/2 inch deepf. ADA Compliant 5-1/5 inch deepg. Single handle 1.5 GPM faucet (EPA Water Sense)h. 1/3 HP food disposal with plug in power cord.

D. Showers:1. Use one of the following:

a. Fiberglass reinforced acrylic resin.b. 1.5 GPM (EPA Water Sense) pressure balance single handle mixing valve.c. 1.5 GPM full spray shower head.d. In ADA units, add roll over foam, grab bars and 60 inch hose

E. Drinking Fountains:1. Use the following:

a. Electric water coolers.b. Dual unit with single cooling unitc. 8 GPH flow rated. ADA Compliant

F. Utility (Mop or Janitor's) Sinks:1. Use the following:

a. Floor-mounted fixtures.b. Molded Plastic with Stainless Steel rimc. Wall mounted reenforced hose spicket, vacuum breaker, check valves and bucket lip



d. Stainless Steel backsplashesPART 3 DESIGN CRITERIA3.01 BASIC FUNCTION

A. Provide water supply necessary for building occupancy and use.1. Meter and service for the units and community space2. Separate Meter and service for the "White Space".

B. Provide delivery of domestic water to points of utilization.1. Provide hot and cold domestic water to plumbing fixtures as required to the units and

commuity space.C. Provide drainage for disposal of waste as required by the code and for the following:

1. Fixtures and equipment which have a waste connection or a domestic water connection.a. Waste connections are not required on icemakers, refrigerators with icemakers,

exterior hose bibbs, and coffee makers.2. Cleaning Drainage: Floor drains located in:

a. Public Bathroomsb. Unit Laundry Rooms

3. Indirect Drainage: Floor drains to receive piping from:a. Equipment drain pans.b. Condensate drains.

D. Provide drainage for disposal of rain water and clear wastes, as required by the code.E. Provide plumbing fixtures necessary for occupancy, use, and sanitation.

3.02 AMENITY AND COMFORT CRITERIAA. Hot Water Supply:

1. Provide pressure balanced shower valves which limit the water temperature to 120degrees F.

2. Provide a master thermostatic mixing valve which limits the hot water supply temperatureto 120 degrees F.

B. Noise:1. Provide water hammer arrestors on each fixture branch to eliminate noise produced by the

domestic water fixtures.2. Minimize noise produced by fixtures.

C. Convenience:1. Water Heaters:

a. Locate water heaters in utility room.2. Water Connections: Hot water on the left side of fixtures and cold water on the right side

of fixtures.3. Faucets: Single action operation in the following locations.

a. Lobby restrooms.b. Kitchen.c. Restrooms.

4. Install floor drains flush with the surface on which they are installed, out of pedestriantraffic patterns wherever possible.

5. Do not locate floor drains and floor cleanouts in doorways or directly in traffic paths.D. Condensation:

1. Insulate horizontal and vertical rain water piping, including the underbody of roof drains,using material of sufficient insulating value to prevent condensation.

E. Odors:1. Do not locate sanitary waste vent openings where odors are noticeable by occupants or by

occupants of adjacent properties or where odor-bearing air may enter building spaces.



a. Do not terminate vents within 10 feet horizontally of doors, windows, air intake orexhaust openings, or other openings in the exterior enclosure, unless vent terminationis at least 3 feet above the top of the opening.

3.03 HEALTH AND SAFETY CRITERIAA. Health: Provide potable water.

1. Public utility water can be considered to be potable.2. Maintain the safety of the potable water source at all times.3. Do not connect the potable water source to any non-potable water source.4. Keep animals and vermin out of open pipes, tanks, and other system components.5. Keep other contaminants out of the distribution systems, equipment, and water source.6. All openings and edges around the sides and bottom of each fixture permanently sealed

with waterproof material.7. Do not locate indirect drains in toilet rooms, unventilated or inaccessible rooms, or in air

distribution or return plenums.8. Provide a backflow prevention device in the sewer discharge to prevent back-up into

plumbing fixtures and floor drains.B. Waste Disposal: Connect each fixture to sanitary drainage system for proper disposal of waste

and harmful materials.C. Protection of Potable Water Supply: As required by code.D. Burn Hazards:

1. Maximum Fixture Discharge Temperature: 120 degrees F.2. Maximum Exposed Surface Temperature: 95 degrees F.3. Protect wheelchair occupants from hot water pipes and drains.

3.04 DURABILITY CRITERIAA. Warranty:

1. Electrically and Fuel Operated Equipment: Standard 3 year manufacture defect warranty.2. Plumbing Fixtures: 5 years on chinaware and mechanical parts

B. Temperature Changes: Provide method of allowing thermal expansion of domestic water in thehot water system.1. Provide expansion tanks with bladders.

C. Maximum Discharge Temperature into Sewer: 120 degrees F.3.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE CRITERIA

A. Fixture Functions:1. Lavatories: Standard spout, with integral overflow.2. Showers: With single-action hot-cold mixing valve.3. Kitchen Sinks: Swivel spout.4. Utility (Mop or Janitor's) Sinks: Filling of standard rolling mop bucket required; spout

designed to support full bucket of water.B. Water Consumption:

1. Water Closets: 1.28 gallons per flush, maximum, with complete waste removal in oneflush.

2. Lavatory Faucets: 1.5 gallonss per minute..3. Shower Heads: 1.75 gallons per minute, maximum.

C. Capacity of Water Service: Provide adequate water flow and pressure to supply peak demandrequirements. Comply with requirements specified in the code and the following.1. Size the water supply to exceed code by 10 percent.2. Water Flow:

a. Maximum Velocity: 8 fps at the design flow rate.D. Waste Pipe Sizing:



1. Size piping as required by code.E. Ease of Maintenance and Repair:

1. Do not locate underground piping beneath electrical service, equipment, or footings.2. Provide labeling of all piping and valving per ANSI-ASME A13.1.3. Isolation of Piping Segments and Equipment: Provide a means of isolating the following:

a. Each building from main water service. Provide a shut-off valve located inside a valvebox whose removable access cover is at grade level.

b. Water meter from building piping.c. Each tenant space from building service, excluding locations where there is only one

fixture with its own isolation valves.d. Each water branch from main service.e. Each vertical riser from piping below.f. Each water branch to fixtures or equipment from main vertical riser.g. Each plumbing fixture, storage tank, and item of equipment, so that removal of one

will not necessitate shutdown of others.h. Individual fixtures and equipment. Provide an isolation device within 3 feet of pipe

connection to item.4. Provision for Cleaning of Drainage Piping: Provide a cleanout as required by code and as

follows:a. At the upstream end of each horizontal sanitary drainage pipe, for cleaning in direction

of flow.5. Plumbing Fixtures:

a. Faucet valves easily removable and replaceable as a single unit.b. Each pipe connection to each fixture provided with a stop valve, for easy

disconnection from water service.c. Provide access to all concealed connections, such as floor and wall cleanouts and

slip-joint connections.END OF SECTION DC D3


DC D4 - 1HVAC CRITERIA

SECTION DC D4HVAC CRITERIA


A. Refer to 2015 Enterprise Green Communities (EGC) Checklist for added project performancerequirements.

B. HVAC: Artificial means of maintaining interior space comfort and air quality, including heating,cooling, ventilation, and energy supply.

C. The HVAC system consists of the following elements used to maintain occupant comfort:1. Heat Generation: Elements required to heat building.

a. Heat generation elements comprise furnaces and Electric Baseboard.2. Refrigeration: Elements necessary to generate the cooling required.

a. Refrigeration elements comprise condensing units.3. Air Distribution: Elements required to outside, supply, return, and exhaust air associated

with heating, cooling and ventilating the building.4. Other HVAC elements required to maintain occupant comfort.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. AHRI 210/240 - Standard for Performance Rating of Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air-Source

Heat Pump Equipment; 2008.B. AHRI 340/360 - Performance Rating of Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air-Conditioning and

Heat Pump Equipment; 2007.C. ASHRAE Std 52.2 - Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices for Removal

Efficiency by Particle Size; 2012, with 2015 amendments.D. ASHRAE Std 62.1 - Laboratory Method of Testing to Determine the Sound Power in a Duct;

2013.PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 HVAC SYSTEM TYPES

A. Use the following:1. Stand-Alone HVAC Systems:

a. Forced-draft, natural gas furnace with split-system cooling.2.02 HEAT GENERATION

A. Furnaces: 1. Use the following:

a. Gas-fired furnaces.b. BASE SYSTEM: Condensing, single stage, natural gas-fired furnaces.

1) Tenent Unit size based on 40,000 btu/h unit.2) Heavy-duty aluminized-steel tubular heat exchanger3) Stainless-steel secondary heat exchanger4) single-speed PSC blower motor5) Comply with Enterprise Green Communities (EGC) criteria, provide submittals

for EGC Consultant approval.c. ALTERNATE: Condensing, two stage, natural gas-fired furnaces.

1) Tenent Unit size based on 30,000 btu/h unit.2) Heavy-duty aluminized-steel tubular heat exchanger3) Stainless-steel secondary heat exchanger4) Energy-efficient, multi-speed ECM blower motor5) Comply with Enterprise Green Communities (EGC), provide submittals for EGC

Consultant approval.



B. Chimneys and Flues: 1. Use the following for the furnaces and water heaters:

a. PVC Combustion Air and Vent.b. PVC Combustion Air with CPVC Vent

2. Use the following for the direct vent gas fierplace:a. Direct Vent Double wall: 0.020" aluminum inner wall and 0.018" galvanized steel outer

wall.C. Auxiliary Equipment:

1. Use the following:a. Electric Baseboard Heat with built in thermostat in Storage Rooms (greater than 50

sq.ft), Electric Rooms and Water Rooms..2.03 REFRIGERATION

A. Refrigeration Units:1. Use the following:

a. Matched furnace Evaporators with remote Condensing units on equipment pads.1) Non-HCFC refrigerant required, R-410A prefered.

b. If required by Mechanical Code in the Commercial Space and Community Room,furnish a full air side economizer system with exhaust fan and enthalpy control.

c. Commercial Space and Community Room must have equivalent cooling of 1 Ton per400 SF.

2.04 AIR DISTRIBUTIONA. Ductwork:

1. Use one or more of the following:a. Galvanized sheet metal duct.b. Supply air Flexible duct.

1) From supply and return air diffuser back towards main supply trunks, restrictflexible duct lengths to 5'-0" maximum.

2) Lengths over 14 inches shall be upside by 2 inches from SMACNA sizing toaccount for restrictions and added pressure drop.

B. Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles:1. Use one or more of the following:

a. Steel diffusers.b. Aluminum diffusers.

2. All ceiling mounted diffusers shall be centered above and in proximity to exterior windowswith balancing dampers and directional diffusers.

C. Air Filters:1. Use the following:

a. Pleated panel filters. MERV 8 minimum, Comply with EGC requirements.PART 3 DESIGN CRITERIA3.01 BASIC FUNCTION

A. Provide artificial means of controlling temperature, velocity and direction of air motion in theinterior spaces enclosed by the shell, and reduction of airborne odors and particulates.

B. Provide natural gas for use by HVAC and plumbing equipment in accordance with codeC. Provide the necessary equipment and infrastructure to deliver heat to the conditioned spaces.D. Provide the necessary equipment to generate the cooling required to maintain building comfort.E. Distribute air to maintain the required space conditions.

1. Maximum Air Velocity:a. For 0.5 Inches W.G. Duct Pressure Class: 1000 feet per minute.



F. Provide the necessary exhaust ductwork and fan equipment (Energy Star) to provideintermittent exhaust from bathroom to maintain code required ventilation and humidity/odorcontrol.1. Bath exhaust shall be controlled by timer switch compliant with Enterprise Green

Communities (EGC) requirements.2. Provide galvanized sheet metal ductwork or pipe with insulation over duct.

G. Provide the necessary exhaust ductwork to provide the range exhaust hood venting to thesidewall of the building.1. Provide galvanized sheet metal ductwork or pipe with insulation over duct.

H. Provide the necessary exhaust ductwork to provide the laundry dryer exhaust to the sidewall ofthe building within 35 equivalent feet to not require long vent dryers.1. Provide galvanized sheet metal ductwork or pipe with insulation over duct.

I. Provide the necessary outside air ductwork to provide the code required mechancical ventilationto each tenant, corridor and commercial furnace system. Furnish control dampers to cycleoutside air with furnace fan. Provide modulating damper for the Community Room furnacesystem.1. Provide galvanized sheet metal ductwork or pipe with insulation over duct.

J. Provide the elements necessary to control the building's indoor environment.1. Provide a programmable thermostat (5-2) for each zone to maintain the required space

conditions and local, packaged control for each major piece of HVAC equipment. Abuilding control system is not required.

2. Provide C02 control of the outside air damper for the Community Room minimumventilation system per the Michigan Mechanical Code

K. Where HVAC elements also must function as elements defined within another element group,meet the requirements of both element groups.

3.02 AMENITY AND COMFORT CRITERIAA. Space Temperature Setpoint:

1. Units, Cooridors and Community Spaces: 72 deg F, plus or minus 3 deg F..2. Heating only spaces to 68 deg F, plus or minus 5 deg F.

B. Indoor Air Quality: Provide sufficient ducted mechanical outside air to provide ventilation toobtain acceptable indoor quality, determined using the Ventilation Rate Procedure of ASHRAE62.1 or current Michigan Mechanical Code.

C. Cleanliness:1. Provide filtration of the air distributed to the occupied spaces.2. Filter Efficiency: MERV 8, minimum, in accordance with ASHRAE 52.2.

3.03 HEALTH AND SAFETY CRITERIAA. Systems Safety:

1. BASE SYSTEM Natural Gas: Comply with ICC International Fuel Gas Code.a. Natural Gas System Working Pressure: 1/4 psig, maximum.b. Natural Gas Entrance into Facility: Locate the service meters at least 3 feet from

ignition sources.1) One utility meter for the Community Space and gas water heaters2) One meter for "White Box"3) One utility meter for each Tenant space

B. Electrical Shock Prevention:1. Electrically Operated Equipment: Tested and listed by UL.

3.04 DURABILITY CRITERIAA. Warranty:

1. Furnaces: 5 years on parts, 20 years on heat exchangers



2. Condensors:5 years on parts and compressors3. Exhaust fans: 3 years on parts4. Electric Baseboard: 1 year on parts5. Thermostats: 1 year on parts

3.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE CRITERIAA. Commissioning:

1. HVAC Contractor shall provide an independent third party Test and Balance Report.a. HVAC Contractor shall balance the system per Code, and retest if required.

B. Energy Efficiency:1. Furnaces, Energy Star, 95% DOE AFUE based upon Isolated Combustion System (ICS).2. Unitary Air-Conditioner System Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio (SEER): 13.0 ,

minimum, at standard rating conditions specified by AHRI 210/240 or AHRI 340/360.C. Genral Capital Personnel Training:

1. Maintenance: Minimum of 2 hours, for 1 person, for each separate system type.END OF SECTION DC D4


DC D6 - 1ELECTRICAL CRITERIA

SECTION DC D6ELECTRICAL CRITERIA


A. Electrical: Provision and distribution of electrical power to operate all electrically-operateddevices, including those included under other services and those provided separately by theGenral Capital; artificial lighting to illuminate spaces and tasks, both interior and exterior,independent of reliance on natural light; and grounding systems; comprising the followingelements.

B. Comply with 2015 Enterprise Green Communities (EGC) checklist/ design criteria.C. Electrical Energy Supply and Generation: Existing Utility power sources.

1. Electrical Power Source: Existing public utility.D. Service and Distribution: Service entrance equipment, distribution equipment, transformers,

service and feeder wiring (conductors and raceways), and other elements required for acomplete functional system.1. Main Electrical Service: The utility will provide a service transformer to convert its

distribution voltage to the building's utilization voltage.E. Branch Circuits: Branch circuit wiring and receptacles and other branch circuit wiring systems,

comprising the following elements:1. Branch circuit breakers.2. Conductors and cable from panelboards to fixtures, wiring devices, and mechanical

equipment.3. Raceways and boxes.4. Wiring devices, including, but not limited to, receptacles, wall switches, wall dimmers, and

wall plates.F. Interior Lighting: Comprising the following elements:

1. Luminaires for general illumination.2. Emergency lighting.3. Illuminated exit signs.4. Path of Egress Lighting.

G. Exterior Area Lighting: See Bid AlternatesH. Technology/Phone/internet/cable TV- Systems. Coordinate all requirements with owner

furnished drawings and specifications, furnished bt the owner's consultant.1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. 36 CFR 1191 - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings andFacilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines; current edition.

B. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010.C. ASHRAE Std 90.1 - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings;

2013, Including All Addenda.D. IEEE 142 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power

Systems; 2007.E. IEEE 739 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Energy Management in Industrial and Commercial

Facilities; 1995.F. IEEE 1100 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Powering and Grounding Sensitive Electronic

Equipment; 2005.G. IES (LH) - Lighting Handbook; 10th edition, 2011.H. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.



I. NFPA 780 - Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems; 2014.PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 UTILITY SERVICE ENTRANCE

A. Configuration:1. Maintain existing Underground service entrance to utility provided transformer and

underground to the main distribution panel.2. Maintain a separate house meter and main distribution panel for the residential and

commercial spaces.3. Maintain individual apartment meters from a central meter center on the ground floor.

2.02 SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTIONA. Transformer Applications:

1. Distribution Transformers For Ordinary Loads: Use general purpose transformers,maintain existing.

B. Secondary Service and Distribution Feeders, when required:1. Conduits:

a. Use one of the following:1) Below Grade: PVC conduit.2) Exterior, Exposed: IMC conduit or GRS conduit.3) Interior, Exposed: IMC conduit or EMT.4) Interior, Concealed: EMT or FMC.5) Interior, Concealed in Apartments: NM Cable if approved by the AHJ

2. Conductors:a. Use one of the following:

1) Copper.b. Do not use:

1) Aluminum.C. Main Service Equipment:

1. Types of Equipment:a. Use one of the following:

1) Low voltage switchgear.2) Switchboards.3) Distribution panels.

2. Main Devices:a. Use one of the following:

1) Power circuit breakers.2) Molded case circuit breakers.3) Fused switches.

3. Branch Devices:a. Use one of the following:

1) Circuit breakers.2) Fused switches.

4. Busbars:a. Use one of the following:

1) Copper. (Full Rated)b. Do not use:

1) Plated aluminum.D. Branch Circuit Panelboards:

1. Busbars:a. Use one of the following:

1) Copper.



2. Circuit Breakers:a. Use one of the following:

1) Molded case circuit breakers.2) Fused switches.

2.03 BRANCH CIRCUITSA. Branch Circuit Wiring, when required:

1. Use the following:a. Nonmetallic Sheathed Cable at For branch circuit wiring in dry locations within

multifamily dwellings permitted to be of Types III, IV, and V construction. Shall beapproved by AHJ..

b. Single conductor building wire installed in suitable raceway unless otherwiseindicated, permitted, or required.

c. Provide a separate neutral conductor for each circuit. Shared neutral conductors shallnot be used.

d. Branch circuit wiring, 20 amp, 120-volt that exceeds 15 ft. to the 1st outlet shall beincreased to #10 AWG Cu.

2. Do not use the following:a. Surface mounted raceway.

B. Receptacle Cover Plates: 1. Use the following:

a. Material and Finish: Plastic, Finish selected by Owner.b. Provide "Fire-Rated" device boxes in shared rated walls between apartments & attics.c. Do not install outlets back to back to help eliminate sound transmission through the

walls.d. Material and Finish: Plastic, Ivory.e. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, brushed.

2.04 LIGHTINGA. Interior Lighting:

1. General lighting will be L.E.D. fixtures with color temperature of 3500 Deg K. and CRI(color rendition index) of 82 or greater. Interior lighting commons area lighting will be acombination of 2 x 4 recessed lay-in, Architectural direct/indirect suspended and recessed“can” type fixtures with both direct and indirect lighting in general areas, under counterlighting at sinks, etc. . Utility type lighting fixtures in mechanical, electrical and storageareas. Local room dimming functions will be provided in selected rooms such asconference rooms, etc.. Interior lighting control will be a combination of local switching viaoccupancy/vacancy sensors. Occupancy sensor are to be used where required by andcode in public restrooms, general offices, and Laundry rooms. Luminaires shall be"Energy-Star" rated or better.

2. Provide IC rated enclosures for luminaires that extend into insulated spaces.B. Exit Lighting:

1. Exit fixtures will be self-testing, energy efficient, long-life, LED. Exit lighting will bepowered from the Life-Safety section of the engine generator.

C. Emergency Lighting:1. Emergency, exit, and “path-of-egress” lighting will be provided in all corridors, stairs,

assembly area, building entrances, etc. as required by code. Emergency lighting will bepowered from the Life-Safety section of the engine generator.

D. Exterior Area Lighting Luminaires:1. Exterior building, walk, canopy, drive and parking lot lighting will consist of sharp cut-off

type fixtures, which comply with ‘Dark-Sky’ laws and light trespass requirements, L.E.D.,some will be on emergency power for Life Safety egress and night/security lighting. Exterior lighting will be controlled via combination of dusk-to-dawn and programmed on/off



functions. Emergency lighting will be powered from the Life-Safety section of the enginegenerator.

PART 3 DESIGN CRITERIA3.01 BASIC FUNCTION

A. Provide or maintain existing electrical power with the appropriate characteristics to operate allelectrically operated devices, including those in other services.1. Capacity: Calculated in accordance with NFPA 70.2. Power connections will be provided, mechanical equipment, fire alarm, communications,

security, etc. as required.3. Wiring devices will be Commercial specification grade in public and commons areas,

Residential specification grade in apartments. With ‘Child-Safe’ types were required bycode. With self testing GFIC type receptacles at sinks, at special equipment, and outdoorsplus AFCI circuit breakers in residential units as required by code.

4. Main Switchboards: In accordance with code plus 10 percent spare capacity whenreplacing existing.

5. Branch Circuit Panelboards: In accordance with code plus 10 percent spare capacitywhen replacing existing.

6. Apartment Load Centers: In accordance with code plus 10 percent spare capacity whenreplacing existing.

B. Emergency Power: Provide emergency power as required by code including the following:1. Exit Lights, Signs, and Egress Lighting: as required by code.2. Fire Detection and Alarm Systems: Duration as required by code.

C. Standby Power: Provide standby power as required by code including the following:D. Distribution: Distribute electric power for equipment circuits, lighting circuits, receptacle circuits,

and electrical utilization devices.1. Branch Circuits: Provide adequate electrical power and safe and efficient distribution from

panelboards to lighting, wiring devices, equipment, and appliances, based on the projectprogram, requirements of other sections.

E. Technology/Phone/internet/cable TV- Systems1. Provide a complete Phone/internet/cable TV system through out. Outlets will be 4-11/16"

square, deep recessed back boxes with single gang, raised cover.2. Separate, secure, T-com rooms will be provided for IDF/MDF, phone/data/fire

alarm/security electronic equipment throughout the facility. Rooms will be provide with fullsized 4 X 8 plywood mounting panels for equipment, with normal outlets to powerequipment and copper ground bus and TVSS receptacles for equipment.

3. Provide technology shown on architectural floor plans and ceiling plans to included but notlimited to speakers, wireless access points and data outlets. Conduit not required for lowvoltage cabling. Coordinate final location with owner.

F. Lighting: Provide artificial means of lighting interior and exterior spaces. Lighting levels are tobe adequate for senior housing.1. Interior Lighting: Provide artificial lighting for all interior spaces that is adequate in quality

and distribution for the performance of tasks typical for the type of space and thecharacteristics of the intended population, regardless of the availability of natural light.

2. Exterior Lighting: See Bid Alternates, Provide artificial lighting for exterior spaces, asrequired by the project program, that is adequate in quantity, quality, and distribution forthe performance of tasks typical for the type of outdoor space and the characteristics ofthe intended user population.

G. Grounding: Provide grounding systems that:1. Comply with applicable recommendations of IEEE 142 and IEEE 1100.

H. Fire Alarm System:



1. The fire Alarm System will be an addressable system that communicates the exact identityand location of each fire alarm device, its condition and status.

2. The fire alarm panel continuously polls all devices for normal, alarm or trouble and will becapable of programming the sensitivity of each sensor.

3. Addressable Fire alarm pull stations, audio/visual, Photoelectric fire/smoke detector,Photoelectric duct detectors, water flow devices, etc. will be installed in the new facility asrequired for proper fire system detection coverage.

4. The fire alarm system design will be based on an addressable system or similar. Provisions will be made for extension into the future devices.

5. Fire Alarm System will be setup for remote monitoring by the owner’s monitoringcontractor.

6. Accesible Apartments shall have audio/visual photoelectric smoke alarms that are bothhardwired and interconnected with long-life battery backup. Non accessible units to haveaudio units only.

7. Hearing and visually impaired units to be provided with smoke alarms in all rooms, strobevisual signal wired to units smoke detectors in all rooms of the dwelling unit including thebathroom, door bell with push button at the unit entry and visual signaling device and aTTY capable telephone.

8. Apartments shall have CO detectors where required.I. Substantiation:

1. Proposal: Description of systems required, sources, input-side capacities, identification ofservice voltages and amperage, means of distribution, and major equipment.

2. Design Development: Single-line diagrams, showing feeder and equipment sizes;engineering calculations showing input- and output-side capacities and loads and sizes ofdistribution elements; required electrical room sizes.

3. Construction Documents: Complete system details, riser diagrams, equipmentcharacteristics, and calculations. Required for selective coordination & Arc-Fault Study.

4. Construction: Continuity test of wiring systems prior to functional performance testing.5. Construction and Closeout: Functional performance testing.6. Closeout: For each panelboard, balance current on each phase conductor within 15

percent.3.02 AMENITY AND COMFORT CRITERIA

A. Accessibility: Comply with ADA Standards for accessible design.B. Artificial Light Levels: Provide maintained ambient illuminance values for various activities

based on the primary visual tasks to be accommodated and that are within the ranges specifiedin the IES Lighting Handbook, except for the following:1. Emergency Lighting: In addition to exit signs and means of egress lighting, provide

emergency illumination of not less than 1 fc for a minimum of 1 hour in primary spaces.C. Lighting Cutoff:

1. Configure exterior area lighting to avoid spill light on adjacent property and streets.2. Configure exterior area lighting to minimize illumination of building facade and building

windows, in particular.D. Sound and Noise:

1. Provide generator exhaust silencer ratings of the industrial (12-18dB(A)) type.2. Provide generator enclosures of the sound attenuated type.3. Provide uninterruptible power supply systems noise generation of no more than 69 dBA

measured at 5 feet.E. Convenience:

1. Provide convenience receptacles at intervals no greater than 10 feet along the base of allwall areas in renovated Community Areas.

2. Locate metering and monitoring facilities in a single location not in a mechanicalequipment room.



3. Locate metering for tenant units in one location in building.F. Appearance:

1. Location of Service Transformer: Existing locations to be maintained.2. Do not locate switchboards, transformers, and panelboards in corridors, lobbies, or

stairwells.3. Conceal electrical conduit in walls and behind ceilings in the occupied spaces.4. Conceal grounding conductors and ground terminals wherever possible.5. Character of Lighting Fixtures: Coordinated with architecture and other building systems

and appropriate to finish level.6. Provide emergency lights which appear to be normal space luminaires.

a. Exception: Mechanical and electrical rooms may have self-contained emergencylights.

7. Provide exterior area lighting that is compatible with overall project appearance andcoordinated with site layout and building organization.a. Luminaire Mounting:

1) Installation on poles, wall mounting brackets, architectural fixtures, or suspendedcables:

2) Style compatible with building design.3) Material and finish compatible with exterior building elements.

b. Luminaire Design:1) Material and finish of housing compatible with mounting.

3.03 HEALTH AND SAFETY CRITERIAA. Fire Hazard:

1. Locate electrical energy generation equipment away from storage areas and flammablematerials.

2. Provide branch circuit elements in compliance with code and that are UL listed or labeled.a. Provide elements that have their flame spread and smoke developed ratings printed

on them.3. Fire Resistant Construction: Provide lighting elements throughout the project that are

made of incombustible materials in compliance with code and that are UL listed or labeled,with flame spread and smoke developed ratings printed on product.

B. Electrical Hazards: Design in accordance with all NFPA standards that apply to the occupancy,application, and design.1. Control access to spaces housing electrical components and allow access only by

qualified personnel.2. Provide electrical distribution equipment with locking cabinets, doors, and panels when it is

located in public areas.C. Intrusion: Protect electrical energy generation and service and distribution equipment from

unauthorized access and vandalism.3.04 DURABILITY CRITERIA

A. Expected Service Life Span:1. Electrical:

a. Power Distribution Equipment: Same as building service life.2. Lighting Fixtures: Minimum 10 years.3. All Grounding Systems: Life of the building without requiring any more maintenance than

annual inspection and minor repairs not more frequently than annually.4. Exterior Area Lighting: Provide a system which will last a minimum of 10 years in service

without major repairs.B. Minimum Outdoor Operating Temperature: Provide lighting systems that operate at

temperatures as low as -20 degrees F.



3.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE CRITERIAA. Energy Efficiency:

1. Comply with requirements of IEEE Standard 739.2. Comply with requirements of ASHRAE 90.1.3. Interior Lighting Controls: Provide level of control of lighting appropriate to type of space

and Genral Capital's requirements for energy conservation.a. Occupancy Controls are to be utilized as required by the Energy Code.

4. Exterior Area Lighting Controls: Provide daylight sensing controls.5. Ballasts: Provide electronic or energy efficient ballasts with fluorescent lamps.

B. Ease of Cleaning:1. Interior Lighting: Provide luminaires that do not collect dirt rapidly and are readily

cleanable.2. Exterior Area Lighting: Provide luminaires of IES Category I, for minimum dirt

accumulation and LDD factors.C. Ease of Maintenance:

1. Service and Distribution Equipment:a. Select equipment which is segmented into modules to ease replacement of

component failures.END OF SECTION DC D6

ELECTRONIC MEDIA REQUEST FORM (for use of electronic information/data)

DISCLAIMER FOR USE OF ELECTRONIC CAD FILES

At your request, we will provide electronic files for your convenience and use in the preparation of shop drawings (or other approved uses) for the referenced project, subject to the following terms and conditions: We make no representation as to the compatibility of these files with your hardware or your software. Data contained on these electronic files are part of our instruments of service, are copyrighted and shall not be used for any purpose other than as a convenience in the preparation of shop drawings (or other approved uses) for the referenced project only. Any other use will be at your sole risk and without liability or legal exposure to us. You agree to make no claim and hereby waive, to the fullest extent permitted by law, any claim or cause of action of any nature against us, our officers, directors, employees, agents or sub consultants that may arise out of or in connection with your use of the electronic files. Files being sent are for your exclusive use and you agree not to transmit them to any one else without prior permission and re-submittal of this agreement. Furthermore, you shall, to the fullest extent permitted by law, indemnify and hold us harmless against all damages, liabilities or costs, including reasonable attorneys' fees and defense costs, arising out of or resulting from your use of these electronic files. These electronic files are not construction documents. Differences may exist between these electronic files and corresponding hard-copy construction documents. We make no representation regarding the accuracy or completeness of the electronic files you receive. In the event that a conflict arises between the signed or sealed hard-copy construction documents prepared by us and the electronic files, the signed or sealed hard-copy construction documents shall govern. You are responsible for determining if any conflict exists. By your use of these electronic files, you are not relieved of your duty to fully comply with the contract documents, including, and without limitation, the need to check, confirm and coordinate all dimensions and details, take field measurements, verify field conditions and coordinate your work with that of other contractors for the project. Because information presented on the electronic files can be modified, unintentionally or otherwise, we reserve the right to remove all indication of ownership and/or involvement from each electronic display. Under no circumstances shall delivery of the electronic files for use by you be deemed a sale by us, and we make no warranties, either express or implied, of merchantability and fitness for any particular purpose. In no event shall we be liable for any loss of profit or any consequential damages as a result of your use or reuse of these electronic files. "As-Built" Cad Drawings have been generated using information submitted to HOOKER | DE JONG by the Construction Manager. The information and update of the construction documents is based on marked-up drawings of the contractors' addendums, bulletins, change orders and field directives which may or may not have been verified by HOOKER | DE JONG. Unless you reply to the contrary within 3 business days from the time the file(s) have been sent from HOOKER | DE JONG to you, you agree to the contents of this notice and that you have successfully received and opened the files requested. We may not hold translated versions of our files longer than 3 business days.

ELECTRONIC MEDIA REQUEST FORM (for use of electronic information/data)

PROJECT NAME:

HOOKER | DE JONG Project#

(HOOKER | DE JONG Project # and drawing Number are located in the lower right hand corner of the drawing title block)

DOCUMENTS REQUESTED (Drawing Number): ISSUE DATE:

Purpose for Request:

UNDERSIGNED:

Signature: Date:

Printed Name: Title:

Company:

Address:

City, State ZIP:

APPROVED BY:

Signature: Date:

Printed Name: Total Cost: $

Payment for files should be received prior to their release (or facsimile of completed check).


01 30 00 - 1ADMINISTRATIVE

REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01 30 00ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS


A. Preconstruction meeting.B. Progress meetings.C. Construction progress schedule.D. Submittals for review, information, and project closeout.E. Number of copies of submittals.F. Submittal procedures.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Additional coordination

requirements.1.03 PROJECT COORDINATION

A. Project Coordinator: General Contractor.B. During construction, coordinate use of site and facilities through the Project Coordinator.C. Comply with Project Coordinator's procedures for intra-project communications; submittals,

reports and records, schedules, coordination drawings, and recommendations; and resolution ofambiguities and conflicts.

D. Make the following types of submittals to HDJ through the Project Coordinator:1. Requests for interpretation.2. Requests for substitution.3. Shop drawings, product data, and samples.4. Test and inspection reports.5. Manufacturer's instructions and field reports.6. Applications for payment and change order requests.7. Coordination drawings.8. Correction Punch List and Final Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion.9. Closeout submittals.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USEDPART 3 EXECUTION3.01 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING

A. HDJ will schedule a meeting after Notice of Award.B. Attendance Required:

1. Genral Capital.2. HDJ.3. Oakwood Construction.

C. Agenda:1. Execution of Genral Capital-Oakwood Construction Agreement.2. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates.3. Distribution of Contract Documents.4. Submission of list of Subcontractors, list of Products, schedule of values, and progress

schedule.5. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for

payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures.6. Scheduling.


01 30 00 - 2ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

D. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with twocopies to HDJ, Genral Capital, participants, and those affected by decisions made.

3.02 PROGRESS MEETINGSA. General Contractor will schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at

maximum bi-monthly intervals.B. General Contractor will make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for

participants, preside at meetings.C. Project Coordinator will make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for

participants, preside at meetings.D. Attendance Required: General contractor Job superintendent, Genral Capital, HDJ, as

appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting.E. Agenda:

1. Review minutes of previous meetings.2. Review of Work progress.3. Field observations, problems, and decisions.4. Identification of problems that impede, or will impede, planned progress.5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals.6. Maintenance of progress schedule.7. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules.8. Planned progress during succeeding work period.9. Coordination of projected progress.10. Maintenance of quality and work standards.11. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination.12. Other business relating to Work.

F. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with onecopy to HDJ, Genral Capital, participants, and those affected by decisions made.

3.03 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULEA. Within 10 days after date established in Notice to Proceed, submit preliminary schedule defining

planned operations for the first 30 days of Work, with a general outline for remainder of Work.B. If preliminary schedule requires revision after review, submit revised schedule within 10 days.C. Within 10 days after review of preliminary schedule, submit draft of proposed complete

schedule for review.1. Include written certification that major contractors have reviewed and accepted proposed

schedule.D. Within 10 days after joint review, submit complete schedule.E. Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment.

3.04 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEWA. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review:

1. Product data.2. Shop drawings.3. Samples for selection.4. Samples for verification.

B. Submit to HDJ for review for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with informationgiven and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.

C. Samples will be reviewed only for aesthetic, color, or finish selection.D. After review, provide copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

article below .


01 30 00 - 3ADMINISTRATIVE

REQUIREMENTS

3.05 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATIONA. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for information:

1. Design data.2. Enterprise Green Communities (EGC) submittals and reports, also submitted to EGC

Consultant.3. Certificates.4. Test reports.5. Inspection reports.6. Manufacturer's instructions.7. Manufacturer's field reports.8. Other types indicated.

B. Submit for HDJ's knowledge as contract administrator or for Genral Capital. No action will betaken.

3.06 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUTA. Submit Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion.B. Submit Final Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion.C. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout:

1. Project record documents.2. Operation and maintenance data.3. Warranties.4. Bonds.5. Other types as indicated.

3.07 NUMBER OF COPIES OF SUBMITTALSA. Documents: Submit one electronic copy in Portable Document Format (PDF) format; an

electronically-marked up file will be returned. Ensure all securities are turned off. Create PDFsat native size and right-side up; Do not mix original sizes, send as Separate PDF files. Illegiblefiles will be rejected. Maximum file size for each submittal is 7 MB.

B. Extra Copies at Project Closeout: See Section 01 78 00.C. Provide original's of all color samples for review.D. Samples: Submit the number specified in individual specification sections; one of which will be

retained by HDJ.1. After review, produce duplicates.2. Retained samples will not be returned to Oakwood Construction unless specifically so

stated.3.08 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. Shop Drawing Procedures:1. Prepare accurate, drawn-to-scale, original shop drawing documentation by interpreting the

Contract Documents and coordinating related Work.2. Generic, non-project specific information submitted as shop drawings do not meet the

requirements for shop drawings.B. Transmit each submittal with a copy of approved submittal form.C. Each submittal is to be complied into one PDF with all the required information per the

submittals sections of each specifications section.D. Each electronic submittal shall be named as follows: The specification section number - One

digit sequential number, The revision number beginning with zero and then the specificationname and submittal type.Example: 07 42 14-1 Rev 0 INSULATED METAL PANELS - PRODUCT DATA.


01 30 00 - 4ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

E. For specifications sections that have multiple submittals requested increase the one digitsequential number by one.Example: 07 42 14-2 Rev 0 INSULATED METAL PANELS - PRODUCT DATA.

F. For submittals that have to be resubmitted increase the revision number by one.Example 07 42 14-1 Rev 1 INSULATED METAL PANELS - PRODUCT DATA.

G. The submittal type is to be either product data, shop drawing, or samples.H. Transmit each submittal with a Contractors transmittal form in a merged PDF file with the

submittal.I. On the transmittal identify the project name, the project number, the Oakwood Construction,

Subcontractor or supplier; List the submittal as named above in the body of the transmittal.J. Apply Oakwood Construction's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval,

verification of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordinationof information is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents.

K. Transmit each transmittal and submittal electronically via email to [email protected] [email protected]

L. Provide the following in the subject line of the email : Benton Harbor 4-0860 Submittals forReview.

M. In the body of the email list the submittal for review. Use the naming convention listed above forthe submittal.

N. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and coordinate submission of related items.O. Provide a submittal schedule for the requested submittals listed in eachP. For each submittal for review, allow 15 days excluding delivery time to and from the Oakwood

Construction.Q. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations that may be

detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work.R. Provide space for Oakwood Construction and HDJ review stamps.S. When revised for resubmission, identify all changes made since previous submission.T. Distribute reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to

comply with requirements.U. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed.



01 45 33 - 1CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL

INSPECTIONS

SECTION 01 45 33CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS

PART 1 GENERAL - NOT USED1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Code-required special inspections.B. Testing services incidental to special inspections.C. Submittals.D. Manufacturers' field services.E. Fabricators' field services.

1.02 DEFINITIONSA. Code or Building Code: 2012 Edition of the International Building Code and, more specifically,

Chapter 17 - Structural Tests and Inspections, of same.B. Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ): Agency or individual officially empowered to enforce the

building, fire and life safety code requirements of the permitting jurisdiction in which the Projectis located.

C. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST).D. Special Inspection:

1. Special inspections are inspections and testing of materials, installation, fabrication,erection or placement of components and connections mandated by the AHJ that also require special expertise to ensure compliance with the approved contract documents andthe referenced standards.

2. Special inspections are separate from and independent of tests and inspections conductedby Genral Capital or Oakwood Construction for the purposes of quality assurance andcontract administration.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; 2011.B. ACI 530/530.1/ERTA - Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures

and Related Commentaries; 2011.C. AISC 341 - Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings; 2010.D. AISC 360 - Specification for Structural Steel Buildings; 2010.E. ASTM C31/C31M - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the

Field; 2012.F. ASTM C172/C172M - Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete; 2014.G. ASTM D3740 - Standard Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in the

Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction;2012a.

H. ASTM E329 - Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection and/orTesting; 2014a.

I. ASTM E543 - Standard Specification for Agencies Performing Nondestructive Testing; 2013.J. ASTM E605/E605M - Standard Test Methods for Thickness and Density of Sprayed

Fire-Resistive Material (SFRM) Applied to Structural Members; 1993 (2015)e1.K. ASTM E736/E736M - Standard Test Method for Cohesion/Adhesion of Sprayed Fire-Resistive

Materials Applied to Structural Members; 2000 (2015)e1.L. ASTM E2570/E2570M - Standard Test Methods for Evaluating Water-Resistive Barrier (WRB)

Coatings Used under Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS) or EIFS with Drainage;2007 (2014)e1.


01 45 33 - 2CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS

M. AWCI 117 - Technical Manual 12-B; Standard Practice for the Testing and Inspection of FieldApplied Thin Film Intumescent Fire-Resistive Materials; an Annotated Guide; 2014.

N. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2015.O. AWS D1.3/D1.3M - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel; 2008.P. AWS D1.4/D1.4M - Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel; 2011.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. Special Inspection Agency Qualifications: Prior to the start of work, the Special Inspection

Agency shall:1. Submit agency name, address, and telephone number, names of full time registered

Engineer and responsible officer.2. Submit copy of report of laboratory facilities inspection made by NIST Construction

Materials Reference Laboratory during most recent inspection, with memorandum ofremedies of any deficiencies reported by the inspection.

3. Submit certification that Special Inspection Agency is acceptable to AHJ.B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Prior to the start of work, the Testing Agency shall:

1. Submit agency name, address, and telephone number, and names of full time registeredEngineer and responsible officer.

2. Submit copy of report of laboratory facilities inspection made by NIST ConstructionMaterials Reference Laboratory during most recent inspection, with memorandum ofremedies of any deficiencies reported by the inspection.

3. Submit certification that Testing Agency is acceptable to AHJ.C. Manufacturer's Qualification Statement: Manufacturer shall submit documentation of

manufacturing capability and quality control procedures. Include documentation of AHJapproval.

D. Fabricator's Qualification Statement: Fabricator shall submit documentation of fabricationfacilities and methods as well as quality control procedures. Include documentation of AHJapproval.

E. Special Inspection Reports: After each special inspection, Special Inspector shall promptlysubmit two copies of report; one to HDJ and one to the AHJ.1. Include:

a. Date issued.b. Project title and number.c. Name of Special Inspector.d. Date and time of special inspection.e. Identification of product and specifications section.f. Location in the Project.g. Type of special inspection.h. Date of special inspection.i. Results of special inspection.j. Conformance with Contract Documents.

2. Final Special Inspection Report: Document special inspections and correction ofdiscrepancies prior to the start of the work.

F. Fabricator Special Inspection Reports: After each special inspection of fabricated items at theFabricator's facility, Special Inspector shall promptly submit two copies of report; one to HDJand one to AHJ.1. Include:

a. Date issued.b. Project title and number.c. Name of Special Inspector.d. Date and time of special inspection.



INSPECTIONS

e. Identification of fabricated item and specification section.f. Location in the Project.g. Results of special inspection.h. Verification of fabrication and quality control procedures.i. Conformance with Contract Documents.j. Conformance to referenced standard(s).

G. Test Reports: After each test or inspection, promptly submit two copies of report; one to HDJand one to AHJ.1. Include:

a. Date issued.b. Project title and number.c. Name of inspector.d. Date and time of sampling or inspection.e. Identification of product and specifications section.f. Location in the Project.g. Type of test or inspection.h. Date of test or inspection.i. Results of test or inspection.j. Conformance with Contract Documents.

H. Certificates: When specified in individual special inspection requirements, Special Inspectorshall submit certification by the manufacturer, fabricator, and installation subcontractor to HDJand AHJ, in quantities specified for Product Data.1. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit

supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate.I. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit reports to HDJ and AHJ.

1. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with informationgiven and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.

J. Fabricator's Field Reports: Submit reports to HDJ and AHJ.1. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information

given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.1.05 SPECIAL INSPECTION AGENCY

A. The Special Inspection Agency may employ and pay for services of an independent testingagency to perform testing and sampling associated with special inspections and required by thebuilding code.

B. Employment of agency in no way relieves Oakwood Construction of obligation to perform workin accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.

1.06 TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCIESA. Employment of agency in no way relieves Oakwood Construction of obligation to perform work

in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Special Inspection Agency Qualifications:1. Independent firm specializing in performing testing and inspections of the type specified in

this section.B. Testing Agency Qualifications:

1. Independent firm specializing in performing testing and inspections of the type specified inthis section.

C. Copies of Documents at Project Site: Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenceddocument.



PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USEDPART 3 EXECUTION3.01 SCHEDULE OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS, GENERAL

A. Frequency of Special Inspections: Special Inspections are indicated as continuous or periodic.1. Continuous Special Inspection: Special Inspection Agency shall be present in the area

where the work is being performed and observe the work at all times the work is inprogress.

2. Periodic Special Inspection: Special Inspection Agency shall be present in the area wherework is being performed and observe the work part-time or intermittently and at thecompletion of the work.

3.02 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS FOR STEEL CONSTRUCTIONA. High-Strength Bolt, Nut and Washer Material:

1. Verify identification markings conform to ASTM standards specified in the approvedcontract and to AISC 360, A3.3; periodic.

2. Submit manufacturer's certificates of compliance; periodic.B. High-Strength Bolting Installation: Verify items listed below comply with AISC 360, Section

M2.5.1. Snug tight joints; periodic.

C. Structural Steel and Cold Formed Steel Deck Material:1. Structural Steel: Verify identification markings conform to AISC 360, Section M3.5;

periodic.2. Other Steel: Verify identification markings conform to ASTM standards specified in the

approved contract documents; periodic.3. Submit manufacturer's certificates of compliance and test reports; periodic.

D. Weld Filler Material:1. Verify identification markings conform to AWS standards specified in the approved

contract documents and to AISC 360, A3.5; periodic.2. Submit manufacturer's certificates of compliance; periodic.

E. Welding:1. Structural steel and cold formed steel deck:

a. Complete and partial joint penetration groove welds: Verify compliance with AWSD1.1/D1.1M; continuous.

b. Multipass fillet welds: Verify compliance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M; continuous.c. Single pass fillet welds less than 5/16 inch wide: Verify compliance with AWS D1.1;

continuous.d. Plug and slot welds: Verify compliance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M; continuous.e. Single pass fillet welds 5/16 inch or greater: Verify compliance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M;

periodic.f. Floor and roof deck welds: Verify compliance with AWS D1.3/D1.3M; continuous.

2. Reinforcing Steel: Verify items listed below comply with AWS D1.4 and ACI 318, Section3.5.2.a. Verification of weldability; periodic.b. Reinforcing steel resisting flexural and axial forces in intermediate and special

moment frames as well as boundary elements of special structural walls of concreteand shear reinforcement; continuous.

c. Shear reinforcement; continuous.d. Other reinforcing steel; periodic.

F. Steel Frame Joint Details: Verify compliance with approved contract documents.1. Details, bracing and stiffening; periodic.2. Member locations; periodic.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=AWS%20D1.1/D1.1M









INSPECTIONS

3. Application of joint details at each connection; periodic.G. Cold formed steel trusses spanning 60 feet or more; periodic.

3.03 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS FOR CONCRETE CONSTRUCTIONA. Reinforcing Steel, Including Prestressing of Tendons and Placement: Verify compliance with

approved contract documents and ACI 318, 3.5 and 7.1 through 7.7; periodic.B. Reinforcing Steel Welding: Verify compliance with AWS D1.4 and ACI 318, 3.5.2; periodic.C. Bolts Installed in Concrete: Where allowable loads have been increased or where strength

design is used, verify compliance with approved contract documents and ACI 318, 8.1.3 and21.2.8 prior to and during placement of concrete; continuous.

D. Anchors Installed in Hardened Concrete: Verify compliance with ACI 318, 3.8.6, 8.1.3 and21.2.8; periodic.

E. Design Mix: Verify plastic concrete complies with the design mix in approved contractdocuments and with ACI 318, Chapter 4 and 5.2; periodic.

F. Concrete Sampling Concurrent with Strength Test Sampling: Each time fresh concrete issampled for strength tests, verify compliance with ASTM C172, ASTM C31 and ACI 318, 5.6and 5.8 and record the following, continuous:1. Slump.2. Air content.3. Temperature of concrete.

G. Specified Curing Temperature and Techniques: Verify compliance with approved contractdocuments and ACI 318, 5.11 through 5.13; periodic.

H. Concrete Strength in Situ: Verify concrete strength complies with approved contract documentsand ACI 318, 6.2, for the following.

I. Formwork Shape, Location and Dimensions: Verify compliance with approved contractdocuments and ACI 318, 6.1.1; periodic.

J. Materials: If the Oakwood Construction cannot provide sufficient data or documentary evidencethat concrete materials conform to the quality standards of ACI 318, the AHJ will require that theSpecial Inspector verify compliance with the appropriate standards and criteria in ACI 318,Chapter 3.

3.04 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS FOR MASONRY CONSTRUCTIONA. Verify each item below complies with approved contract documents and the applicable articles

of ACI 530/530.1/ERTA.1. Inspections and Approvals:

a. Verify compliance with the required inspection provisions of the approved contractdocuments; periodic.

b. Verify approval of submittals required by contract documents; periodic.2. Compressive Strength of Masonry: Verify compressive strength of masonry units prior to

start of construction unless specifically exempted by code; periodic.3. Slump Flow and Visual Stability Index (VSI): Verify compliance as self consolidating grout

arrives on site; continuous.4. Joints and Accessories: When masonry construction begins, verify:

a. Proportions of site prepared mortar; periodic.b. Construction of mortar joints; periodic.c. Location of reinforcement, connectors, prestressing tendons, anchorages, etc.;

periodic.5. Structural Elements, Joints, Anchors, Protection: During masonry construction, verify:

a. Size and location of structural elements; periodic.b. Type, size and location of anchors, including anchorage of masonry to structural

members, frames or other construction; periodic.



c. Size, grade and type of reinforcement, anchor bolts and prestressing tendons andanchorages; periodic.

d. Welding of reinforcing bars; continuous.6. Grouting Preparation: Prior to grouting, verify:

a. Grout space is clean; periodic.b. Correct placement of reinforcing, connectors, prestressing tendons and anchorages;

periodic.c. Correctly proportioned site prepared grouts and prestressing grout for bonded

tendons; periodic.d. Correctly constructed mortar joints; periodic.

7. Preparation of Grout Specimens, Mortar Specimens and Prisms: Observe preparation ofspecimens; periodic.

3.05 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS FOR SOILSA. Materials and Placement: Verify each item below complies with approved construction

documents and approved geotechnical report.1. Design bearing capacity of material below shallow foundations; periodic.2. Design depth of excavations and suitability of material at bottom of excavations; periodic.3. Materials, densities, lift thicknesses; placement and compaction of backfill: continuous.4. Subgrade, prior to placement of compacted fill; periodic.

B. Testing: Classify and test excavated material; periodic.3.06 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS FOR SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTANT MATERIALS

A. Sprayed Fire-Resistant Materials, General:1. Verify compliance of sprayed-fire resistant materials with specific fire-rated assemblies

shown in the approved contract documents, and with the applicable requirements of thebuilding code.

2. Perform special inspections after rough installation of electrical, mechanical, plumbing,automatic fire sprinkler and suspension systems for ceilings.

B. Physical and visual tests: Verify compliance with fire-resistance rating.1. Condition of substrates; periodic.2. Thickness of sprayed fire-resistant material; periodic.3. Density of sprayed fire-resistant material in pounds per cubic foot; periodic.4. Bond strength (adhesion and cohesion); periodic.5. Condition of finished application; periodic.

C. Structural member surface conditions:1. Inspect structural member surfaces before application of sprayed fire-resistant materials;

periodic.2. Verify preparation of structural member surfaces complies with approved contract

documents and manufacturer's written instructions; periodic.D. Application:

1. Ensure minimum ambient temperature before and after application complies with themanufacturer's written instructions; periodic.

2. Verify area where sprayed fire-resistant material is applied is ventilated as required by themanufacturer's written instructions during and after application; periodic.

E. Thickness: Verify that no more than 10 percent of thickness measurements taken from sprayedfire-resistant material are less than thickness required by fire-resistance design in approvedcontract documents. In no case shall the thickness of the sprayed fire-resistant material be lessthan the minimum below.1. Minimum Allowable Thickness: Tested according to ASTM E605, periodic.

a. Design thickness 1 inch or greater: Design thickness minus 1/4 inch.b. Design thickness greater than 1 inch: Design thickness minus 25 percent.



INSPECTIONS

2. Structural Members: Test according to ASTM E605. Test no less than 25 percent ofstructural members on each story of the structure or portion thereof; periodic.a. Beams and girders: Make nine thickness measurements around beam or girder at

each end of a 12 inch by 12 inch length.b. Wide flanged columns: Make twelve thickness measurements around column at

each end of a 12 inch by 12 inch length.c. Hollow structural sections and pipe columns: Make four thickness measurements

around hollow structural section or pipe column at each end of a 12 inch by 12 inchlength.

F. Density: Verify density of sprayed fire-resistant material is no less than density required by thefire-resistance design in the approved contract documents.

G. Bond Strength: Verify adhesive and cohesive bond strength of sprayed fire-resistant materialsis no less than 150 pounds per square foot when in-place samples of the cured material aretested according to ASTM E736 and as described below.

3.07 OTHER SPECIAL INSPECTIONSA. Provide for special inspection of weather resistive barrier per ES Report, ESR-1233. This

special inspection is required in compliance with 1704.1 and 17.04.13. Comply with Figure 9 ofES Report ESR-1233.

B. Provide for special inspection of work that, in the opinion of the AHJ, is unusual in nature.C. Provide for special inspections requested by other disciplines as noted in Drawings.D. For the purposes of this section, work unusual in nature includes, but is not limited to:

1. Construction materials and systems that are alternatives to materials and systemsprescribed by the building code.

2. Unusual design applications of materials described in the building code.3. Materials and systems required to be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's

instructions when said instructions prescribe requirements not included in the buildingcode or in standards referenced by the building code.

3.08 SPECIAL INSPECTION AGENCY DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIESA. Special Inspection Agency shall:

1. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with HDJ and Oakwood Construction inperformance of services.

2. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified referencestandards.

3. Ascertain compliance of materials and products with requirements of Contract Documents.4. Promptly notify HDJ and Oakwood Construction of observed irregularities or

non-conformance of work or products.5. Perform additional tests and inspections required by HDJ.6. Submit reports of all tests or inspections specified.

B. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performedby the same agency on instructions by HDJ.

C. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be paid for byOakwood Construction.

3.09 TESTING AGENCY DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIESA. Testing Agency Duties:

1. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with HDJ and Oakwood Construction inperformance of services.

2. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specifiedstandards.

3. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents.



4. Promptly notify HDJ and Oakwood Construction of observed irregularities ornon-conformance of work or products.

5. Perform additional tests and inspections required by HDJ.6. Submit reports of all tests or inspections specified.

B. Limits on Testing or Inspection Agency Authority:1. Agency may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents.2. Agency may not approve or accept any portion of the work.3. Agency may not assume any duties of Oakwood Construction.4. Agency has no authority to stop the work.

C. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performedby the same agency on instructions by HDJ.

D. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be paid for byOakwood Construction.

3.10 CONTRACTOR DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIESA. Oakwood Construction Responsibilities, General:

1. Deliver to agency at designated location, adequate samples of materials for specialinspections that require material verification.

2. Cooperate with agency and laboratory personnel; provide access to the work, tomanufacturers' facilities, and to fabricators' facilities.

3. Provide incidental labor and facilities:a. To provide access to work to be tested or inspected.b. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be tested or

inspected.c. To facilitate tests or inspections.d. To provide storage and curing of test samples.

4. Notify HDJ and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring testingor inspection services.

5. Arrange with Genral Capital's agency and pay for additional samples, tests, andinspections required by Oakwood Construction beyond specified requirements.

3.11 MANUFACTURERS' AND FABRICATORS' FIELD SERVICESA. When specified in individual specification sections, require material suppliers, assembly

fabricators, or product manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe siteconditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up ofequipment, to test, adjust, and balance equipment as applicable, and to initiate instructionswhen necessary.

B. Submit qualifications of observer to HDJ 30 days in advance of required observations.C. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are

supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions.END OF SECTION 01 45 33


01 57 13 - 1TEMPORARY EROSION AND

SEDIMENT CONTROL

SECTION 01 57 13TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL


A. Prevention of erosion due to construction activities.B. Prevention of sedimentation of waterways, open drainage ways, and storm and sanitary sewers

due to construction activities.C. Restoration of areas eroded due to insufficient preventive measures.D. Performance bond.E. Compensation of Genral Capital for fines levied by authorities having jurisdiction due to

non-compliance by Oakwood Construction.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 01 35 15 - Enterprise Green Communities (EGC) Certification Procedures: EGC creditsrelating to erosion and sedimentation control.

B. Section 31 10 00 - Site Clearing: Limits on clearing; disposition of vegetative clearing debris.C. Section 31 22 00 - Grading: Temporary and permanent grade changes for erosion control.D. Section 32 11 23 - Aggregate Base Courses: Temporary and permanent roadways.E. Section 32 92 19 - Seeding: Permanent turf for erosion control.F. Section 32 93 00 - Plants: Permanent plantings for erosion control.G. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete for temporary and permanent erosion

control structures indicated on drawings.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM D4355/D4355M - Standard Test Method for Deterioration of Geotextiles by Exposure toLight, Moisture and Heat in a Xenon Arc Type Apparatus; 2014.

B. ASTM D4491 - Standard Test Methods for Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permittivity;1999a (Reapproved 2014).

C. ASTM D4533 - Standard Test Method for Trapezoid Tearing Strength of Geotextiles; 2011.D. ASTM D4632/D4632M - Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of

Geotextiles; 2015a.E. ASTM D4751 - Standard Test Method for Determining Apparent Opening Size of a Geotextile;

2012.F. ASTM D4873 - Standard Guide for Identification, Storage, and Handling of Geosynthetic Rolls

and Samples; 2002 (Reapproved 2009).1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Develop and follow an Erosion and Sedimentation Prevention Plan and submit periodicinspection reports.

B. Do not begin clearing, grading, or other work involving disturbance of ground surface cover untilapplicable permits have been obtained; furnish all documentation required to obtain applicablepermits.1. Obtain and pay for permits and provide security required by authority having jurisdiction.

C. Timing: Put preventive measures in place as soon as possible after disturbance of surfacecover and before precipitation occurs.

D. Storm Water Runoff: Control increased storm water runoff due to disturbance of surface coverdue to construction activities for this project.


01 57 13 - 2TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL

1. Prevent runoff into storm and sanitary sewer systems, including open drainage channels,in excess of actual capacity or amount allowed by authorities having jurisdiction, whicheveris less.

2. Anticipate runoff volume due to the most extreme short term and 24-hour rainfall eventsthat might occur in 50 years.

E. Erosion On Site: Minimize wind, water, and vehicular erosion of soil on project site due toconstruction activities for this project.1. Control movement of sediment and soil from temporary stockpiles of soil.2. Prevent development of ruts due to equipment and vehicular traffic.3. If erosion occurs due to non-compliance with these requirements, restore eroded areas at

no cost to Genral Capital.F. Erosion Off Site: Prevent erosion of soil and deposition of sediment on other properties caused

by water leaving the project site due to construction activities for this project.1. Prevent windblown soil from leaving the project site.2. Prevent tracking of mud onto public roads outside site.3. Prevent mud and sediment from flowing onto sidewalks and pavements.4. If erosion occurs due to non-compliance with these requirements, restore eroded areas at

no cost to Genral Capital.G. Sedimentation of Waterways On Site: Prevent sedimentation of waterways on the project site,

including rivers, streams, lakes, ponds, open drainage ways, storm sewers, and sanitarysewers.1. If sedimentation occurs, install or correct preventive measures immediately at no cost to

Genral Capital; remove deposited sediments; comply with requirements of authoritieshaving jurisdiction.

2. If sediment basins are used as temporary preventive measures, pump dry and removedeposited sediment after each storm.

H. Sedimentation of Waterways Off Site: Prevent sedimentation of waterways off the project site,including rivers, streams, lakes, ponds, open drainage ways, storm sewers, and sanitarysewers.1. If sedimentation occurs, install or correct preventive measures immediately at no cost to

Genral Capital; remove deposited sediments; comply with requirements of authoritieshaving jurisdiction.

I. Open Water: Prevent standing water that could become stagnant.J. Maintenance: Maintain temporary preventive measures until permanent measures have been

established.1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Enterprise Green Communities (EGC) Submittals: Submit all submittals required in this section

in accordance with procedures specified in Section 01 35 15.C. Erosion and Sedimentation Control Plan:

1. Obtain the approval of the Plan by authorities having jurisdiction.D. Inspection Reports: Submit report of each inspection; identify each preventive measure,

indicate condition, and specify maintenance or repair required and accomplished.E. Maintenance Instructions: Provide instructions covering inspection and maintenance for

temporary measures that must remain after Substantial Completion.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MATERIALS

A. Mulch: Use one of the following:1. Straw or hay.


01 57 13 - 3TEMPORARY EROSION AND

SEDIMENT CONTROL

2. Wood waste, chips, or bark.3. Erosion control matting or netting.

B. Grass Seed For Temporary Cover: Select a species appropriate to climate, planting season,and intended purpose. If same area will later be planted with permanent vegetation, do not usespecies known to be excessively competitive or prone to volunteer in subsequent seasons.

C. Bales: Air dry, rectangular straw bales.1. Cross Section: 14 by 18 inches, minimum.2. Bindings: Wire or string, around long dimension.

D. Bale Stakes: One of the following, minimum 3 feet long:1. Steel U- or T-section, with minimum mass of 1.33 lb per linear foot.2. Wood, 2 by 2 inches in cross section.

E. Silt Fence Fabric: Polypropylene geotextile resistant to common soil chemicals, mildew, andinsects; non-biodegradable; in longest lengths possible; fabric including seams with thefollowing minimum average roll lengths:1. Average Opening Size: 30 U.S. Std. Sieve, maximum, when tested in accordance with

ASTM D4751.2. Permittivity: 0.05 sec^-1, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D4491.3. Ultraviolet Resistance: Retaining at least 70 percent of tensile strength, when tested in

accordance with ASTM D4355 after 500 hours exposure.4. Tensile Strength: 100 lb-f, minimum, in cross-machine direction; 124 lb-f, minimum, in

machine direction; when tested in accordance with ASTM D4632.5. Elongation: 15 to 30 percent, when tested in accordance with ASTM D4632.6. Tear Strength: 55 lb-f, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D4533.7. Color: Manufacturer's standard, with embedment and fastener lines preprinted.

F. Silt Fence Posts: One of the following, minimum 5 feet long:1. Steel U- or T-section, with minimum mass of 1.33 lb per linear foot.2. Softwood, 4 by 4 inches in cross section.3. Hardwood, 2 by 2 inches in cross section.

G. Gravel: See Section 32 11 23 for aggregate.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine site and identify existing features that contribute to erosion resistance; maintain suchexisting features to greatest extent possible.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Schedule work so that soil surfaces are left exposed for the minimum amount of time.

3.03 SCOPE OF PREVENTIVE MEASURESA. In all cases, if permanent erosion resistant measures have been installed temporary preventive

measures are not required.B. Construction Entrances: Traffic-bearing aggregate surface.

1. Width: As required; 20 feet, minimum.2. Length: 50 feet, minimum.3. Provide at each construction entrance from public right-of-way.4. Where necessary to prevent tracking of mud onto right-of-way, provide wheel washing

area out of direct traffic lane, with drain into sediment trap or basin.C. Linear Sediment Barriers: Made of silt fences.

1. Provide linear sediment barriers:a. Along downhill perimeter edge of disturbed areas, including soil stockpiles.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20D4751


































b. Along the top of the slope or top bank of drainage channels and swales that traversedisturbed areas.

c. Along the toe of cut slopes and fill slopes.d. Across the entrances to culverts or drains that receive runoff from disturbed areas.

2. Space sediment barriers with the following maximum slope length upslope from barrier:a. Slope of Less Than 2 Percent: 100 feet..b. Slope Between 2 and 5 Percent: 75 feet.c. Slope Between 5 and 10 Percent: 50 feet.d. Slope Between 10 and 20 Percent: 25 feet.e. Slope Over 20 Percent: 15 feet.

D. Storm Drain Curb Inlet Sediment Trap: Protect each curb inlet using one of the followingmeasures:1. Filter fabric wrapped around hollow concrete blocks blocking entire inlet face area; use one

piece of fabric wrapped at least 1-1/2 times around concrete blocks and secured toprevent dislodging; orient cores of blocks so runoff passes into inlet.

2. Straw bale row blocking entire inlet face area; anchor into pavement.E. Storm Drain Drop Inlet Sediment Traps: As detailed on drawings.F. Temporary Splash Pads: Stone aggregate over filter fabric; size to suit application; provide at

downspout outlets and storm water outlets.G. Soil Stockpiles: Protect using one of the following measures:

1. Cover with polyethylene film, secured by placing soil on outer edges.2. Cover with mulch at least 4 inches thickness of pine needles, sawdust, bark, wood chips,

or shredded leaves, or 6 inches of straw or hay.H. Mulching: Use only for areas that may be subjected to erosion for less than 6 months.

1. Wood Waste: Use only on slopes 3:1 or flatter; no anchoring required.I. Temporary Seeding: Use where temporary vegetated cover is required.

3.04 INSTALLATIONA. Traffic-Bearing Aggregate Surface:

1. Excavate minimum of 6 inches.2. Place geotextile fabric full width and length, with minimum 12 inch overlap at joints.3. Place and compact at least 6 inches of 1.5 to 3.5 inch diameter stone.

B. Silt Fences:1. Store and handle fabric in accordance with ASTM D4873.2. Where slope gradient is less than 3:1 or barriers will be in place less than 6 months, use

nominal 16 inch high barriers with minimum 36 inch long posts spaced at 6 feet maximum,with fabric embedded at least 4 inches in ground.

3. Where slope gradient is steeper than 3:1 or barriers will be in place over 6 months, usenominal 28 inch high barriers, minimum 48 inch long posts spaced at 6 feet maximum,with fabric embedded at least 6 inches in ground.

4. Where slope gradient is steeper than 3:1 and vertical height of slope between barriers ismore than 20 feet, use nominal 32 inch high barriers with woven wire reinforcement andsteel posts spaced at 4 feet maximum, with fabric embedded at least 6 inches in ground.

5. Install with top of fabric at nominal height and embedment as specified.6. Do not splice fabric width; minimize splices in fabric length; splice at post only, overlapping

at least 18 inches, with extra post.7. Fasten fabric to wood posts using one of the following:

a. Four 3/4 inch diameter, 1 inch long, 14 gage nails.b. Five 17-gage staples with 3/4 inch wide crown and 1/2 inch legs.

8. Fasten fabric to steel posts using wire, nylon cord, or integral pockets.
























































01 57 13 - 5 TEMPORARY EROSION ANDSEDIMENT CONTROL

9. Wherever runoff will flow around end of barrier or over the top, provide temporary splashpad or other outlet protection; at such outlets in the run of the barrier, make barrier notmore than 12 inches high with post spacing not more than 4 feet.

C. Straw Bale Rows:1. Install bales in continuous rows with ends butting tightly, with one bale at each end of row

turned uphill.2. Install bales so that bindings are not in contact with the ground.3. Embed bales at least 4 inches in the ground.4. Fill gaps between ends of bales with loose straw wedged tightly.5. Place soil excavated for trench against bales on the upslope side of the row, compacted.

D. Mulching Over Small and Medium Areas:1. Dry Straw and Hay: Apply 4 to 6 inches depth.2. Wood Waste: Apply 2 to 3inches depth.3. Erosion Control Matting: Comply with manufacturer's instructions.

E. Temporary Seeding:1. When hydraulic seeder is used, seedbed preparation is not required.2. When surface soil has been sealed by rainfall or consists of smooth undisturbed cut

slopes, and conventional or manual seeding is to be used, prepare seedbed by scarifyingsufficiently to allow seed to lodge and germinate.

3. If temporary mulching was used on planting area but not removed, apply nitrogen fertilizerat 1 pound per 1000 sq ft.

4. On soils of very low fertility, apply 10-10-10 fertilizer at rate of 12 to 16 pounds per 1000 sqft.

5. Incorporate fertilizer into soil before seeding.6. Apply seed uniformly; if using drill or cultipacker seeders place seed 1/2 to 1 inch deep

deep.7. Irrigate as required to thoroughly wet soil to depth that will ensure germination, without

causing runoff or erosion.8. Repeat irrigation as required until grass is established.

3.05 MAINTENANCEA. Inspect preventive measures weekly, within 24 hours after the end of any storm that produces

0.5 inches or more rainfall at the project site, and daily during prolonged rainfall.B. Repair deficiencies immediately.C. Silt Fences:

1. Promptly replace fabric that deteriorates unless need for fence has passed.2. Remove silt deposits that exceed one-third of the height of the fence.3. Repair fences that are undercut by runoff or otherwise damaged, whether by runoff or

other causes.D. Straw Bale Rows:

1. Promptly replace bales that fall apart or otherwise deteriorate unless need has passed.2. Remove silt deposits that exceed one-half of the height of the bales.3. Repair bale rows that are undercut by runoff or otherwise damaged, whether by runoff or

other causes.E. Clean out temporary sediment control structures weekly and relocate soil on site.F. Place sediment in appropriate locations on site; do not remove from site.

3.06 CLEAN UPA. Remove temporary measures after permanent measures have been installed, unless permitted

to remain by HDJ.B. Clean out temporary sediment control structures that are to remain as permanent measures.


























































C. Where removal of temporary measures would leave exposed soil, shape surface to anacceptable grade and finish to match adjacent ground surfaces.











01 60 00 - 1PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01 60 00PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS


A. Enterprise Green Communities (EGC) -related product requirements.B. Transportation, handling, storage and protection.C. Product option requirements.D. Substitution limitations and procedures.E. Maintenance materials, including extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 01 61 16 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions: Requirements for

VOC-restricted product categories.B. Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Waste disposal

requirements potentially affecting packaging and substitutions.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Proposed Products List: Submit list of major products proposed for use, with name ofmanufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product.1. Submit within 15 days after date of Agreement.2. For products specified only by reference standards, list applicable reference standards.

B. Product Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each copy toidentify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers'standard data to provide information specific to this Project.

C. Shop Drawing Submittals: Prepared specifically for this Project; indicate utility and electricalcharacteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service forfunctional equipment and appliances.

D. Sample Submittals: Illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product, withintegral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work.1. For selection from standard finishes, submit samples of the full range of the

manufacturer's standard colors, textures, and patterns.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 NEW PRODUCTS

A. Provide new products unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents.B. Do not use products having any of the following characteristics:

1. Made of wood from newly cut old growth timber.C. Michigan Made Products:

1. When available, preference should be provided to Michigan made products.2. Comply with Owner commitments to MSHDA for MI made products.

a. Asphaltb. Concretec. Appliancesd. Mechanical Equipmente. Plumbing Fixtures or Equipmentf. Windows and/or Doorsg. Lumber

D. Where all other criteria are met, Oakwood Construction shall give preference to products that:



1. If used on interior, have lower emissions, as defined in Section 01 61 16.2. If wet-applied, have lower VOC content, as defined in Section 01 61 16.3. Have a published GreenScreen Chemical Hazard Analysis.

E. Regionally-Sourced Products: 1. Overall Project Requirement: Provide materials amounting to the required percentage of

the total value of all materials (excluding plumbing, HVAC, electrical, elevators, and otherequipment) that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured,within a radius of 500 miles from the project site.a. Refer to Enterprise Green Communities (EGC) requirements.b. Track and Quantify materials that have or are:

1) Recycled Content2) Sustainably Harvested3) Regionally Sourced4) Waste Management

2. Specific Product Categories: Provide regionally-sourced products as specified elsewhere.2.02 PRODUCT OPTIONS

A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Use any product meetingthose standards or description.

B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Use a product of one of themanufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed.

C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named.

2.03 MAINTENANCE MATERIALSA. Furnish extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software of types and in quantities specified in

individual specification sections.B. Deliver to Project site; obtain receipt prior to final payment.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

A. Instructions to Bidders specify time restrictions for submitting requests for substitutions duringthe bidding period. Comply with requirements specified in this section.

B. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitutionwith Contract Documents.

C. A request for substitution constitutes a representation that the submitter:1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality

level of the specified product.2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product.3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work that may be required for the

Work to be complete with no additional cost to Genral Capital.4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become

apparent.D. Substitution Submittal Procedure:

1. Submit three copies of request for substitution for consideration. Limit each request to oneproposed substitution.

2. Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the proposedproduct equivalence. Burden of proof is on proposer.

3. The HDJ will notify Oakwood Construction in writing of decision to accept or reject request.3.02 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING

A. Package products for shipment in manner to prevent damage; for equipment, package to avoidloss of factory calibration.



B. If special precautions are required, attach instructions prominently and legibly on outside ofpackaging.

C. Coordinate schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas in order to minimize sitestorage time and potential damage to stored materials.

D. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.E. Transport materials in covered trucks to prevent contamination of product and littering of

surrounding areas.F. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are

correct, and products are undamaged.G. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling,

disfigurement, or damage.H. Arrange for the return of packing materials, such as wood pallets, where economically feasible.

3.03 STORAGE AND PROTECTIONA. Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered according to

installation schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to minimize waste due toexcessive materials handling and misapplication.

B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.C. Store with seals and labels intact and legible.D. Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an environment

favorable to product.E. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground.F. Provide bonded off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or

protection.G. Protect products from damage or deterioration due to construction operations, weather,

precipitation, humidity, temperature, sunlight and ultraviolet light, dirt, dust, and othercontaminants.

H. Comply with manufacturer's warranty conditions, if any.I. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to

prevent condensation and degradation of products.J. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area. Prevent mixing with

foreign matter.K. Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or staining.L. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling,

disfigurement, or damage.M. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify

products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition.END OF SECTION 01 60 00


01 61 16 - 1VOLATILE ORGANIC

COMPOUND (VOC) CONTENTRESTRICTIONS

SECTION 01 61 16VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUND (VOC) CONTENT RESTRICTIONS


A. Requirement for installer certification that they did not use any non-compliant products.B. VOC restrictions for product categories listed below under "DEFINITIONS."C. All products of each category that are installed in the project must comply; Genral Capital's

project goals do not allow for partial compliance. Comply with Enterprise Green Communities(EGC) criteria.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Submittal procedures.B. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Procedures for testing and certifications.C. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Fundamental product requirements, substitutions

and product options, delivery, storage, and handling.D. Section 01 61 16.01 - Accessory Material VOC Content Certification Form.

1.03 DEFINITIONSA. VOC-Restricted Products: All products of each of the following categories when installed or

applied on-site in the building interior:1. Adhesives, sealants, and sealer coatings.2. Carpet.3. Carpet cushion.4. Resilient floor coverings.5. Paints and coatings.6. Insulation.7. Gypsum board.8. Acoustical ceilings and panels.9. Cabinet work.10. Composite wood and agrifiber products used either alone or as part of another product.

B. Interior of Building: Anywhere inside the exterior weather barrier.C. Adhesives: All gunnable, trowelable, liquid-applied, and aerosol adhesives, whether specified or

not; including flooring adhesives, resilient base adhesives, and pipe jointing adhesives.D. Sealants: All gunnable, trowelable, and liquid-applied joint sealants and sealant primers,

whether specified or not; including firestopping sealants and duct joint sealers.1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. CAL (CHPS LEM) - Low-Emitting Materials Product List; California Collaborative for HighPerformance Schools (CHPS); current edition at www.chps.net/.

B. CAL (CDPH SM) - Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic ChemicalEmissions From Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers; California Department ofPublic Health; v1.1, 2010.

C. CRI (GLP) - Green Label Plus Testing Program - Certified Products; www.carpet-rug.org;current edition.

D. GEI (SCH) - GREENGUARD "Children and Schools" Certified Products; GREENGUARDEnvironmental Institute; current listings at www.greenguard.org.

E. GreenSeal GS-11 - Paints; Green Seal, Inc.; 1993.F. GreenSeal GS-36 - Commercial Adhesives; 2011.G. SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; current edition.


01 61 16 - 2VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUND (VOC) CONTENT RESTRICTIONS

H. SCS (CPD) - SCS Certified Products; current listings at www.scscertified.com.1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Evidence of Compliance: Submit for each different product in each applicable category.C. Product Data: For each VOC-restricted product used in the project, submit evidence of

compliance.D. Installer Certifications Regarding Prohibited Content: Require each installer of any type of

product (not just the products for which VOC restrictions are specified) to certify that either 1) noadhesives, joint sealants, paints, coatings, or composite wood or agrifiber products have beenused in the installation of his products, or 2) that such products used comply with theserequirements.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Testing Agency Qualifications: Independent firm specializing in performing testing and

inspections of the type specified in this section.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MATERIALS

A. All Products: Comply with the most stringent of Enterprise Green Communities (EGC), federal,State, and local requirements, or these specifications.

B. All VOC-Restricted Products: Provide products having VOC content of types and volume notgreater than those specified by Enterprise Green Communities (EGC) criteria.1. Evidence of Compliance: Acceptable types of evidence are:

a. Current GREENGUARD Children & Schools certification; www.greenguard.org.b. Current Carpet and Rug Institute Green Label Plus certification; www.carpet-rug.org.c. Current SCS Floorscore certification; www.scscertified.com.d. Current SCS Indoor Advantage Gold certification; www.scscertified.com.e. Product listing in the CHPS Low-Emitting Materials Product List at

www.chps.net/manual/lem_table.htm.f. Current certification by any other agencies acceptable to CHPS.g. Report of laboratory testing performed in accordance with CHPS requirements for

getting a product listed in the Low-Emitting Materials Product List; report must includelaboratory's statement that the product meets the specified criteria.

2. Product data submittals showing VOC content are NOT acceptable forms of evidence.C. Adhesives and Joint Sealants: Provide only products having volatile organic compound (VOC)

content not greater than required by Enterprise Green Communities (EGC).1. Evidence of Compliance: Acceptable types of evidence are:

a. Report of laboratory testing performed in accordance with requirements.b. Published product data showing compliance with requirements.c. Certification by manufacturer that product complies with requirements.

D. Aerosol Adhesives: Provide only products having volatile organic compound (VOC) content notgreater than required by Enterprise Green Communities (EGC) .1. Evidence of Compliance: Acceptable types of evidence are:

a. Current GreenSeal Certification.b. Report of laboratory testing performed in accordance with GreenSeal GS-36

requirements.c. Published product data showing compliance with requirements.

E. Paints and Coatings:1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the

following:


01 61 16 - 3VOLATILE ORGANIC

COMPOUND (VOC) CONTENTRESTRICTIONS

a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D--National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards forArchitectural Coatings.

2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59,Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water addedat project site; or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Evidence of Compliance: Acceptable types of evidence are:a. Report of laboratory testing performed in accordance with requirements.

F. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products and Adhesives Used for Laminating Them: Provideproducts having no added urea-formaldehyde resins.1. Evidence of Compliance: Acceptable types of evidence are:

a. Published product data showing compliance with requirements.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Genral Capital reserves the right to reject non-compliant products, whether installed or not, andrequire their removal and replacement with compliant products at no extra cost to GenralCapital.

B. Additional costs to restore indoor air quality due to installation of non-compliant products will beborne by Oakwood Construction.



01 61 16.01 - 1ACCESSORY MATERIAL VOC

CONTENT CERTIFICATIONFORM

SECTION 01 61 16.01ACCESSORY MATERIAL VOC CONTENT CERTIFICATION FORM

.01 FORMA. Identification:

1. Project Name: ________________________________2. Project No.: ________________________________3. HDJ: ________________________________

B. Use of This Form:1. Because installers are allowed and directed to choose accessory materials suitable for the

applicable installation, there is a possibility that such accessory materials might containVOC content in excess of that permitted, especially where such materials have not beenexplicitly specified.

2. Oakwood Construction is required to obtain and submit this form from each installer ofwork on this project.

3. For each product category listed, circle the correct words in brackets: either [HAS] or [HASNOT].

4. If any of these accessory materials has been used, attach to this form product data andMSDS sheet for each such product.

C. VOC content restrictions are specified in Section 01 61 16.

1.01 PRODUCT CERTIFICATIONA. I certify that the installation work of my firm on this project:

1. [HAS] [HAS NOT] required the use of any ADHESIVES.2. [HAS] [HAS NOT] required the use of any JOINT SEALANTS.3. [HAS] [HAS NOT] required the use of any PAINTS OR COATINGS.4. [HAS] [HAS NOT] required the use of any COMPOSITE WOOD or AGRIFIBER

PRODUCTS.B. Product data and MSDS sheets are attached.

2.01 CERTIFIED BY: (INSTALLER/MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER FIRM)A. Firm Name: ______________________________________________B. Print Name: ______________________________________________C. Signature: ______________________________________________D. Title: ____________________ (officer of company)E. Date: _________________

END OF SECTION 01 61 16.01


01 70 00 - 1EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT

REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01 70 00EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS


A. Examination, preparation, and general installation procedures.B. Pre-installation meetings.C. Cutting and patching.D. Surveying for laying out the work.E. Extra StockF. Cleaning and protection.G. Starting of systems and equipment.H. Demonstration and instruction of Genral Capital personnel.I. Closeout procedures, except payment procedures.J. General requirements for maintenance service.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 01 10 00 - Summary:B. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures.C. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Testing and inspection procedures.D. Section 01 50 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary exterior enclosures.E. Section 01 57 13 - Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control: Additional erosion and

sedimentation control requirements.F. Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Additional procedures for

trash/waste removal, recycling, salvage, and reuse.G. Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents, operation and maintenance

data, warranties and bonds.H. Section 01 91 13 - General Commissioning Requirements: Oakwood Construction's

responsibilities in regard to commissioning.I. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping.J. Individual Product Specification Sections:

1. Advance notification to other sections of openings required in work of those sections.2. Limitations on cutting structural members.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. NFPA 241 - Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations;

2013.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Survey work: Submit name, address, and telephone number of Surveyor before starting survey

work.1. On request, submit documentation verifying accuracy of survey work.2. Submit a copy of site drawing signed by the Land Surveyor, that the elevations and

locations of the work are in conformance with Contract Documents.3. Submit surveys and survey logs for the project record.

C. Demolition Plan: Submit demolition plan as specified by OSHA and local authorities.


01 70 00 - 2EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS

1. Indicate extent of demolition, removal sequence, bracing and shoring, and location andconstruction of barricades and fences. Include design drawings and calculations forbracing and shoring.

2. Identify demolition firm and submit qualifications.3. Include a summary of safety procedures.

D. Cutting and Patching: Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration that affects:1. Structural integrity of any element of Project.2. Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element.3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element.4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements.5. Work of Genral Capital or separate Contractor.6. Include in request:

a. Identification of Project.b. Location and description of affected work.c. Necessity for cutting or alteration.d. Description of proposed work and products to be used.e. Effect on work of Genral Capital or separate Contractor.f. Written permission of affected separate Contractor.g. Date and time work will be executed.

E. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped and active utilities.1.05 QUALIFICATIONS

A. For survey work, employ a land surveyor registered in the State in which the Project is locatedand acceptable to HDJ. Submit evidence of Surveyor's Errors and Omissions insurancecoverage in the form of an Insurance Certificate.

B. For field engineering, employ a professional engineer of the discipline required for specificservice on Project, licensed in the State in which the Project is located.

C. For design of temporary shoring and bracing, employ a Professional Engineer experienced indesign of this type of work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located.

1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONSA. Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain

pumping equipment.B. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site

from soil erosion.C. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent

accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases.D. Dust Control: Execute work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations.

Provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere and overadjacent property.

E. Erosion and Sediment Control: Plan and execute work by methods to control surface drainagefrom cuts and fills, from borrow and waste disposal areas. Prevent erosion and sedimentation.1. Periodically inspect earthwork to detect evidence of erosion and sedimentation; promptly

apply corrective measures.F. Noise Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to minimize noise produced by

construction operations.1. Outdoors: Limit conduct of especially noisy exterior work to the hours of 8 am to 5 pm.

G. Pest and Rodent Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent pests and insectsfrom damaging the work.

H. Rodent Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent rodents from accessing orinvading premises.



REQUIREMENTS

I. Pollution Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil,water, and atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced byconstruction operations. Comply with federal, state, and local regulations.

1.07 COORDINATIONA. See Section 01 10 00 for occupancy-related requirements.B. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to

ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements,with provisions for accommodating items installed later.

C. Notify affected utility companies and comply with their requirements.D. Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of new operating equipment are compatible

with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilitiesfor installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment.

E. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical workthat are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, andconduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spacesefficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs.

F. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within theconstruction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.

G. Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate sections.H. After Genral Capital occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective

work and work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of GenralCapital's activities.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 PATCHING MATERIALS

A. New Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing products and work for patchingand extending work.

B. Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspecting and testing products wherenecessary, referring to existing work as a standard.

C. Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for substitutiondescribed in Section 01 60 00.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work. Start of work means acceptance of existing conditions.

B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new work beingapplied or attached.

C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections.D. Take field measurements before confirming product orders or beginning fabrication, to minimize

waste due to over-ordering or misfabrication.E. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct

locations.F. Prior to Cutting: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elements

subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering existing work,assess conditions affecting performance of work. Beginning of cutting or patching meansacceptance of existing conditions.



3.02 PREPARATIONA. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance.B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance.C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to

applying any new material or substance in contact or bond.3.03 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. When required in individual specification sections, convene a preinstallation meeting at the siteprior to commencing work of the section.

B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific section.C. Notify HDJ 7 days in advance of meeting date.D. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting:

1. Review conditions of examination, preparation and installation procedures.2. Review coordination with related work.

E. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with twocopies to HDJ, Genral Capital, participants, and those affected by decisions made.

3.04 LAYING OUT THE WORKA. Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting work.B. Promptly notify HDJ of any discrepancies discovered.C. Protect survey control points prior to starting site work; preserve permanent reference points

during construction.D. Promptly report to HDJ the loss or destruction of any reference point or relocation required

because of changes in grades or other reasons.E. Replace dislocated survey control points based on original survey control. Make no changes

without prior written notice to HDJ.F. Utilize recognized engineering survey practices.G. Establish elevations, lines and levels. Locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar

appropriate means:1. Site improvements including pavements; stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement;

utility locations, slopes, and invert elevations.2. Grid or axis for structures.3. Building foundation, column locations, ground floor elevations.

H. Periodically verify layouts by same means.I. Maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses.

3.05 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTSA. In addition to compliance with regulatory requirements, conduct construction operations in

compliance with NFPA 241, including applicable recommendations in Appendix A.B. Install products as specified in individual sections, in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions and recommendations, and so as to avoid waste due to necessity for replacement.C. Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level, unless otherwise indicated.D. Install equipment and fittings plumb and level, neatly aligned with adjacent vertical and

horizontal lines, unless otherwise indicated.E. Make consistent texture on surfaces, with seamless transitions, unless otherwise indicated.F. Make neat transitions between different surfaces, maintaining texture and appearance.

3.06 CUTTING AND PATCHINGA. Whenever possible, execute the work by methods that avoid cutting or patching.



REQUIREMENTS

B. Perform whatever cutting and patching is necessary to:1. Complete the work.2. Fit products together to integrate with other work.3. Provide openings for penetration of mechanical, electrical, and other services.4. Match work that has been cut to adjacent work.5. Repair areas adjacent to cuts to required condition.6. Repair new work damaged by subsequent work.7. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested.8. Remove and replace defective and non-conforming work.

C. Execute work by methods that avoid damage to other work and that will provide appropriatesurfaces to receive patching and finishing. In existing work, minimize damage and restore tooriginal condition.

D. Employ original installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and moisture resistantelements, and sight exposed surfaces.

E. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without priorapproval.

F. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.G. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces.H. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids

with fire rated material in accordance with Section 07 84 00, to full thickness of the penetratedelement.

I. Patching:1. Finish patched surfaces to match finish that existed prior to patching. On continuous

surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entireunit.

2. Match color, texture, and appearance.3. Repair patched surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other

imperfections due to patching work. If defects are due to condition of substrate, repairsubstrate prior to repairing finish.

3.07 PROGRESS CLEANINGA. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly

condition.B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed

or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space.C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning

to eliminate dust.D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash/rubbish from site periodically and dispose

off-site; do not burn or bury.3.08 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK

A. Protect installed work from damage by construction operations.B. Provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections.C. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate

work area to prevent damage.D. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings.E. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement

of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials.



F. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity isnecessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing materialmanufacturer.

G. Remove protective coverings when no longer needed; reuse or recycle plastic coverings ifpossible.

3.09 SYSTEM STARTUPA. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems.B. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive

rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions that may cause damage.C. Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by

the equipment or system manufacturer.D. Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested.E. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable Oakwood Construction personnel and

manufacturer's representative in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.F. When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized

representative to be present at site to inspect, check, and approve equipment or systeminstallation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation.

G. Submit a written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioningcorrectly.

3.10 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONA. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance,

and shutdown of each item of equipment at scheduled time, at equipment location.B. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other

season within six months.C. Provide a qualified person who is knowledgeable about the Project to perform demonstration

and instruction of owner personnel.3.11 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation.3.12 EXTRA STOCK

A. Provide 2% extra stock for all items, whether or not required in individual specification sections.When extra stock is noted in individual spec sections, provide quantities required within thosesections only.

3.13 FINAL CLEANINGA. Execute final cleaning prior to final project assessment.

1. Clean areas to be occupied by Genral Capital prior to final completion before GenralCapital occupancy.

B. Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous.C. Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains

and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and softsurfaces.

D. Remove all labels that are not permanent. Do not paint or otherwise cover fire test labels ornameplates on mechanical and electrical equipment.

E. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to thesurface and material being cleaned.

F. Clean filters of operating equipment.G. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems.



REQUIREMENTS

H. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces.I. Remove waste, surplus materials, trash/rubbish, and construction facilities from the site;

dispose of in legal manner; do not burn or bury.J. Clean Genral Capital-occupied areas of work.

3.14 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURESA. Make submittals that are required by governing or other authorities.

1. Provide copies to Genral Capital.B. Accompany Project Coordinator on preliminary inspection to determine items to be listed for

completion or correction in Oakwood Construction's Notice of Substantial Completion.C. Notify HDJ when work is considered ready for Substantial Completion. D. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, work has been

inspected, and that work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready forHDJ's review.

E. Correct items of work listed in executed Certificates of Substantial Completion and comply withrequirements for access to Genral Capital-occupied areas.

F. Accompany Project Coordinator on preliminary final inspection.G. Notify HDJ when work is considered finally complete.H. Complete items of work determined by HDJ's final inspection.

3.15 MAINTENANCEA. Provide service and maintenance of components indicated in specification sections.B. Maintenance Period: As indicated in specification sections or, if not indicated, not less than one

year from the Date of Substantial Completion or the length of the specified warranty, whicheveris longer.

C. Examine system components at a frequency consistent with reliable operation. Clean, adjust,and lubricate as required.

D. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of components. Repair or replaceparts whenever required. Use parts produced by the manufacturer of the original component.

E. Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or subcontractor withoutprior written consent of the Genral Capital.



01 74 19 - 1CONSTRUCTION WASTE

MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

SECTION 01 74 19CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 WASTE MANAGEMENT REQUIREMENTS

A. Genral Capital and Enterprise Green Communities (EGC) Certification requires that this projectgenerate the least amount of trash and waste possible. Divert 45% of all materials listed below.

B. Employ processes that ensure the generation of as little waste as possible due to error, poorplanning, breakage, mishandling, contamination, or other factors.

C. Minimize trash/waste disposal in landfills; reuse, salvage, or recycle as much waste as requiredby Enterprise Green Communities (EGC) commitments.

D. Required Recycling, Salvage, and Reuse: The following may not be disposed of in landfills orby incineration:1. Aluminum and plastic beverage containers.2. Corrugated cardboard.3. Wood pallets.4. Wood including clean dimensional wood: May be used as blocking or furring.5. Land clearing debris, including brush, branches, logs, and stumps; see Section 31 10 00 -

Site Clearing for use options.6. Metals, including packaging banding, metal studs, sheet metal, structural steel, piping,

reinforcing bars, door frames, and other items made of steel, iron, galvanized steel,stainless steel, aluminum, copper, zinc, lead, brass, and bronze.

7. Gypsum drywall and plaster.8. Plastic including buckets.9. Asphalt roofing shingles.10. Vinyl siding.11. Plumbing fixtures.12. Mechanical and electrical equipment.

E. Enterprise Green Communities (EGC) Certification for this project is dependent on diversion of50 percent, by volume, of potential landfill trash/waste by recycling and/or salvage.

F. Oakwood Construction shall submit periodic Waste Disposal Reports; all landfill disposal,incineration, recycling, salvage, and reuse must be reported regardless of to whom the cost orsavings accrues; use the same units of measure on all reports.

G. Methods of trash/waste disposal that are not acceptable are:1. Burning on the project site.2. Burying on the project site.3. Dumping or burying on other property, public or private.4. Other illegal dumping or burying.

H. Enterprise Green Communities (EGC) Certification and Regulatory Requirements: OakwoodConstruction is responsible for knowing and complying with regulatory requirements, includingbut not limited to Federal, state and local requirements, pertaining to legal disposal of allconstruction and demolition waste materials.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Additional requirements for project meetings,

reports, submittal procedures, and project documentation.B. Section 01 50 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Additional requirements related to

trash/waste collection and removal facilities and services.C. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Waste prevention requirements related to delivery,

storage, and handling.


01 74 19 - 2CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

D. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Trash/waste prevention proceduresrelated to demolition, cutting and patching, installation, protection, and cleaning.

E. Section 31 10 00 - Site Clearing: Handling and disposal of land clearing debris.1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Clean: Untreated and unpainted; not contaminated with oils, solvents, caulk, or the like.B. Construction and Demolition Waste: Solid wastes typically including building materials,

packaging, trash, debris, and rubble resulting from construction, remodeling, repair anddemolition operations.

C. Hazardous: Exhibiting the characteristics of hazardous substances, i.e., ignitibility, corrosivity,toxicity or reactivity.

D. Nonhazardous: Exhibiting none of the characteristics of hazardous substances, i.e., ignitibility,corrosivity, toxicity, or reactivity.

E. Nontoxic: Neither immediately poisonous to humans nor poisonous after a long period ofexposure.

F. Recyclable: The ability of a product or material to be recovered at the end of its life cycle andremanufactured into a new product for reuse by others.

G. Recycle: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for remanufactureinto a new product for reuse by others.

H. Recycling: The process of sorting, cleansing, treating and reconstituting solid waste and otherdiscarded materials for the purpose of using the altered form. Recycling does not includeburning, incinerating, or thermally destroying waste.

I. Return: To give back reusable items or unused products to vendors for credit.J. Reuse: To reuse a construction waste material in some manner on the project site.K. Salvage: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for resale or reuse by

others.L. Sediment: Soil and other debris that has been eroded and transported by storm or well

production run-off water.M. Source Separation: The act of keeping different types of waste materials separate beginning

from the first time they become waste.N. Toxic: Poisonous to humans either immediately or after a long period of exposure.O. Trash: Any product or material unable to be reused, returned, recycled, or salvaged.P. Waste: Extra material or material that has reached the end of its useful life in its intended use.

Waste includes salvageable, returnable, recyclable, and reusable material.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Waste Disposal Reports: Submit at specified intervals, with details of quantities of trash and

waste, means of disposal or reuse, and costs; show both totals to date and since last report.1. Submit updated Report with each Application for Progress Payment; failure to submit

Report will delay payment.2. Submit Report on a form acceptable to Genral Capital.3. Landfill Disposal: Include the following information:

a. Identification of material.b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards, of trash/waste material from the project disposed of in

landfills.c. State the identity of landfills, total amount of tipping fees paid to landfill, and total

disposal cost.


01 74 19 - 3CONSTRUCTION WASTE

MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

d. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices as evidence of quantity andcost.

4. Incinerator Disposal: Include the following information:a. Identification of material.b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards, of trash/waste material from the project delivered to

incinerators.c. State the identity of incinerators, total amount of fees paid to incinerator, and total

disposal cost.d. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices as evidence of quantity and

cost.5. Recycled and Salvaged Materials: Include the following information for each:

a. Identification of material, including those retrieved by installer for use on otherprojects.

b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards, date removed from the project site, and receivingparty.

c. Transportation cost, amount paid or received for the material, and the net total cost orsavings of salvage or recycling each material.

d. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices as evidence of quantity andcost.

e. Certification by receiving party that materials will not be disposed of in landfills or byincineration.

6. Material Reused on Project: Include the following information for each:a. Identification of material and how it was used in the project.b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards.c. Include weight tickets as evidence of quantity.

7. Other Disposal Methods: Include information similar to that described above, asappropriate to disposal method.

PART 3 EXECUTION2.01 WASTE MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES

A. See Section 01 30 00 for additional requirements for project meetings, reports, submittalprocedures, and project documentation.

B. See Section 01 50 00 for additional requirements related to trash/waste collection and removalfacilities and services.

C. See Section 01 60 00 for waste prevention requirements related to delivery, storage, andhandling.

D. See Section 01 70 00 for trash/waste prevention procedures related to demolition, cutting andpatching, installation, protection, and cleaning.

2.02 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN IMPLEMENTATIONA. Manager: Designate an on-site person or persons responsible for instructing workers and

overseeing and documenting results of the Waste Management Plan.B. Communication: Distribute copies of the Waste Management Plan to job site foreman, each

subcontractor, Genral Capital, and HDJ.C. Instruction: Provide on-site instruction of appropriate separation, handling, and recycling,

salvage, reuse, and return methods to be used by all parties at the appropriate stages of theproject.

D. Meetings: Discuss trash/waste management goals and issues at project meetings.1. Pre-bid meeting.2. Pre-construction meeting.3. Regular job-site meetings.


01 74 19 - 4CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

E. Facilities: Provide specific facilities for separation and storage of materials for recycling,salvage, reuse, return, and trash disposal, for use by all contractors and installers.1. Provide containers as required.2. Provide adequate space for pick-up and delivery and convenience to subcontractors.3. Keep recycling and trash/waste bin areas neat and clean and clearly marked in order to

avoid contamination of materials.F. Hazardous Wastes: Separate, store, and dispose of hazardous wastes according to applicable

regulations.G. Recycling: Separate, store, protect, and handle at the site identified recyclable waste products

in order to prevent contamination of materials and to maximize recyclability of identifiedmaterials. Arrange for timely pickups from the site or deliveries to recycling facility in order toprevent contamination of recyclable materials.

H. Reuse of Materials On-Site: Set aside, sort, and protect separated products in preparation forreuse.

I. Salvage: Set aside, sort, and protect products to be salvaged for reuse off-site.END OF SECTION 01 74 19


01 78 00 - 1CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

SECTION 01 78 00CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS


A. Project Record Documents.B. Operation and Maintenance Data.C. Warranties and bonds.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 00 72 00 - General Conditions: Performance bond and labor and material payment

bonds, warranty, and correction of work.B. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures, shop drawings,

product data, and samples.C. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Contract closeout procedures.D. Individual Product Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data.E. Individual Product Sections: Warranties required for specific products or Work.

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. Project Record Documents: Submit as built drawings in electronic format to HDJ and HUD with

claim for final Application for Payment.B. Operation and Maintenance Data:

1. Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents beforestart of Work. HDJ will review draft and return one copy with comments.

2. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction andoperated by Genral Capital, submit completed documents within ten days afteracceptance.

3. Submit one copy of completed documents 15 days prior to final inspection. This copy willbe reviewed and returned after final inspection, with HDJ comments. Revise content of alldocument sets as required prior to final submission.

4. Submit two sets of revised final documents in final form within 10 days after finalinspection.

C. Warranties and Bonds:1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with

Genral Capital's permission, submit documents within 10 days after acceptance.2. Make other submittals within 10 days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final

Application for Payment.3. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial

Completion, submit within 10 days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as thebeginning of the warranty period.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USEDPART 3 EXECUTION3.01 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work:1. Drawings.2. Specifications.3. Addenda.4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract.5. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples.6. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting.



B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Genral Capital.C. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction.D. Record information concurrent with construction progress.E. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual products

installed, including the following:1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number.2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized.3. Changes made by Addenda and modifications.

F. Record Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual constructionincluding:1. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish first floor datum.2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances,

referenced to permanent surface improvements.3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction,

referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work.4. Field changes of dimension and detail.5. Details not on original Contract drawings.

3.02 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATAA. Source Data: For each product or system, list names, addresses and telephone numbers of

Subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts.B. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and

data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information.C. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and

systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents asmaintenance drawings.

D. Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructionsfor each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions.

3.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHESA. For Each Product, Applied Material, and Finish:B. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents

and methods, precautions against detrimental cleaning agents and methods, andrecommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.

C. Additional information as specified in individual product specification sections.D. Where additional instructions are required, beyond the manufacturer's standard printed

instructions, have instructions prepared by personnel experienced in the operation andmaintenance of the specific products.

3.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMSA. For Each Item of Equipment and Each System:

1. Description of unit or system, and component parts.2. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.3. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests.4. Complete nomenclature and model number of replaceable parts.

B. Where additional instructions are required, beyond the manufacturer's standard printedinstructions, have instructions prepared by personnel experienced in the operation andmaintenance of the specific products.

C. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions andsequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions.



D. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for preventativemaintenance and trouble shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; andalignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions.

E. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required.F. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions.G. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer.H. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams

required for maintenance.I. Provide control diagrams by controls manufacturer as installed.J. Provide Oakwood Construction's coordination drawings, with color coded piping diagrams as

installed.K. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections.

3.05 ASSEMBLY OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALSA. Assemble operation and maintenance data into durable manuals for Genral Capital's personnel

use, with data arranged in the same sequence as, and identified by, the specification sections.B. Where systems involve more than one specification section, provide separate tabbed divider for

each system.C. Prepare instructions and data by personnel experienced in maintenance and operation of

described products.D. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual.E. Binders: Commercial quality, 8-1/2 by 11 inch three D side ring binders with durable plastic

covers; 2 inch maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into relatedconsistent groupings.

F. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION AND MAINTENANCEINSTRUCTIONS; identify title of Project; identify subject matter of contents.

G. Project Directory: Title and address of Project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers ofHDJ, Consultants,Oakwood Constructionand subcontractors, with names of responsible parties.

H. Tables of Contents: List every item separated by a divider, using the same identification as onthe divider tab; where multiple volumes are required, include all volumes Tables of Contents ineach volume, with the current volume clearly identified.

I. Dividers: Provide tabbed dividers for each separate product and system; identify the contentson the divider tab; immediately following the divider tab include a description of product andmajor component parts of equipment.

J. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data on 24 pound paper.K. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to

size of text pages.L. Arrange content by systems under section numbers and sequence of Table of Contents of this

Project Manual.M. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each product or system

description identified, in three parts as follows:1. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of HDJ, Oakwood

Construction, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers.2. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by

specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephonenumbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following:a. Significant design criteria.b. List of equipment.



c. Parts list for each component.d. Operating instructions.e. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems.f. Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including recommended cleaning

methods and materials, and special precautions identifying detrimental agents.3. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following:

a. Shop drawings and product data.b. Air and water balance reports.c. Certificates.d. Photocopies of warranties and bonds.

N. Table of Contents: Provide title of Project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of HDJ,Consultants, and Oakwood Construction with name of responsible parties; schedule of productsand systems, indexed to content of the volume.

3.06 WARRANTIES AND BONDSA. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers,

and manufacturers, within 10 days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except foritems put into use with Genral Capital's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warrantyuntil the Date of Substantial completion is determined.

B. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized.C. Co-execute submittals when required.D. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal.E. Manual: Bind in commercial quality 8-1/2 by 11 inch three D side ring binders with durable

plastic covers.F. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title WARRANTIES AND BONDS, with title of

Project; name, address and telephone number of Oakwood Construction and equipmentsupplier; and name of responsible company principal.

G. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in the sequence of the Table of Contents of the ProjectManual, with each item identified with the number and title of the specification section in whichspecified, and the name of product or work item.

H. Separate each warranty or bond with index tab sheets keyed to the Table of Contents listing. Provide full information, using separate typed sheets as necessary. List Subcontractor,supplier, and manufacturer, with name, address, and telephone number of responsible principal.



02 41 00 - 1DEMOLITION

SECTION 02 41 00DEMOLITION


A. Selective demolition of built site elements.B. Selective demolition of building elements for alteration purposes.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 01 57 13 - Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control.B. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Handling and storage of items removed for salvage

and relocation.C. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Project conditions; protection of

bench marks, survey control points, and existing construction to remain; reinstallation ofremoved products; temporary bracing and shoring.

D. Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Limitations on disposal ofremoved materials; requirements for recycling.

E. Section 31 23 23 - Fill: Filling holes, pits, and excavations generated as a result of removaloperations.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. 29 CFR 1926 - U.S. Occupational Safety and Health Standards; current edition.B. NFPA 241 - Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations;

2013.1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: Company specializing in the type of work required.1. Minimum of 3 years of documented experience.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Fill Material: As specified in Section 31 23 23 - Fill.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 SCOPE

A. Remove paving and curbs as required to accomplish new work.B. Remove paving and curbs as indicated on drawings.C. Remove concrete slabs on grade as indicated on drawings.D. Remove fences and gates where indicated in drawings.E. Remove other items indicated, for salvage, relocation, and recycling.

3.02 GENERAL PROCEDURES AND PROJECT CONDITIONSA. Comply with applicable codes and regulations for demolition operations and safety of adjacent

structures and the public.1. Obtain required permits.2. Comply with applicable requirements of NFPA 241.3. Use of explosives is not permitted.4. Take precautions to prevent catastrophic or uncontrolled collapse of structures to be

removed; do not allow worker or public access within range of potential collapse ofunstable structures.

5. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices.



6. Use physical barriers to prevent access to areas that could be hazardous to workers or thepublic.

7. Conduct operations to minimize effects on and interference with adjacent structures andoccupants.

8. Do not close or obstruct roadways or sidewalks without permit.9. Conduct operations to minimize obstruction of public and private entrances and exits; do

not obstruct required exits at any time; protect persons using entrances and exits fromremoval operations.

10. Obtain written permission from owners of adjacent properties when demolition equipmentwill traverse, infringe upon or limit access to their property.

B. Do not begin removal until receipt of notification to proceed from Genral Capital.C. Do not begin removal until built elements to be salvaged or relocated have been removed.D. Do not begin removal until vegetation to be relocated has been removed and specified

measures have been taken to protect vegetation to remain.E. Protect existing structures and other elements that are not to be removed.

1. Provide bracing and shoring.2. Prevent movement or settlement of adjacent structures.3. Stop work immediately if adjacent structures appear to be in danger.

F. Minimize production of dust due to demolition operations; do not use water if that will result inice, flooding, sedimentation of public waterways or storm sewers, or other pollution.

G. If hazardous materials are discovered during removal operations, stop work and notify HDJ andGenral Capital; hazardous materials include regulated asbestos containing materials, lead,PCB's, and mercury.

H. Perform demolition in a manner that maximizes salvage and recycling of materials.1. Dismantle existing construction and separate materials.2. Set aside reusable, recyclable, and salvageable materials; store and deliver to collection

point or point of reuse.I. Partial Removal of Paving and Curbs: Neatly saw cut at right angle to surface.

3.03 EXISTING UTILITIESA. Coordinate work with utility companies; notify before starting work and comply with their

requirements; obtain required permits.B. Protect existing utilities to remain from damage.C. Do not disrupt public utilities without permit from authority having jurisdiction.D. Do not close, shut off, or disrupt existing life safety systems that are in use without at least 7

days prior written notification to Genral Capital.E. Do not close, shut off, or disrupt existing utility branches or take-offs that are in use without at

least 3 days prior written notification to Genral Capital.F. Locate and mark utilities to remain; mark using highly visible tags or flags, with identification of

utility type; protect from damage due to subsequent construction, using substantial barricades ifnecessary.

G. Remove exposed piping, valves, meters, equipment, supports, and foundations of disconnectedand abandoned utilities.

H. Prepare building demolition areas by disconnecting and capping utilities outside the demolitionzone; identify and mark utilities to be subsequently reconnected, in same manner as otherutilities to remain.

3.04 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ALTERATIONSA. Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on casual field observation and

existing record documents only.



1. Verify that construction and utility arrangements are as shown.2. Report discrepancies to HDJ before disturbing existing installation.3. Beginning of demolition work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions that would be

apparent upon examination prior to starting demolition.B. Separate areas in which demolition is being conducted from other areas that are still occupied.

1. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary dustproof partitions of construction indicated ondrawings in locations indicated on drawings.

C. Maintain weatherproof exterior building enclosure except for interruptions required forreplacement or modifications; take care to prevent water and humidity damage.

D. Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work.1. Remove items indicated on drawings.

E. Services (Including but not limited to HVAC, Plumbing, Electrical, and Telecommunications): Remove existing systems and equipment as indicated.1. Maintain existing active systems that are to remain in operation; maintain access to

equipment and operational components.2. Where existing active systems serve occupied facilities but are to be replaced with new

services, maintain existing systems in service until new systems are complete and readyfor service.

3. Verify that abandoned services serve only abandoned facilities before removal.4. Remove abandoned pipe, ducts, conduits, and equipment, including those above

accessible ceilings; remove back to source of supply where possible, otherwise cap stuband tag with identification.

F. Protect existing work to remain.1. Prevent movement of structure; provide shoring and bracing if necessary.2. Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work.3. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work.4. Patch as specified for patching new work.

3.05 DEBRIS AND WASTE REMOVALA. Remove debris, junk, and trash from site.B. Remove from site all materials not to be reused on site; comply with requirements of Section 01

74 19 - Waste Management.C. Leave site in clean condition, ready for subsequent work.D. Clean up spillage and wind-blown debris from public and private lands.



03 30 00 - 1CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

SECTION 03 30 00CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE


A. Concrete formwork.B. Floors and slabs on grade.C. Concrete elevator shaft walls and foundation walls.D. Concrete reinforcement.E. Joint devices associated with concrete work.F. Miscellaneous concrete elements, including equipment pads, light pole bases, and manholes.G. Vapor Retarder.H. Concrete curing.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials;2010.

B. ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and MassConcrete; 1991 (Reapproved 2009).

C. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete; 2010 (Errata 2012).D. ACI 302.1R - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; 2004 (Errata 2007).E. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; 2000.F. ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting; 2010.G. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting; 2010.H. ACI 308R - Guide to Curing Concrete; 2001 (Reapproved 2008).I. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; 2011.J. ACI 347R - Guide to Formwork for Concrete; 2014.K. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon Steel Bars for

Concrete Reinforcement; 2015.L. ASTM A767/A767M - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars for

Concrete Reinforcement; 2009.M. ASTM A1064/A1064M - Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire

Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete; 2015.N. ASTM C33/C33M - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2013.O. ASTM C39/C39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete

Specimens; 2015a.P. ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete; 2015.Q. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2015.R. ASTM C260/C260M - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; 2010a.S. ASTM C494/C494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 2013.T. ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan

for Use in Concrete; 2015.U. ASTM C685/C685M - Standard Specification for Concrete Made by Volumetric Batching and

Continuous Mixing; 2014.



V. ASTM C1240 - Standard Specification for Silica Fume Used in Cementitious Mixtures; 2014.W. ASTM C1315 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds Having

Special Properties for Curing and Sealing Concrete; 2011.X. ASTM C1582/C1582M - Standard Specification for Admixtures to Inhibit Chloride-Induced

Corrosion of Reinforcing Steel in Concrete; 2011.Y. ASTM D994/D994M - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete

(Bituminous Type); 2011.Z. ASTM D1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving

and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types); 2004 (Reapproved2013).

AA. ASTM D1752 - Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber Cork and Recycled PVCExpansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction; 2004a (Reapproved2013).

AB. ASTM E1643 - Standard Practice for Selection, Design, Installation and Inspection of WaterVapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs; 2011.

AC. ASTM E1745 - Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact withSoil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs; 2011.

AD. COE CRD-C 572 - Corps of Engineers Specifications for Polyvinylchloride Waterstop; 1974.AE. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; 2014 (Errata 2015).AF. NSF 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content; 2011.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' data on manufactured products showing compliance with

specified requirements and installation instructions.1. For curing compounds, provide data on method of removal in the event of incompatibility

with floor covering adhesives.C. Mix Design: Submit proposed concrete mix design.

1. Indicate proposed mix design complies with requirements of ACI 301, Section 4 - ConcreteMixtures.

2. Indicate proposed mix design complies with requirements of ACI 318, Chapter 5 -Concrete Quality, Mixing and Placing.

D. Samples: Submit samples of underslab vapor retarder to be used. E. LEED for Homes Submittal: If any fly ash, ground granulated blast furnace slag, silica fume,

rice hull ash, or other waste material is used in mix designs to replace Portland cement, submitthe total volume of concrete cast in place, mix design(s) used showing the quantity of portlandcement replaced, reports showing successful cylinder testing, and temperature on day of pour ifcold weather mix is used; use LEED New Product Content Form.

F. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities andcomponents that will be concealed from view upon completion of concrete work.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318.B. Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather.C. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather.



PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 FORMWORK

A. Formwork Design and Construction: Comply with guidelines of ACI 347R to provide formworkthat will produce concrete complying with tolerances of ACI 117.

B. Form Materials: Oakwood Construction's choice of standard products with sufficient strength towithstand hydrostatic head without distortion in excess of permitted tolerances.1. Form Facing for Exposed Finish Concrete: Oakwood Construction's choice of materials

that will provide smooth, stain-free final appearance.2. Earth Cuts: Do not use earth cuts as forms for vertical surfaces. Natural rock formations

that maintain a stable vertical edge may be used as side forms.3. Form Coating: Release agent that will not adversely affect concrete or interfere with

application of coatings.4. Form Ties: Cone snap type that will leave no metal within 1-1/2 inches of concrete

surface.2.02 REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60 - 60,000 psi.1. Type: Deformed billet-steel bars.2. Finish: Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A767/A767M, Class I, unless otherwise

indicated on Structural Drawings.B. Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement (WWR): Galvanized, plain type, ASTM A1064/A1064M.

1. Form: Flat Sheets.2. WWR Style: As indicated on structural drawings. .

C. Reinforcement Accessories:1. Tie Wire: Annealed, minimum 16 gage, 0.0508 inch.2. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for adequate support of

reinforcement during concrete placement.3. Provide stainless steel, galvanized, plastic, or plastic coated steel components for

placement within 1-1/2 inches of weathering surfaces.2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cement: ASTM C150, Type I - Normal Portland type. 1. Acquire all cement for entire project from same source.

B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C33.1. Acquire all aggregates for entire project from same source.

C. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class F.D. Silica Fume: ASTM C1240, proportioned in accordance with ACI 211.1.E. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete.

2.04 ADMIXTURESA. Do not use chemicals that will result in soluble chloride ions in excess of 0.1 percent by weight

of cement.B. Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C260/C260M.C. High Range Water Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type G.D. High Range Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type F.E. Water Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type E.F. Water Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type D.G. Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type C.H. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type B.



I. Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type A.2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Underslab Vapor Retarder: Multi-layer, fabric-, cord-, grid-, or aluminum-reinforcedpolyethylene or equivalent, complying with ASTM E1745, Class A; stated by manufacturer assuitable for installation in contact with soil or granular fill under concrete slabs. The use ofsingle ply polyethylene is prohibited.1. Installation: Comply with ASTM E1643.2. Accessory Products: Vapor retarder manufacturer's recommended tape, adhesive,

mastic, prefabricated boots, etc., for sealing seams and penetrations in vapor retarder.3. Products:

a. Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap Vapor Barrier 10-mil (Class A): www.stegoindustries.com.

b. Reef Industries LLC, Waporguard 10-mil (Class A): www.reefindustries.com2.06 BONDING AND JOINTING PRODUCTS

A. Waterstops: Bentonite and butyl rubber, complying with NSF 61 and NSF 372.1. Configuration: Manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal strip.2. Size: 3/4" x 1".

B. Slab Isolation Joint Filler: 1/2 inch thick, height equal to slab thickness, with removable topsection that will form 1/2 inch deep sealant pocket after removal.1. Material: ASTM D1751, cellulose fiber or.2. Material: ASTM D1752 self-expanding cork (Type III).

C. Slab Construction Joint Devices: Combination keyed joint form and screed, galvanized steel,with minimum 1 inch diameter holes for conduit or rebars to pass through at 6 inches on center;ribbed steel stakes for setting.

2.07 CURING MATERIALSA. Evaporation Reducer: Liquid thin-film-forming compound that reduces rapid moisture loss

caused by high temperature, low humidity, and high winds; intended for application immediatelyafter concrete placement.

B. Curing Compound, Naturally Dissipating: Clear, water-based, liquid membrane-formingcompound; complying with ASTM C309.

C. Moisture-Retaining Sheet: ASTM C171.1. Polyethylene film, clear, minimum nominal thickness of 0.0040 in..2. White-burlap-polyethylene sheet, weighing not less than 10 oz/per linear yd, 40 inches

wide.D. Water: Potable, not detrimental to concrete.

2.08 CONCRETE MIX DESIGNA. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.1 recommendations.

1. Replace as much Portland cement as possible with fly ash, ground granulated blastfurnace slag, silica fume, or rice hull ash as is consistent with ACI recommendations.

B. Concrete Strength: Establish required average strength for each type of concrete on the basisof field experience or trial mixtures, as specified in ACI 301.1. For trial mixtures method, employ independent testing agency acceptable to HDJ for

preparing and reporting proposed mix designs.C. Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates

recommended or required by manufacturer.D. Fiber Reinforcement: Add to mix at rate of 1.5 pounds per cubic yard, or as recommended by

manufacturer for specific project conditions.E. Normal Weight Concrete:



1. Compressive Strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C39/C39M at 28 days: 3,000 pounds per square inch at interior slabs; 4,000 pounds per square inch at exteriorwalks and slabs. Unless noted otherwise in Structural Drawings/ Requirements.

2. Fly Ash Content: Maximum 15 percent of cementitious materials by weight.3. Silica Fume Content: Maximum 5 percent of cementitious materials by weight.

2.09 MIXINGA. On Project Site: Mix in drum type batch mixer, complying with ASTM C685. Mix each batch not

less than 1-1/2 minutes and not more than 5 minutes.1. Fiber Reinforcement: Batch and mix as recommended by manufacturer for specific

project conditions.B. Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C94/C94M.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes;


A. Verify lines, levels, and dimensions before proceeding with work of this section.3.02 PREPARATION

A. Formwork: Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Design and fabricate forms to support allapplied loads until concrete is cured, and for easy removal without damage to concrete.

B. Coordinate placement of embedded items with erection of concrete formwork and placement ofform accessories.

C. Interior Slabs on Grade: Install vapor retarder under interior slabs on grade. Lap jointsminimum 6 inches. Seal joints, seams and penetrations watertight with manufacturer'srecommended products and follow manufacturer's written instructions. Repair damaged vaporretarder before covering.

3.03 INSTALLING REINFORCEMENT AND OTHER EMBEDDED ITEMSA. Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, and

accurately position, support, and secure in place to achieve not less than minimum concretecoverage required for protection.

B. Install welded wire reinforcement in maximum possible lengths, and offset end laps in bothdirections. Splice laps with tie wire.

C. Verify that anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete areaccurately placed, positioned securely, and will not interfere with concrete placement.

3.04 PLACING CONCRETEA. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R.B. Place concrete for floor slabs in accordance with ACI 302.1R.C. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature, and

test samples taken.D. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, waterstops, embedded parts, and formed construction joint

devices will not be disturbed during concrete placement.E. Finish floors level and flat, unless otherwise indicated, within the tolerances specified below.

3.05 SLAB JOINTINGA. Locate joints as indicated on the drawings.B. Anchor joint fillers and devices to prevent movement during concrete placement.C. Isolation Joints: Use preformed joint filler with removable top section for joint sealant, total

height equal to thickness of slab, set flush with top of slab.



D. Saw Cut Contraction Joints: Saw cut joints before concrete begins to cool, within 4 to 12 hoursafter placing; use 3/16 inch thick blade and cut at least 1 inch deep but not less than one quarter(1/4) the depth of the slab.

E. Construction Joints: Where not otherwise indicated, use metal combination screed and keyform, with removable top section for joint sealant.

3.06 SEPARATE FLOOR TOPPINGSA. Prior to placing floor topping, roughen substrate concrete surface and remove deleterious

material. Broom and vacuum clean.B. Place required dividers, edge strips, reinforcing, and other items to be cast in.C. Apply bonding agent to substrate in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.D. Place concrete floor toppings to required lines and levels.E. Screed toppings level, maintaining surface flatness of maximum 1:1000.

3.07 FLOOR FLATNESS AND LEVELNESS TOLERANCESA. Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness:

1. Exposed Concrete Floors: 1/8 inch in 10 ft.2. Under Seamless Resilient Flooring: 1/8 inch in 10 ft.3. Under Carpeting: 1/8 inch in 10 ft.

B. Correct the slab surface if tolerances are less than specified.C. Correct defects by grinding or by removal and replacement of the defective work. Areas

requiring corrective work will be identified. Re-measure corrected areas by the same process.3.08 CONCRETE FINISHING

A. Unexposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch or more inheight.

B. Exposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off and smooth fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch ormore in height. Provide finish as follows:1. Cork Floated Finish: Immediately after form removal, apply grout with trowel or firm rubber

float; compress grout with low-speed grinder, and apply final texture with cork float. C. Concrete Slabs: Finish to requirements of ACI 302.1R, and as follows:

1. Surfaces to Receive Thick Floor Coverings: "Wood float" as described in ACI 302.1R;thick floor coverings include quarry tile, ceramic tile, and terrazzo with full bed settingsystem.

2. Surfaces to Receive Thin Floor Coverings: "Steel trowel" as described in ACI 302.1R; thinfloor coverings include carpeting, resilient flooring, seamless flooring, thin set quarry tile,and thin set ceramic tile.

3. Other Surfaces to Be Left Exposed: "Steel trowel" as described in ACI 302.1R, minimizingburnish marks and other appearance defects.

D. In areas with floor drains, maintain floor elevation at walls; pitch surfaces uniformly to drains at1:50 nominal, unless noted otherwise in drawings.

3.09 CURING AND PROTECTIONA. Comply with requirements of ACI 308R. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from

premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury.B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period

necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete.C. Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms:

1. Slabs and Floors To Receive Adhesive-Applied Flooring: Curing compounds and othersurface coatings are usually considered unacceptable by flooring and adhesivemanufacturers. If such materials must be used, either obtain the approval of the flooring



and adhesive manufacturers prior to use or remove the surface coating after curing toflooring manufacturer's satisfaction.

2. Initial Curing: Start as soon as free water has disappeared and before surface is dry. Keep continuously moist for not less than three days by water-saturated sand, water-fogspray, or saturated burlap.a. Ponding: Maintain 100 percent coverage of water over floor slab areas, continuously

for 4 days.b. Spraying: Spray water over floor slab areas and maintain wet.c. Saturated Burlap: Saturate burlap-polyethylene and place burlap-side down over floor

slab areas, lapping ends and sides; maintain in place.3. Final Curing: Begin after initial curing but before surface is dry.

a. Moisture-Retaining Sheet: Lap strips not less than 3 inches and seal with waterprooftape or adhesive; secure at edges.

3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01

40 00.B. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed firm.C. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to inspection and testing firm for review

prior to commencement of concrete operations.D. Tests of concrete and concrete materials may be performed at any time to ensure conformance

with specified requirements.E. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C39/C39M. For each test, mold and cure three concrete

test cylinders. Obtain test samples for every 100 cu yd or less of each class of concrete placed.F. Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under same

conditions as concrete it represents.3.11 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE

A. Test Results: The testing agency shall report test results in writing to HDJ and OakwoodConstruction within 24 hours of test.

B. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerancesor specified requirements.

C. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the HDJ. The cost ofadditional testing shall be borne by Oakwood Construction when defective concrete is identified.

D. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express directionof HDJ for each individual area.

3.12 PROTECTIONA. Do not permit traffic over unprotected concrete floor surface until fully cured.

3.13 SCHEDULE - CONCRETE TYPES AND FINISHESA. Footings: 3,000 pounds per square inch 28 day concrete, form finish.



06 05 73 - 1WOOD TREATMENT

SECTION 06 05 73WOOD TREATMENT


A. Site applied termiticide/ mildicide for wood materials.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 01 61 16 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions.B. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Factory treatment for wood products.

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide technical data on insulated sheathing, wood preservative materials, and

application instructions.C. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in

Genral Capital's name and registered with manufacturer.1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to preventdeformation and to allow air circulation.

1.05 WARRANTYA. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.B. Site Applied Termiticide and Mildicide: Correct defective Work within a twelve year period after

Date of Substantial Completion.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT

A. Site Applied Termiticide for Wood: Borate mineral salt based, spray applied, penetratingtermiticide.1. Products:

a. Nisus Corporation; Product Bora-Care with Mold-Care: www.nisuscorp.com.B. Surface-Applied Wood Preservative:

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 PREPARATION

A. Remove dust, dirt and other contaminants from treatment surfaces. Remove tarpaulins,dropcloths, strippable protective films, etc., from areas to be treated Move equipment andstored materials that block or prevent product application.

3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERALA. Provide temporary ventilation during and immediately after installation sufficient to remove

indoor air contaminants.3.03 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT

A. Comply with manufacturers written mixing and installation instructions.B. Termiticide: Apply to foundations, structure and other items as listed.

1. All structural wood and sill plates within 36 inches, minimum, of point of contact withfoundation.

2. All wood, wood based and cellulosic sheathing within 36 inches, minimum, of point ofcontact with foundation.

3. Concrete foundations 2 inches, minimum, from sill plate.


06 05 73 - 2WOOD TREATMENT

4. All pipe and plumbing penetrations up to 36 inches, minimum, above slab and slabsurface within 6 inches, minimum, of pipe or penetration.

5. Six inches, minimum, on either side of control joints and construction joints in slabs andjoints between slabs and abutting material.



06 10 00 - 1ROUGH CARPENTRY

SECTION 06 10 00ROUGH CARPENTRY


A. Structural dimension lumber framing.B. Non-structural dimension lumber framing.C. Rough opening framing for doors, windows, and roof openings.D. Sheathing.E. Roofing nailers.F. Preservative treated wood materials.G. Fire retardant treated wood materials.H. Miscellaneous framing and sheathing.I. Communications and electrical room mounting boards.J. Concealed wood blocking, nailers, and supports.K. Miscellaneous wood nailers, furring, and grounds.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 01 61 16 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions.B. Section 06 05 73 - Wood Treatment: Field-applied termiticide and mildicide for wood.C. Section 06 15 00 - Wood Decking.D. Section 06 17 53 - Shop-Fabricated Wood Trusses.E. Section 07 25 00 - Weather Barriers: Air barrier over sheathing.F. Section 07 25 00 - Weather Barriers: Water-resistive barrier over sheathing.G. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Gypsum-based sheathing.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. AFPA (WFCM) - Wood Frame Construction Manual for One- and Two-Family Dwellings;

American Forest and Paper Association; 2012.B. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel

Hardware; 2009.C. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015.D. ASTM D2898 - Standard Test Methods for Accelerated Weathering of Fire-Retardant-Treated

Wood for Fire Testing; 2010.E. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

2015a.F. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; 2012.G. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; 2010.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide technical data on insulated sheathing, wood preservative materials, and

application instructions.C. Structural Composite Lumber: Submit manufacturer's published structural data including span

tables, marked to indicate which sizes and grades are being used; if structural composite



lumber is being substituted for dimension lumber or timbers, submit grading agency structuraltables marked for comparison.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent

deformation and to allow air circulation. B. Fire Retardant Treated Wood: Prevent exposure to precipitation during shipping, storage, or

installation.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies.1. If no species is specified in structural drawings, provide any species graded by the agency

specified; if no grading agency is specified, provide lumber graded by any grading agencymeeting the specified requirements.

2. Grading Agency: Any grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review,American Lumber Standard Committee (www.alsc.org) and who provides grading servicefor the species and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unlessotherwise indicated.

3. Lumber of other species or grades is acceptable provided structural and appearancecharacteristics are equivalent to or better than products specified.

B. Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER FOR CONCEALED APPLICATIONS

A. Grading Agency: Western Wood Products Association (WWPA).B. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S.C. Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19.D. Stud Framing (2 by 2 through 2 by 6 ):

1. Species: Douglas Fir-Larch.2. Grade: No. 2.

E. Joist, Rafter, and Small Beam Framing (2 by 6 through 4 by 16 ):1. Machine stress-rated (MSR) as follows:

a. Fb-single (minimum extreme fiber stress in bending): 1350 psi.b. E (minimum modulus of elasticity): 1,300,000 psi.

F. Miscellaneous Framing, Blocking, Nailers, Grounds, and Furring:1. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade.2. Boards: Standard or No. 3.

2.03 EXPOSED DIMENSION LUMBERA. Submit manufacturer's certificate that products meet or exceed specified requirements, in lieu of

grade stamping.B. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings.C. Surfacing: S4S.D. Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19.

2.04 STRUCTURAL COMPOSITE LUMBERA. At Oakwood Construction's option, structural composite lumber may be substituted for

concealed dimension lumber and timbers.B. Structural Composite Lumber: Factory fabricated beams, headers, and columns, of sizes and

types indicated on drawings; structural capacity as published by manufacturer.



1. Columns: When not noted in structural drawings, Use laminated veneer lumber, laminatedstrand lumber, or parallel strand lumber with manufacturer's published E (modulus ofelasticity): 1,800,000 psi, minimum.

2. Beams: When not noted in structural drawings, Use laminated veneer lumber, laminatedstrand lumber, or parallel strand lumber with manufacturer's published E (modulus ofelasticity): 1,800,000 psi, minimum.

2.05 CONSTRUCTION PANELSA. Subfloor/Underlayment Combination: Any PS 2 type, rated Single Floor.

1. Bond Classification: Exposure 1.2. Span Rating: 48.3. Performance Category: 3/4 PERF CAT.4. Thickness: 3/4 inches, nominal.5. Edges: Tongue and groove.

B. Subfloor/Underlayment Combination: Oriented strand board wood structural panel; PS 2, ratedSingle Floor.1. Bond Classification: Exposure 1.2. Span Rating: 16.3. Edges: Tongue and groove.4. Surface Finish: Fully sanded face.5. Exposure Time: Sheathing will not delaminate or require sanding due to moisture

absorption from exposure to weather for up to 500 days.6. Provide fastening guide on top panel surface with separate markings indicating fastener

spacing for 16 inches, 19.2 inches and 24 inches on center, respectively.C. Underlayment: APA Underlayment; plywood, Exposure 2, 1/2 inch thick. Fully sanded faces at

resilient flooring.D. Roof Sheathing: APA PRP-108, Structural I Rated Sheathing, Exterior Exposure Class, and as

follows:1. Span Rating and Thickness: See Structural Drawings/ Notes

E. Roof Sheathing: Oriented strand board wood structural panel; PS 2.1. Grade: Structural 1 Sheathing.2. Bond Classification: Exposure 1.3. Span Rating: 40/20.4. Edges: Square.5. Exposure Time: Sheathing will not delaminate or require sanding due to moisture

absorption from exposure to weather for up to 500 days.F. Wall Sheathing: Oriented strand board structural wood panel; PS 2.

1. Bond Classification: Exposure 1.2. Size: 4 feet wide by 8 feet long.3. Edge Profile: Square edge.

G. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: PS 1 A-D plywood, or medium densityfiberboard; 3/4 inch thick; flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed index of 450 orless, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

2.06 ACCESSORIESA. Fasteners and Anchors:

1. Metal and Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized steel per ASTM A 153/A 153M for high humidityand preservative-treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere.

2. Anchors: Expansion shield and lag bolt type for anchorage to solid masonry or concrete.B. Die-Stamped Connectors: Hot dipped galvanized steel, sized to suit framing conditions.

1. For contact with preservative treated wood in exposed locations, provide minimum G185galvanizing per ASTM A653/A653M.



C. Joist Hangers: Hot dipped galvanized steel, sized to suit framing conditions. 1. For contact with preservative treated wood in exposed locations, provide minimum G185

galvanizing per ASTM A653/A653M.D. Sill Gasket on Top of Foundation Wall: 1/4 inch thick, plate width, closed cell plastic foam from

continuous rolls. E. Subfloor Glue: Waterproof, air cure type, cartridge dispensed.F. Water-Resistive Barrier: As specified in Section 07 25 00.

2.07 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENTA. Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System

for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specificapplications. 1. Fire-Retardant Treated Wood: Mark each piece of wood with producer's stamp indicating

compliance with specified requirements.2. Preservative-Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood marked or stamped by an

ALSC-accredited testing agency, certifying level and type of treatment in accordance withAWPA standards.

B. Fire Retardant Treatment:1. Exterior Type: AWPA U1, Category UCFB, Commodity Specification H, chemically treated

and pressure impregnated; capable of providing a maximum flame spread rating of 25when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, with no evidence of significant combustionwhen test is extended for an additional 20 minutes both before and after acceleratedweathering test performed in accordance with ASTM D2898.a. Kiln dry wood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber

and 15 percent for plywood.b. Treat all exterior rough carpentry items.c. Do not use treated wood in direct contact with the ground.

2. Interior Type A: AWPA U1, Use Category UCFA, Commodity Specification H, lowtemperature (low hygroscopic) type, chemically treated and pressure impregnated;capable of providing a maximum flame spread rating of 25 when tested in accordance withASTM E84, with no evidence of significant combustion when test is extended for anadditional 20 minutes.a. Kiln dry wood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber

and 15 percent for plywood.b. All interior rough carpentry items are to be fire retardant treated.c. Do not use treated wood in applications exposed to weather or where the wood may

become wet.C. Preservative Treatment:

1. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Lumber Above Grade: AWPA U1, Use CategoryUC3B, Commodity Specification A using waterborne preservative to 0.25 lb/cu ft retention.a. Kiln dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent.b. Treat lumber exposed to weather.c. Treat lumber in contact with roofing, flashing, or waterproofing.d. Treat lumber in contact with masonry or concrete.e. Treat lumber less than 18 inches above grade.f. Treat lumber in other locations as indicated.

2. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Plywood Above Grade: AWPA U1, Use CategoryUC2 and UC3B, Commodity Specification F using waterborne preservative to 0.25 lb/cu ftretention.a. Kiln dry plywood after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent.b. Treat plywood in contact with masonry or concrete.c. Treat plywood less than 18 inches above grade.

https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20E84























06 10 00 - 5 ROUGH CARPENTRY

3. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Lumber in Contact with Soil: AWPA U1, Use CategoryUC4A, Commodity Specification A using waterborne preservative to 0.4 lb/cu ft retention.a. Preservative for Field Application to Cut Surfaces: As recommended by manufacturer

of factory treatment chemicals for brush-application in the field.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 PREPARATION

A. Install sill gasket under sill plate of framed walls bearing on foundations; puncture gasketcleanly to fit tightly around protruding anchor bolts.

B. Coordinate installation of rough carpentry members specified in other sections.3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Select material sizes to minimize waste. B. Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory

components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking.C. Where treated wood is used on interior, provide temporary ventilation during and immediately

after installation sufficient to remove indoor air contaminants.3.03 FRAMING INSTALLATION

A. Set structural members level, plumb, and true to line. Discard pieces with defects that wouldlower required strength or result in unacceptable appearance of exposed members.

B. Make provisions for temporary construction loads, and provide temporary bracing sufficient tomaintain structure in true alignment and safe condition until completion of erection andinstallation of permanent bracing.

C. Install structural members full length without splices unless otherwise specifically detailed.D. Comply with member sizes, spacing, and configurations indicated, and fastener size and

spacing indicated, but not less than required by applicable codes and AFPA Wood FrameConstruction Manual.

E. Install horizontal spanning members with crown edge up and not less than 1-1/2 inches ofbearing at each end.

F. Construct double joist headers at floor and ceiling openings and under wall stud partitions thatare parallel to floor joists; use metal joist hangers unless otherwise detailed.

G. Frame wall openings with two or more studs at each jamb; support headers on cripple studs.3.04 BLOCKING, NAILERS, AND SUPPORTS

A. Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures,specialty items, and trim.

B. In framed assemblies that have concealed spaces, provide solid wood fireblocking as requiredby applicable local code, to close concealed draft openings between floors and between topstory and roof/attic space; other material acceptable to code authorities may be used in lieu ofsolid wood blocking.

C. In metal stud walls, provide continuous blocking around door and window openings foranchorage of frames, securely attached to stud framing.

D. In walls, provide blocking attached to studs as backing and support for wall-mounted items,unless item can be securely fastened to two or more studs or other method of support isexplicitly indicated.

E. Where ceiling-mounting is indicated, provide blocking and supplementary supports aboveceiling, unless other method of support is explicitly indicated.

F. Provide the following specific non-structural framing and blocking:1. Cabinets and shelf supports.2. Wall brackets.























































3. Handrails.4. Grab bars.5. Towel and bath accessories.6. Wall-mounted door stops.7. Wall paneling and trim.8. Joints of rigid wall coverings that occur between studs.

3.05 ROOF-RELATED CARPENTRYA. Coordinate installation of roofing carpentry with deck construction, framing of roof openings, and

roofing assembly installation.B. Provide wood curb at all roof openings except where prefabricated curbs are specified and

where specifically indicated otherwise. Form corners by alternating lapping side members.3.06 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS

A. Subflooring/Underlayment Combination: Screw and glue to framing; staples are not permitted.B. Roof Sheathing: Secure panels with long dimension perpendicular to framing members, with

ends staggered and over firm bearing.1. At long edges use sheathing clips where joints occur between roof framing members.2. Nail panels to framing; staples are not permitted.

C. Wall Sheathing: Secure with long dimension perpendicular to wall studs, with ends over firmbearing and staggered, using nails, screws, or staples.1. Place water-resistive barrier horizontally over wall sheathing, weather lapping edges and

ends.D. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: Secure with screws to studs with

edges over firm bearing; space fasteners at maximum 24 inches on center on all edges and intostuds in field of board.1. At fire-rated walls, install board over wall board indicated as part of the fire-rated assembly.2. Where boards are indicated as full floor-to-ceiling height, install with long edge of board

parallel to studs.3. Install adjacent boards without gaps.4. Size and Location: As indicated on Electrical drawings.

E. Wall Sheathing and Roof Sheathing with Laminated Water-Resistive Barrier and Air Barrier: Secure to studs as recommended by manufacturer.1. Install with laminated water-resistive and air barrier on exterior side of sheathing.2. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing

of structural support elements.3. Use only mechanically attached and drainable EIFS and exterior insulation with wall

sheathing with laminated water-resistive and air barrier.4. Apply manufacturer's standard seam tape to joints between sheathing panels. Use tape

gun or hard rubber roller as recommended by manufacturer.3.07 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT

A. Apply preservative treatment compatible with factory applied treatment at site-sawn cuts,complying with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Allow preservative to dry prior to erecting members.3.08 CLEANING

A. Waste Disposal: Comply with the requirements of Section 01 74 19.1. Comply with applicable regulations.2. Do not burn scrap on project site.3. Do not burn scraps that have been pressure treated.4. Do not send materials treated with pentachlorophenol, CCA, or ACA to co-generation

facilities or “waste-to-energy” facilities.
























































06 10 00 - 7 ROUGH CARPENTRY

B. Do not leave any wood, shavings, sawdust, etc. on the ground or buried in fill. C. Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system.











06 17 53 - 1SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD

TRUSSES

SECTION 06 17 53SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES


A. Shop fabricated wood trusses for roof and floor framing.B. Bridging, bracing, and anchorage.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 01 61 16 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions.B. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Installation requirements for miscellaneous framing.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015.B. TPI 1 - National Design Standard for Metal-Plate-Connected Wood Truss Construction; 2007

and errata.C. TPI DSB-89 - Recommended Design Specification for Temporary Bracing of Metal Plate

Connected Wood Trusses; 1989.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Shop Drawings: Show truss configurations, sizes, spacing, size and type of plate connectors,

cambers, framed openings, bearing and anchor details, and bridging and bracing.1. Provide shop drawings stamped or sealed by design engineer.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this

section with minimum three years of documented experience.1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Handle and erect trusses in accordance with TPI BCSI 1.B. Store trusses in vertical position resting on bearing ends.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 TRUSSES

A. Wood Trusses: Designed and fabricated in accordance with TPI 1 and TPI DSB-89 to achievestructural requirements indicated.1. Connectors: Steel plate.2. Structural Design: Comply with applicable code and Structural Drawings for structural

loading criteria.3. Deflection Criteria: See Structural Drawings

2.02 MATERIALSA. Lumber:

1. Moisture Content: Between 7 and 9 percent.2. Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.3. Provide lumber harvested within a 500 mile radius of the project site.

B. Steel Connectors: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M Structural Steel (SS)Grade 33/230, with G90/Z275 coating; die stamped with integral teeth; thickness as indicated.

C. Truss Bridging: Type, size and spacing recommended by truss manufacturer.


06 17 53 - 2SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES

2.03 ACCESSORIESA. Wood Blocking, Bridging, Plates, and Miscellaneous Framing: Softwood lumber, any species,

construction grade, 19 percent maximum and 7 percent minimum moisture content.B. Fasteners: Electrogalvanized steel, type to suit application.


A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.B. Verify that supports and openings are ready to receive trusses.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Coordinate placement of bearing items.

3.03 ERECTIONA. Install trusses in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and TPI DSB-89 and TPI BCSI 1;

maintain a copy of each TPI document on site until installation is complete.B. Set members level and plumb, in correct position.C. Make provisions for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure

plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing.D. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of HDJ or Truss Engineer.E. Install permanent bridging and bracing.

3.04 TOLERANCESA. Framing Members: 1/2 inch maximum, from true position.



06 20 00 - 1FINISH CARPENTRY

SECTION 06 20 00FINISH CARPENTRY


A. Finish carpentry items.B. Wood door frames, glazed frames.C. Wood casings and moldings.D. Hardware and attachment accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 01 61 16 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions.B. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Support framing, grounds, and concealed blocking.C. Section 08 14 33 - Stile and Rail Wood Doors.D. Section 08 52 00 - Wood Windows.E. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing: Glass and glazing of wood partitions and screens.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

2015a.B. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2014.C. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; 2012.D. BHMA A156.9 - American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware; 2010.E. NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; 2005.F. PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2009.G. WDMA I.S. 4 - Industry Specification for Preservative Treatment for Millwork; 2013.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTSA. Coordinate the work with plumbing rough-in, electrical rough-in, and installation of associated

and adjacent components.B. Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious

manner.1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.B. Product Data:

1. Provide data on fire retardant treatment materials and application instructions.2. Provide instructions for attachment hardware and finish hardware.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details, andaccessories.1. Provide the information required by AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS).

D. Samples: Submit two samples of wood trim 6 inch long.1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in thissection with minimum five years of documented experience.1. Company with at least one project in the past 5 years with value of woodwork within 20

percent of cost of woodwork for this Project.2. Single Source Responsibility: Provide and install this work from single fabricator.



1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Protect work from moisture damage.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 FINISH CARPENTRY ITEMS

A. Quality Grade: Unless otherwise indicated provide products of quality specified byAWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) for Premium Grade.

B. Surface Burning Characteristics: Provide materials having fire and smoke properties asrequired by applicable code.

C. Interior Woodwork Items:1. Moldings, Bases, Casings, and Miscellaneous Trim: Clear white pine; prepare for paint

finish in first floor Common/ Lobby Areas per Finish Schedule, and Fiber Board wood trim,base and casing at all other areas and living units.

2. Window Sills: 1X PVC Sills by Royalwood or Equal.3. Stairs, Balustrades, and Handrails: Clear fir; prepare for painted or stained finish. Stain

finish on handrails only.2.02 WOOD-BASED COMPONENTS

A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.B. Provide sustainably harvested wood, certified or labeled as specified in Section 01 60 00.C. Provide wood harvested within a 500 mile radius of the project site.

2.03 LUMBER MATERIALSA. Softwood Lumber: clear white pine species, paint grade sawn, maximum moisture content of 6

percent; with flat grain, .B. Fiber board Products: Fiber board base and casing shall be used throughout project. .C. Hardwood Lumber: match existing species, match existing grain, maximum moisture content of

6 percent , of quality suitable for transparent finish.2.04 SHEET MATERIALS

A. Softwood Plywood Not Exposed to View: Any face species, veneer core; PS 1 Grade A-B; gluetype as recommended for application.

B. Softwood Plywood Exposed to View: Face species as indicated, plain sawn, medium densityfiberboard core; PS 1 Grade A-B; glue type as recommended for application.

C. Hardwood Plywood: Face species as indicated, plain sawn, book matched, medium densityfiberboard core; HPVA HP-1, Grade AA, Type to match existing; glue type as recommended forapplication.

2.05 PLASTIC LAMINATE MATERIALSA. Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD 3, HGS; textured, low gloss finish.B. Laminate Adhesive: Type recommended by laminate manufacturer to suit application; not

containing formaldehyde or other volatile organic compounds.2.06 FASTENINGS

A. Adhesive for Purposes Other Than Laminate Installation: Suitable for the purpose; notcontaining formaldehyde or other volatile organic compounds.

B. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel.2.07 ACCESSORIES

A. Primer: Alkyd primer sealer.B. Wood Filler: Solvent base, tinted to match surface finish color.

http://www.awinet.org/








































06 20 00 - 3 FINISH CARPENTRY

2.08 HARDWAREA. Hardware: Comply with BHMA A156.9.

2.09 WOOD TREATMENTA. Fire Retardant Treatment (FR-S Type): Chemically treated and pressure impregnated; capable

of providing flame spread index of 25, maximum, and smoke developed index of 450,maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

B. Wood Preservative by Pressure Treatment (PT Type): AWPA U1 Treatment using water bornepreservative with 0.25 percent retainage.

C. Water Repellant Preservative Treatment by Dipping Method: WDMA I.S. 4, with 0.25 percentretainage.

D. Shop pressure treat wood materials requiring fire rating to concealed wood blocking.E. Provide identification on fire retardant treated material.F. Redry wood after pressure treatment to maximum 9 percent moisture content.

2.10 FABRICATIONA. Shop assemble work for delivery to site, permitting passage through building openings.B. Fit exposed sheet material edges with 3/8 inch matching hardwood edging. Use one piece for

full length only.C. Cap exposed plastic laminate finish edges with material of same finish and pattern.D. Shop prepare and identify components for book match grain matching during site erection.E. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting.

Provide trim for scribing and site cutting.F. Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Fit

corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly bevel arises. Locatecounter butt joints minimum 2 feet from sink cut-outs.


A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.B. Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this section are placed and

ready to receive this work.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) requirements for grade indicated.B. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level.C. Carefully scribe work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use

additional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps.3.03 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT

A. Apply preservative treatment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Brush apply one coats of preservative treatment on wood in contact with cementitious materials.

Treat site-sawn cuts.C. Allow preservative to dry prior to erecting members.

3.04 PREPARATION FOR SITE FINISHINGA. Set exposed fasteners. Apply wood filler in exposed fastener indentations. Sand work smooth.B. Before installation, prime paint surfaces of items or assemblies to be in contact with

cementitious materials.



















































3.05 TOLERANCESA. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/16 inch.B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1/32 inch.












07 21 00 - 1THERMAL INSULATION

SECTION 07 21 00THERMAL INSULATION


A. Board insulation at perimeter foundation wall, underside of floor slabs, over roof deck, andexterior wall behind ________ wall finish.

B. Batt insulation in interior wall, ceiling, and floor construction.C. Foam insulation for filling perimeter window and door shim spaces, crevices in exterior wall and

roof, and floor and roof truss cavities along exterior walls including exterior edge of roof deck.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 01 61 16 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions.B. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Supporting construction for batt insulation.C. Section 07 21 26 - Blown Insulation: Blown-in, gravity-held fibrous insulation.D. Section 07 25 00 - Weather Barriers: Separate air barrier and vapor retarder materials.E. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping: Insulation as part of fire-rated through-penetration assemblies.F. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Acoustic insulation inside walls and partitions.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM C578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation; 2015a.B. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light

Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2012.C. ASTM C1289 - Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal

Insulation Board; 2014.D. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

2015a.E. ASTM E136 - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace At 750

Degrees C; 2012.F. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

National Fire Protection Association; 2006.G. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, and product

limitations.C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.05 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Do not install insulation adhesives when temperature or weather conditions are detrimental to

successful installation.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 APPLICATIONS

A. Insulation Under Concrete Slabs: Extruded polystyrene board.B. Insulation at Perimeter of Foundation: Extruded polystyrene board.C. Insulation in Wood Framed Walls: Batt insulation with separate vapor retarder.


07 21 00 - 2THERMAL INSULATION

D. Insulation in Wood Framed Ceiling Structure: Batt insulation with no vapor retarder.E. Insulation Above Gyp Bd Ceilings: Batt insulation with no vapor retarder. (or blown-in fiberglass

insulation as preferred by contractor.)F. Insulation Over Roof Deck: Polyisocyanurate board.

2.02 FOAM BOARD INSULATION MATERIALSA. Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C578, Type X; Extruded polystyrene board with

either natural skin or cut cell surfaces; with the following characteristics:1. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.2. Flame Spread Index: 75 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.3. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.4. Board Size: 48 x 96 inch.5. Board Thickness: 2 inches.6. Board Edges: Shiplap.7. Thermal Conductivity (k factor) at 25 degrees F: 0.18.8. Compressive Resistance: 15 psi.9. Board Density: 1.3 lb/cu ft.10. Water Absorption, maximum: 0.3 percent, volume.11. Manufacturers:

a. Dow Chemical Co: www.dow.com.b. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com.c. Pactiv Building Products: greenguard.pactiv.com.

12. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation with Facers Both Sides: Rigid cellular foam, complying with

ASTM C1289; Type I, aluminum foil both faces; Class 1, non-reinforced foam core.1. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.2. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.3. Compressive Strength: 16 psi4. Board Size: 48 x 96 inch.5. Board Thickness: 1 inch and 1-1/2 inch. Refer to drawings.6. Board Edges: Shiplap on long edges.7. Manufacturers:

a. Dow Chemical Co: www.dow.com.b. GAF: www.gaf.com.c. Rmax Inc.; ECOMAXci: www.rmax.com.

2.03 BATT INSULATION MATERIALSA. Glass Fiber Batt Insulation: Flexible preformed batt or blanket, complying with ASTM C665;

friction fit.1. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.2. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.3. Combustibility: Non-combustible, when tested in accordance with ASTM E136, except for

facing, if any.4. Formaldehyde Content: Zero.5. Facing: Unfaced.

2.04 ACCESSORIESA. Tape: Bright aluminum self-adhering type, mesh reinforced, 2 inch wide.B. Tape joints of rigid insulation in accordance with roofing and insulation manufacturers'

instructions.C. Nails or Staples: Steel wire; electroplated or galvanized; type and size to suit application.D. Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer for application.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20C1289



























07 21 00 - 3 THERMAL INSULATION


A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation materials are dry and that substrates areready to receive insulation and adhesive.

B. Verify substrate surfaces are flat, free of honeycomb, fins, irregularities, or materials orsubstances that may impede adhesive bond.

3.02 BOARD INSTALLATION AT FOUNDATION PERIMETERA. Install boards horizontally and vertically at foundation perimeter, per drawings.B. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane.

3.03 BOARD INSTALLATION AT EXTERIOR WALLS (BELOW GRADE)A. Adhere a 6 inch wide strip of polyethylene sheet over expansion joints with double beads of

adhesive each side of joint.1. Tape seal joints between sheets.

B. Install boards horizontally on walls.1. Place boards to maximize adhesive contact.2. Install in running bond pattern.3. Extend exterior wall insulation full height up to finished grade.

C. Extend boards over expansion joints, unbonded to wall on one side of joint.D. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane.E. Foam insulation board joints.

3.04 BOARD INSTALLATION UNDER CONCRETE SLABSA. Place insulation under slabs on grade after base for slab has been compacted.B. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane.C. Prevent insulation from being displaced or damaged while placing vapor retarder and placing

slab.3.05 BOARD INSTALLATION OVER LOW SLOPE ROOF DECK

A. Board Installation Over Roof Deck, General:1. See applicable roofing specification section for specific board installation requirements.2. Fasten insulation to deck in accordance with roofing manufacturer's written instructions

and applicable Factory Mutual requirements.3. Do not apply more insulation than can be covered with roofing in same day.

3.06 BATT INSTALLATIONA. Install insulation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Install in exterior wall spaces without gaps or voids. Do not compress insulation.C. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids.D. Fit insulation tightly in cavities and tightly to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services

within the plane of the insulation.E. Coordinate work of this section with construction of air barrier seal specified in Section 07 25

00.3.07 PROTECTION

A. Do not permit installed insulation to be damaged prior to its concealment.END OF SECTION 07 21 00

















































07 21 26 - 1BLOWN INSULATION

SECTION 07 21 26BLOWN INSULATION


A. Exterior Walls: Loose insulation pneumatically placed through access holes (Option in lieu ofBatt).

B. Attic: Loose insulation pneumatically placed .1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 01 61 16 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions.B. Section 07 21 00 - Thermal Insulation.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM C739 - Standard Specification for Cellulosic Fiber (Wood-Base) Loose-Fill Thermal

Insulation; 2011.B. ASTM C1015 - Standard Practice for Installation of Cellulosic and Mineral Fiber Loose-Fill

Thermal Insulation; 2006 (Reapproved 2011).1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Materials of This Section: Provide continuity of thermal barrier at building enclosure elements,in conjunction with Section 07 21 00.

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, limitations .

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MATERIALS

A. Loose Fill Insulation: ASTM C739, cellulose fiber type, bulk for pneumatic placement.1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 BTU in/(hr sq ft deg F).2. Installed Thickness: As indicated on drawings.3. Total Thermal Resistance: 11.0 (deg F hr sq ft)/Btu.

B. Ventilation Baffles: Formed plastic or cardboard. Required between every truss/rafter to allowventilation from soffit to ridge


A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation are dry and ready to receive insulation.B. Verify that light fixtures have thermal cut-out device to restrict over-heating in soffit or ceiling

spaces.C. Coordinate with ductwork in attics or walls, coordinate with related trades as required. Installer

shall not compromise the integrity of ductwork and related insulation.D. Verify spaces are unobstructed to allow placement of insulation.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install insulation and ventilation baffle in accordance with ASTM C1015 and manufacturer's

instructions. Place between all trusses to maintain consistent ventilation from soffit to ridge.B. Place insulation pneumatically to completely fill stud, joist, and rafter spaces .C. Place insulation against baffles when necessary to achieve minimum R value. Do not impede

natural attic ventilation to soffit.D. Place against and behind mechanical and electrical services within the plane of insulation.


07 21 26 - 2BLOWN INSULATION

E. Completely fill intended spaces. Leave no gaps or voids.F. Repair and reseal insulation access ports. Refinish to match disturbed work.

3.03 CLEANINGA. Remove loose insulation residue.



07 25 00 - 1WEATHER BARRIERS

SECTION 07 25 00WEATHER BARRIERS


A. Air Barriers: Materials that form a system to stop passage of air through exterior walls, jointsbetween exterior walls and roof, and joints around frames of openings in exterior walls.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Vapor retarder under concrete slabs on grade.B. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Water-resistive barrier under exterior cladding.C. Section 07 21 00 - Thermal Insulation: Vapor retarder installed in conjunction with batt

insulation.1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Weather Barrier: Assemblies that form either water-resistive barriers, air barriers, or vaporretarders.

B. Air Barrier: Air tight barrier made of material that is relatively air impermeable but water vaporpermeable, both to the degree specified, with sealed seams and with sealed joints to adjacentsurfaces. Note: For the purposes of this specification, vapor impermeable air barriers areclassified as vapor retarders.

C. Water-Resistive Barrier: Water-shedding barrier made of material that is moisture-resistant, tothe degree specified, intended to be installed to shed water without sealed seams.

1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. AATCC Test Method 127 - Water Resistance: Hydrostatic Pressure Test; 2014.B. ASTM D412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic

Elastomers--Tension; 2006a (Reapproved 2013).C. ASTM D1970/D1970M - Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous

Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection; 2013.D. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

2015a.E. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2014.F. ASTM E2178 - Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials; 2013.G. ICC-ES AC38 - Acceptance Criteria for Water-Resistive Barriers; ICC Evaluation Service, Inc;

2013.H. ICC-ES AC212 - Acceptance Criteria for Water-Resistive Coatings Used as Water-Resistive

Barriers over Exterior Sheathing; ICC Evaluation Service, Inc; 2015.1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on material characteristics.

1.06 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the materials manufacturers before,

during and after installation.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 AIR BARRIER MATERIALS (WATER VAPOR PERMEABLE AND WATER-RESISTIVE)

A. Air Barrier Sheet, Mechanically Fastened: See Bid Alternates on Cover Sheet1. Air Permeance: 0.004 cubic feet per minute per square foot, maximum, when tested in

accordance with ASTM E2178.



2. Water Vapor Permeance: 5 perms, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTME96/E96M Procedure A (desiccant method).

3. Water Penetration Resistance: Withstand a water head of 21 inches, minimum, forminimum of 5 hours, when tested in accordance with AATCC 127.

4. Ultraviolet and Weathering Resistance: Approved in writing by manufacturer for minimumof 6 months weather exposure.

5. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25 or less, and smoke developedindex of 50 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

6. Water Resistance: Comply with applicable water-resistive requirements of ICC-ESAcceptance Criteria AC38.

7. Seam and Perimeter Tape: Polyethylene self adhering type, mesh reinforced, 2 incheswide, compatible with sheet material; unless otherwise specified.

8. Products:a. DuPont Building Innovations; Tyvek Drain Wrap with FlexWrap NF, Tyvek Wrap

Caps, and Tyvek Tape: www.dupont.com.B. Air Barrier Coating: See Bid Alternates on Cover Sheet

1. Material: Acrylic.2. Acceptable Substrates: Stated by manufacturer as suitable for installation on visibly damp

surfaces and concrete that has hardened but is not fully cured ("green" concrete) withoutrequiring a primer.

3. Adhesion to Paper and Glass Mat Faced Sheathing: Sufficient to ensure failure due todelamination of sheathing.

4. Dry Film Thickness: 25 mils inch, minimum. Or as recommended by Manufacturer for fullwarranty.

5. Air Permeance: 0.004 cubic feet per minute per square foot, maximum, when tested inaccordance with ASTM E2178.

6. Water Vapor Permeance: 5 perms, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTME96/E96M.

7. Ultraviolet and Weathering Resistance: Approved in writing by manufacturer for minimumof 6 months weather exposure.

8. Elongation: 300 percent, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D412.9. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed

index of 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.10. Nail Sealability: Pass, when tested in accordance with ASTM D1970.11. VOC Content: 25 g per L or less.12. Code Acceptance: Comply with applicable requirements of ICC-ES Acceptance Criteria

AC212.13. Sealants, Tapes and Accessories: As recommended by coating manufacturer.14. Products:

a. DuPont Building Innovations; Tyvek Fluid Applied WB with Tyvek Fluid AppliedFlashing and Joint Compound, Sealant for Tyvek Fluid Applied System andStraightFlash: www.dupont.com.

b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.2.02 SEALANTS

A. Primers, Cleaners, and Other Sealant Materials: As recommended by sealant manufacturer,appropriate to application, and compatible with adjacent materials.

2.03 ADHESIVESA. Mastic Adhesive : Compatible with sheet seal and substrate, thick mastic of uniform knife grade

consistency .B. Non-Curing Adhesive : Compatible with sheet seal and substrate, permanently non-curing.

https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20E96/E96M


















































07 25 00 - 3 WEATHER BARRIERS

2.04 ACCESSORIESA. Sealants, Tapes, and Accessories for Sealing Weather Barrier and Sealing Weather Barrier to

Adjacent Substrates: As specified or as recommended by weather barrier manufacturer.B. Flexible Flashing: Self-adhesive sheet flashing complying with ASTM D1970, except slip

resistance requirement is waived if not installed on a roof.1. Composition: Any material that meets physical requirements of ASTM D1970 with

exceptions indicated. Must be compatible with fluid applied air barrier system.2. Thickness: 40 mil (0.040 inch), nominal.3. Products:

a. DuPont Building Innovations; FlexWrap NF: www.dupont.com.b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

C. Thinners and Cleaners: As recommended by material manufacturer.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to accept the work of this section.3.02 PREPARATION

A. Remove projections, protruding fasteners, and loose or foreign matter that might interfere withproper installation.

B. Clean and prime substrate surfaces to receive adhesives in accordance with manufacturer'sinstructions.

3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Air Barriers: Install continuous air tight barrier over surfaces indicated, with sealed seams and

with sealed joints to adjacent surfaces.C. Apply sealants and adhesives within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult

manufacturer if temperature is out of this range.D. Mechanically Fastened Sheets - On Exterior:

1. Install sheets shingle-fashion to shed water, with seams generally horizontal.2. Overlap seams as recommended by manufacturer but at least 6 inches. 3. Overlap at outside and inside corners as recommended by manufacturer but at least 12

inches.4. For applications specified to be air tight, seal seams, laps, penetrations, tears, and cuts

with self-adhesive tape; use only large-headed, gasketed fasteners recommended by themanufacturer.

5. Install air barrier and vapor retarder UNDER jamb flashings.6. Install head flashings under weather barrier.7. At openings to be filled with frames having nailing flanges, install per window flashing

sequence on drawings.E. Self-Adhesive Sheets:

1. Prepare substrate in manner recommended by sheet manufacturer; fill and tape joints insubstrate and between dissimilar materials.

2. Lap sheets shingle-fashion to shed water and seal laps air tight.3. Once sheets are in place, press firmly into substrate with resilient hand roller; ensure that

all laps are firmly adhered with no gaps or fishmouths.4. Use same material, or other material approved by sheet manufacturer for the purpose, to

seal to adjacent construction and as flashing.5. At wide joints, provide extra flexible membrane allowing joint movement.

F. Coatings:
























































1. Prepare substrate in manner recommended by coating manufacturer; treat joints insubstrate and between dissimilar materials as recommended by manufacturer.

2. Where exterior masonry veneer is to be installed, install masonry anchors before installingweather barrier over masonry; seal around anchors air tight.

3. Use flashing to seal to adjacent construction and to bridge joints.G. Openings and Penetrations in Exterior Weather Barriers:

1. Install flashing over sills, covering entire sill frame member, extending at least 5 inchesonto weather barrier and at least 6 inches up jambs; mechanically fasten stretched edges.

2. At head of openings, install flashing under weather barrier extending at least 2 inchesbeyond face of jambs; seal weather barrier to flashing.

3. At interior face of openings, seal gap between window/door frame and rough framing,using joint sealant over backer rod.

4. Service and Other Penetrations: Form flashing around penetrating item and seal toweather barrier surface.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Do not cover installed weather barriers until required inspections have been completed.B. Obtain approval of installation procedures by the weather barrier manufacturer based on a

mock-up installed in place, prior to proceeding with remainder of installation.C. Take digital photographs of each portion of the installation prior to covering up.

3.05 PROTECTIONA. Do not leave materials exposed to weather longer than recommended by manufacturer.






























07 31 13 - 1ASPHALT SHINGLES

SECTION 07 31 13ASPHALT SHINGLES


A. Asphalt shingle roofing.B. Flexible sheet membranes for eave protection, underlayment, and valley protection.C. Associated metal flashings and accessories.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM D226/D226M - Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in

Roofing and Waterproofing; 2009.B. ASTM D1970/D1970M - Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous

Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection; 2013.C. ASTM D3161/D3161M - Standard Test Method for Wind-Resistance of Steep Slope Roofing

Products (Fan-Induced Method); 2014.D. ASTM D3462/D3462M - Standard Specification for Asphalt Shingles Made From Glass Felt and

Surfaced with Mineral Granules; 2010a.E. ASTM D4586/D4586M - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free; 2007

(Reapproved 2012).F. ASTM D6380/D6380M - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roll Roofing (Organic Felt); 2003

(Reapproved 2013).G. ICC-ES AC188 - Acceptance Criteria for Roof Underlayments; 2012.H. NRCA MS104 - The NRCA Steep Roofing Manual; National Roofing Contractors Association;

2001, Fifth Edition, with interim updates.I. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; current listings at database.ul.com.

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data indicating material characteristics.C. Samples: Submit two samples of each shingle color indicating color range and finish

texture/pattern; for color selection.1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform Work in accordance with the recommendations of NRCA Steep Roofing Manual.1. Maintain one copy of document on site.

B. Products Required to Comply with Fire Resistance Criteria: UL listed and labeled.1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Do not install shingles or eave protection membrane when surface temperatures are below 45degrees F.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 SHINGLES

A. Manufacturers:1. BP, Building Products of Canada; Everest 42, 40 year/ Lifetime warranty.2. CertainTeed; Product Landmark.

2.02 ASPHALT SHINGLESA. Asphalt Shingles: Asphalt-coated glass felt, mineral granule surfaced, complying with ASTM

D3462; Class A fire resistance.




1. Wind Resistance: Class F, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3161.2. Algae Resistant.3. Self-sealing type.4. Style: Laminated overlay.

2.03 SHEET MATERIALSA. Mineral Surfaced Roll Roofing: Asphalt-coated organic felt, mineral granule surfaced,

complying with ASTM D6380/D6380M, Class M, Type II, with 2 inch wide selvage; ______ color.B. Eave Protection Membrane: Self-adhering polymer-modified asphalt sheet complying with

ASTM D1970; 40 mil total thickness; with strippable treated release paper and polyethylenesheet top surface.

C. Underlayment: Synthetic non-asphaltic sheet, intended by manufacturer for mechanicallyfastened roofing underlayment without sealed seams.1. Type: Woven polypropylene with anti-slip polyolefin coating on both sides.2. Minimum Requirements: Comply with requirements of ICC-ES AC188 for

non-self-adhesive sheet.3. Self Sealability: Passing nail sealability test specified in ASTM D1970.4. Ultraviolet Resistance and Weatherability: Approved in writing by manufacturer for

exposure to weather for minimum of 6 months.5. Low Temperature Flexibility: Passing test specified in ASTM D1970.6. Liquid Water Transmission: Passes ASTM D4869.7. Fasteners: As specified by manufacturer and building code qualification report or

approval, if any.D. Underlayment: Asphalt-saturated organic roofing felt, unperforated, complying with ASTM

D226/D226M, Type I ("No.15").E. Flexible Flashing: Self-adhering polymer-modified asphalt sheet complying with ASTM D1970;

40 mil total thickness; with strippable treated release paper and polyethylene sheet top surface.2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Nails: Standard round wire shingle type, of hot-dipped zinc coated steel, 12 gage, 0.105 inchshank diameter, 3/8 inch head diameter, of sufficient length to penetrate through roof sheathingor 3/4 inch into roof sheathing or decking.

B. Staples: Standard wire shingle type, of hot dipped zinc coated steel, 16 gage, 0.062 inchdiameter, 15/16 inch crown width, of sufficient length to penetrate through roof sheathing or 3/4inch into roof sheathing or decking.

C. Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586, asphalt roof cement.D. Lap Cement: Fibrated cutback asphalt type, recommended for use in application of

underlayment, free of toxic solvents .E. Ridge Vents: Plastic, extruded with vent openings that do not permit direct water or weather

entry; flanged to receive shingles; Weather Pro Ridge Solid manufactured by Duraflo.F. Eaves Baffles: Provide baffles btween all trusses/ rafters to maintain continuous airflow from

soffit to ridge vent/ roof louver.2.05 METAL FLASHINGS

A. Metal Flashings: Provide sheet metal eave edge, gable edge, dormer flashing, and otherflashing indicated.1. Form sections square and accurate to profile, in maximum possible lengths, free from

distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance.2. Hem exposed edges of flashings minimum 1/4 inch on underside.3. Coat concealed surfaces of flashings with bituminous paint.

B. Sheet Metal: Prefinished aluminum, 0.016 inch thick; PVC coating, match roofing color.C. Bituminous Paint: Acid and alkali resistant type; black color.





























http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20D226/D226M



























07 31 13 - 3 ASPHALT SHINGLES


A. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work.B. Verify that deck is of sufficient thickness to accept fasteners.C. Verify that roof penetrations and plumbing stacks are in place and flashed to deck surface.D. Verify roof openings are correctly framed.E. Verify deck surfaces are dry, free of ridges, warps, or voids.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Seal roof deck joints wider than 1/16 inch with deck tape.B. At areas where eave protection membrane is to be adhered to substrate, fill knot holes and

surface cracks with latex filler.C. Broom clean deck surfaces before installing underlayment or eave protection.D. Install eave edge and gable edge flashings tight with fascia boards. Weather lap joints 2 inches

and seal with plastic cement. Secure flange with nails spaced 6 inches on center.3.03 INSTALLATION - EAVE PROTECTION MEMBRANE

A. Install eave protection membrane from eave edge to minimum 2 ft up-slope beyond interior faceof exterior wall.

B. Install eave protection membrane in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.3.04 INSTALLATION - UNDERLAYMENT

A. At Roof Slopes Up to 4:12 : Install two layers of underlayment over area not protected by eaveprotection, with ends and edges weather lapped minimum 4 inches. Stagger end laps of eachconsecutive layer. Nail in place.

B. At Roof Slopes Greater Than 4:12 : Install underlayment perpendicular to slope of roof, withends and edges weather lapped minimum 4 inches. Stagger end laps of each consecutivelayer. Nail in place. Weather lap minimum 4 inches over eave protection.

C. Items projecting through or mounted on roof: Weather lap and seal watertight with plasticcement.

3.05 INSTALLATION - VALLEY PROTECTIONA. Install one ply of smooth surfaced roll roofing, minimum 24 inches wide, centered over valleys.B. Weather lap joints minimum 2 inches.C. Nail in place minimum 18 inches on center, 1 inch from edges.D. At Exposed Valleys: Install minimum 36 inches wide roll roofing with mineral surface side up

over first layer of protection, centered. Apply a 4 inch wide band of lap cement along each edgeof first, press roll roofing into cement, and nail in place minimum 18 inches on center, 1 inchfrom edges.

3.06 INSTALLATION - METAL FLASHING AND ACCESSORIESA. Install flashings in accordance with NRCA requirements.B. Weather lap joints minimum 2 inches and seal weather tight with plastic cement.C. Secure in place with nails at 6 inches on center. Conceal fastenings.D. Items Projecting Through or Mounted on Roofing: Flash and seal weather tight with plastic

cement.E. Install eaves baffles between all trusses, maintain 1-1/2" minimum clear airspace under roof

deck.



















































3.07 INSTALLATION - SHINGLESA. Install shingles in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

1. Fasten individual shingles using 2 nails per shingle, or as required by code, whichever isgreater.

2. Fasten strip shingles using 4 nails per strip, or as required by code, whichever is greater.B. Place shingles in straight coursing pattern with 5 inch weather exposure to produce double

thickness over full roof area. Provide double course of shingles at eaves.C. Project first course of shingles 3/4 inch beyond fascia boards.D. Extend shingles 1/2 inch beyond face of gable edge fascia boards.E. Extend shingles on one slope across valley and fasten. Trim shingles from other slope 2 inches

from valley center line to achieve closed cut valley, concealing the valley protection.F. Cap hips with individual shingles, maintaining 5 inch weather exposure. Place to avoid exposed

nails.G. After installation, place one daub of plastic cement, one inch diameter under each individual

shingle tab exposed to weather, to prevent lifting.H. Coordinate installation of roof mounted components or work projecting through roof with

weather tight placement of counterflashings.I. Complete installation to provide weather tight service.

3.08 PROTECTIONA. Do not permit traffic over finished roof surface.





























07 46 46 - 1FIBER CEMENT SIDING

SECTION 07 46 46FIBER CEMENT SIDING


A. Wood-fiber cement siding.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Siding substrate.B. Section 07 25 00 - Weather Barriers: Weather barrier under siding.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM C1186 - Standard Specification for Flat Fiber Cement Sheets; 2008 (Reapproved 2012).

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Manufacturer's requirements for related materials to be installed by others.2. Preparation instructions and recommendations.3. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.4. Installation methods, including nail patterns.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified in this

section with minimum 3 years of experience.1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store products under waterproof cover and elevated above grade, on a flat surface.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 SIDING

A. Lap Siding: Individual horizontal boards made of cement and cellulose fiber formed under highpressure with integral surface texture, complying with ASTM C1186 Type A Grade II; withmachined edges, for nail attachment.1. Style: Standard lap style.2. Texture: Smooth.3. Length: 12 ft, nominal.4. Width (Height): 5-1/4 inches.5. Thickness: 5/16 inch, nominal.6. Finish: Factory applied topcoat.7. Color: As selected by HDJ from manufacturers full range of available colors.8. Warranty: 50 year limited; transferable.9. Lap Siding Manufacturers:

a. James Hardie Building Products, Inc: www.jameshardie.com.b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Panel Siding: Vertically oriented panels made of cement and cellulose fiber formed under highpressure with integral surface texture, complying with ASTM C1186 Type A Grade II; withmachined edges, for nail attachment.1. Texture: Smooth.2. Length (Height): 96 inches, nominal.3. Width: 48 inches.4. Thickness: 5/16 inch, nominal.5. Finish: Factory applied topcoat.6. Color: As selected by HDJ from manufacturers full range of available colors.


07 46 46 - 2FIBER CEMENT SIDING

7. Warranty: 50 year limited; transferable.8. Panel Siding Manufacturers:

a. James Hardie Building Products, Inc: www.jameshardie.com.2.02 ACCESSORIES

A. Trim: Same material and texture as siding.B. Fasteners: Galvanized or corrosion resistant; length as required to penetrate minimum 1-1/4

inch.C. Joint Sealer: As specified in Section 07 90 05.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 PREPARATION

A. Examine substrate and clean and repair as required to eliminate conditions that would bedetrimental to proper installation.

B. Verify that weather barrier has been installed over substrate completely and correctly.C. Do not begin until unacceptable conditions have been corrected.D. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify HDJ of unsatisfactory

preparation before proceeding.3.02 PREPARATION

A. Install sheet metal flashing:1. Above door and window trim and casings.2. Above horizontal trim in field of siding.

3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.

1. Read warranty and comply with all terms necessary to maintain warranty coverage.2. Use trim details indicated on drawings.3. Touch up all field cut edges before installing.4. Pre-drill nail holes if necessary to prevent breakage.

B. Over Wood and Wood-Composite Sheathing: Fasten siding through sheathing into studs.C. Allow space for thermal movement between both ends of siding panels that butt against trim;

seal joint between panel and trim with specified sealant.D. Joints in Horizontal Siding: Avoid joints in lap siding except at corners; where joints are

inevitable stagger joints between successive courses.E. Joints in Vertical Siding: Install Z-flashing in horizontal joints between successive courses of

vertical siding.F. Do not install siding less than 6 inches from surface of ground nor closer than 1 inch to roofs,

patios, porches, and other surfaces where water may collect.G. After installation, seal all joints except lap joints of lap siding. Seal around all penetrations.

Paint all exposed cut edges.3.04 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products until completion of project.B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.



07 62 00 - 1SHEET METAL FLASHING AND

TRIM

SECTION 07 62 00SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM


A. Fabricated sheet metal items, including roof and wall flashing.B. Reglets and accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Wood nailers.B. Section 07 31 13 - Asphalt Shingles: Flashings associated with shingle roofing.C. Section 07 71 23 - Manufactured Gutters and Downspouts.D. Section 07 72 00 - Roof Accessories: Roof-mounted units.E. Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for

Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2013.B. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015.C. ASTM D226/D226M - Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in

Roofing and Waterproofing; 2009.D. ASTM D4586/D4586M - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free; 2007

(Reapproved 2012).E. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; 2012.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTSA. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section.

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods,

flashings, terminations, and installation details.C. Samples: Submit two samples 6x6 inch in size illustrating metal finish color.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual requirements and

standard details, except as otherwise indicated.1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slopemetal sheets to ensure drainage.

B. Prevent contact with materials that could cause discoloration or staining.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 SHEET MATERIALS

A. Pre-Finished Galvanized Steel: ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum0.02 inch thick base metal, shop pre-coated with PVDF coating.1. PVDF (Polyvinylidene Fluoride) Coating: Superior Performance Organic Finish, AAMA

2605; multiple coat, thermally cured fluoropolymer finish system.2. Color: As selected by HDJ from manufacturer's standard colors.

http://www.aamanet.org/general.asp?sect=2&id=45



07 62 00 - 2SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

2.02 ACCESSORIESA. Fasteners: Galvanized steel, with soft neoprene washers.B. Underlayment: ASTM D226/D226M, organic roofing felt, Type I ("No. 15").C. Slip Sheet: Rosin sized building paper.D. Primer: Zinc chromate type.E. Protective Backing Paint: Zinc molybdate alkyd.F. Sealant: Type ____ specified in Section 07 90 05.G. Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586, Type I.

2.03 FABRICATIONA. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects.B. Form pieces in longest possible lengths.C. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners.D. Form material with flat lock seams, except where otherwise indicated. At moving joints, use

sealed lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams.E. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with

sealant.F. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch and hemmed to form drip.


A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set, regletsin place, and nailing strips located.

B. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure.3.02 PREPARATION

A. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation.B. Install surface mounted reglets true to lines and levels. Seal top of reglets with sealant.C. Back paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film

thickness of 15 mil.3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only wherepermitted.

B. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings.C. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines

accurate to profiles.D. Seal metal joints watertight.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for field inspection requirements.B. Inspection will involve surveillance of work during installation to ascertain compliance with

specified requirements.END OF SECTION 07 62 00














































07 71 00 - 1ROOF SPECIALTIES

SECTION 07 71 00ROOF SPECIALTIES


A. Manufactured roof specialties, including copings, fascias, gravel stops, and vents.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 07 7200 - Roof Accessories: Manufactured curbs.B. Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers.


Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2013.B. AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for

Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2013.C. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; 2012.D. SPRI ES-1 - Wind Design Standard for Edge Systems Used with Low Slope Roofing Systems;

2011.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on shape of components, materials and finishes, anchor types and

locations.C. Shop Drawings: Indicate configuration and dimension of components, adjacent construction,

required clearances and tolerances, and other affected work.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA (ASMM) details.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Roof Edge Flashings and Copings:1. Architectural Products Co: www.archprod.com.2. W.P. Hickman Company: www.wph.com.3. Metal-Era Inc: www.metalera.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.02 COMPONENTSA. Roof Edge Flashings: Factory fabricated to sizes required; mitered, welded corners; concealed

fasteners.1. Configuration: Fasciaand edge securement for roof membrane;2. Pull-Off Resistance: Tested in accordance with ANSI/SPRI/FM 4435/ES-1 RE-1 and RE-2

to positive and negative design wind pressure as defined by applicable code.3. Material: Formed aluminum sheet, thickness required by SMACNA inch thick, minimum.4. Finish: 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride.5. Color: HDJ from manufacturer's standard range.

B. Copings: Factory fabricated to sizes required; mitered, welded corners; concealed fasteners.1. Configuration: Concealed continuous hold down cleat at both legs; internal splice piece at

joints of same material, thickness and finish as cap; concealed stainless steel fasteners.2. Pull-Off Resistance: Tested in accordance with ANSI/SPRI/FM 4435/ES-1 RE-3 to

positive and negative design wind pressure as defined by applicable code.3. Material: Formed aluminum sheet, 0.063 inch thick, minimum.


07 71 00 - 2ROOF SPECIALTIES

4. Color: To be selected by HDJ from manufacturer's standard range.C. Pipe and Penetration Flashing: Base of rounded aluminum, compatible with sheet metal roof

systems, and capable of accomodating pipes sized between 0.375 inches and 12 inches.1. Caps: EPDM.

2.03 ACCESSORIESA. Adhesive for Anchoring to Roof Membrane: Compatible with roof membrane and approved by

roof membrane manufacturer.2.04 FINISHES

A. PVDF (Polyvinylidene Fluoride) Coating: Superior Performance Organic Finish, AAMA 2605;multiple coat, thermally cured fluoropolymer finish system; color as scheduled.


A. Verify that deck, curbs, roof membrane, base flashing, and other items affecting work of thisSection are in place and positioned correctly.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Coordinate installation of components of this section with installation of roofing membrane and

base flashings.C. Coordinate installation of sealants and roofing cement with work of this section to ensure water

tightness.D. Coordinate installation of flashing flanges into reglets .



07 71 23 - 1MANUFACTURED GUTTERS

AND DOWNSPOUTS

SECTION 07 71 23MANUFACTURED GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS


A. Pre-finished aluminum gutters and downspouts.B. Precast concrete splash pads.


High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2013.B. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2014.C. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate

[Metric]; 2014.D. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; 2012.

1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTSA. Conform to SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual for sizing components for rainfall

intensity determined by a storm occurrence of 1 in 5 years.B. Conform to applicable code for size and method of rain water discharge.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Shop Drawings: Indicate locations, configurations, jointing methods, fastening methods,

locations, and installation details.C. Product Data: Provide data on prefabricated components.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope to

drain.B. Prevent contact with materials that could cause discoloration, staining, or damage.


A. Pre-Finished Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M); 0.032 inch thick.1. Finish: Plain, shop pre-coated with modified silicone coating.2. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard colors.

2.02 COMPONENTSA. Gutters: CDA rectangular style profile.B. Downspouts: CDA Rectangular profile.C. Anchors and Supports: Profiled to suit gutters and downspouts.

1. Gutter Supports: Brackets.2. Downspout Supports: Brackets.

D. Fasteners: Aluminum, with soft neoprene washers.2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Splash Pads: Precast concrete type, standard size and profile; minimum 3000 psi at 28 days,with minimum 5 percent air entrainment.

2.04 FABRICATIONA. Form gutters and downspouts of profiles and size indicated.


07 71 23 - 2MANUFACTURED GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS

B. Fabricate with required connection pieces.C. Form sections square, true, and accurate in size, in maximum possible lengths, free of

distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance. Allow for expansion at joints.D. Hem exposed edges of metal.E. Fabricate gutter and downspout accessories; seal watertight.

2.05 FACTORY FINISHINGA. Fluoropolymer Coating: High Performance Organic Finish, AAMA 2604; multiple coat, thermally

cured fluoropolymer finish system; color as scheduled.B. Primer Coat: Finish concealed side of metal sheets with primer compatible with finish system,

as recommended by finish system manufacturer.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.B. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Paint concealed metal surfaces and surfaces in contact with dissimilar metals with protective

backing paint to a minimum dry film thickness of 15 mil.3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install gutters, downspouts, and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Sheet Metal: Join lengths with formed seams sealed watertight. Flash and seal gutters to

downspouts and accessories.C. Slope gutters 1/16 inch per foot . Maintain continuous slopes to downspouts as possible.D. Set splash pads under downspouts.



07 72 00 - 1ROOF ACCESSORIES

SECTION 07 72 00ROOF ACCESSORIES

PART 2 PRODUCTSEND OF SECTION 07 72 00


07 84 13 - 1 OPENING AND PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

SECTION 07 84 13 – OPENING AND PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Openings and Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls. 2. Openings and Penetrations in horizontal assemblies. 3. Openings and Penetrations in smoke barriers.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location and design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.

1. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration firestopping manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating penetration firestopping has been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Product test reports.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to comply with its "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements."

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Penetration firestopping shall comply with the following requirements:

1. Penetration firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction .

2. Penetration firestopping is identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in "Penetration Firestopping" Article. Provide rated systems bearing marking of qualified testing and inspection agency.

C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site .



1.5 PROVIDE INFORMATION FOR PROPOSED THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING AS FOLLOWS:

A. Indicate design number or other system designator assigned by Underwriters Laboratory (UL), Factory Mutual Global (FM), Intertek ETLSEMKO, or other testing laboratory acceptable to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction. Submit copies of laboratory illustrations

B. Indicate manufacturer's system designator, if any. Include reference numbers and drawing numbers, if any.

C. Identify the various types of penetrating items (i.e. pipe, vent, conduit, cable tray, etc.) and, for piping, indicate if dry (normally empty) or wet (normally filled) tpe. Include a material description (i.e. metal, plastic, EMT, etc.) and size (length by width or diameter). State whether the penetrating item is externally insulated or not. State whether the penetrating item is combustible or non-combustible.

D. Indicate size limitations for annular space and/or opening and width limitation for joints.

E. Identify the various types of construction being penetrated. Horizontal assemblies include fire resistance-rated floors, floor/ceiling assemblies, and ceiling membranes of roof/ceiling assemblies. Fire-resistance-rated walls include fire walls, fire-barrier walls, shaft enclosure walls, smoke barrier walls, and fire partitions. Smoke barrier walls include smoke-barrier walls and smoke partitions.

1. Worded description of construction may be omitted if Architect’s wall type designator is used (i.e. Wall 3A instead of metal stud & gypsum board).

2. For joints, indicate the types of construction at each side of joint beginning each joint with the following abbreviations:

a. CW for the joint/ void created at the intersection of a fire-resistance rated floor or floor/ceiling assembly and an exterior curtain wall assembly.

b. FF for Floor to Floor joints c. FW for Floor to Wall joints d. HW for Head to Wall joints e. WW for Wall to Wall joints

F. Identify the fire resistance rating of the assembly in minutes if less than one hour or hours if one hour or longer as indicated on the Drawings.

G. System Ratings: Indicate the F-rating, and L-rating when installed and tested in accordance with ASTM E814 and UL 1479.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Grace Construction Products. 2. Hilti, Inc. 3. 3M Fire Protection Products. 4. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group. 5. USG Corporation.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=1074&mf=04&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456799210&mf=04&src=wd







2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

A. Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if any.

B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg.

1. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.

C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg.

1. F-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.

2. T-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall.

D. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per UL 1479.

1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/sq. ft. of penetration opening at 0.30-inch wg at both ambient and elevated temperatures.

E. Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.

F. VOC Content: Penetration firestopping sealants and sealant primers shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

1. Sealants: 250 g/L. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.

G. Low-Emitting Materials: Penetration firestopping sealants and sealant primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

H. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by penetration firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestopping indicated.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.

C. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.

1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestopping.

D. Install fill materials for firestopping by proven techniques to produce the following results:

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.

2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items.

3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify penetration firestopping with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of firestopping edge so labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestopping. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels:

1. The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage."

2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping is damaged or removed because of testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping to comply with requirements.

C. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.







07 92 00 - 1 JOINT SEALANTS

SECTION 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes joint sealants for scheduled applications, including those specified by reference to this section.

1.2 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers four samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants. Use ASTM C 1087 or manufacturer's standard test method to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates.

B. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion to Project joint substrates. Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521.


A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.

B. Samples: For each kind and color of joint sealant required.

C. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:

1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint-sealant formulation. 4. Joint-sealant color.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Product test reports.

B. Preconstruction compatibility and adhesion test reports.

C. Preconstruction field-adhesion test reports.

D. Field-adhesion test reports.

E. Warranties.




A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.

B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which joint-sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing system shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.

B. Low-Emitting Interior Sealants: Sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing system shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

C. Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.

1. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where sealants are indicated for Use I for joints that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1247. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.



E. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600.

2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Mildew-Resistant or Neutral-Curing or Acid-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. BASF Building Systems. b. Dow Corning Corporation. c. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones. d. Pecora Corporation. e. Polymeric Systems, Inc. f. Sika Corporation; Construction Products Division. g. Tremco Incorporated.

2. Type: Single component (S) or multicomponent (M). 3. Grade: Pourable (P) or nonsag (NS). 4. Class: per schedule. 5. Uses Related to Exposure: Traffic (T) or Nontraffic (NT).

2.3 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920.


a. BASF Building Systems. b. Bostik, Inc. c. Pacific Polymers International, Inc. d. Pecora Corporation. e. Polymeric Systems, Inc. f. Sika Corporation; Construction Products Division. g. Tremco Incorporated.

2. Type: Single component (S) or multicomponent (M). 3. Grade: Pourable (P) or nonsag (NS). 4. Class: Per schedule. 5. Uses Related to Exposure: Traffic (T) or Nontraffic (NT).

2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS

A. Latex Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF.


















a. BASF Building Systems. b. Bostik, Inc. c. Pecora Corporation. d. Tremco Incorporated.

2.5 PREFORMED JOINT SEALANTS

A. Preformed Foam Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard preformed, precompressed, open-cell foam sealant manufactured from urethane foam with minimum density of 10 lb/cu. ft. and impregnated with a nondrying, water-repellent agent. Factory produce in precompressed sizes in roll or stick form to fit joint widths indicated; coated on one side with a pressure-sensitive adhesive and covered with protective wrapping.


a. Dayton Superior Specialty Chemicals. b. EMSEAL Joint Systems, Ltd. c. Sandell Manufacturing Co. d. Schul International, Inc. e. Willseal USA, LLC.

2.6 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS

A. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.


a. Pecora Corporation . b. USG Corporation.

2.7 JOINT SEALANT BACKING

A. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin) Type O (open-cell material) Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin) or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.

B. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer.














2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 2. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do

not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

B. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application

and replace them with dry materials.

C. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.



D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow

optimum sealant movement capability.

E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not

discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Acoustical Sealant Installation: Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations.

G. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:

1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows:

a. Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet of joint length for each kind of sealant and joint substrate.

b. Perform 1 test for each 1000 feet of joint length thereafter or 1 test per each floor per elevation.

2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521.

B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements.

3.4 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Refer to Joint Sealant Usage Schedule, Section 07 92 00.13 for areas of application and color selection.



07 92 00.13 - 1 JOINT SEALANT USAGE SCHEDULE

JOINT SEALANT USAGE SCHEDULE

ID No. Exterior Traffic Joints Sealant Chemistry Class Color

E-1 Control and expansion joints in concrete, cast-in-place Silicone 50 Standard

E-2 Control and expansion joints in concrete, cast-in-place, decorative Silicone 50 Custom

E-5 Joints between asphalt paving & walls & other vertical surfaces Silicone 50 Standard

E-6 Joints between concrete paving & walls & other vertical surfaces Silicone 50 Standard

E-7 Joints between decorative concrete paving & walls & other vertical surfaces Silicone 50 Custom

ID No. Exterior Non-Traffic Joints Sealant Chemistry Class Color

E-22 Control and expansion joints in concrete, cast-in-place Silicone 50 Standard

E-23 Control and expansion joints in EIFS systems Silicone 50 Custom

E-24 Control and expansion joints in stone; cast, cut and dimension Silicone 50 Custom

E-26 Control and expansion joints in unit masonry, clay Silicone 50 Custom

E-31 Joints between metal flashings, concealed lapped joints Butyl 7½ Standard

E-32 Joints between metal flashings, exposed, prefinished Silicone 50 Custom

E-33 Joints between metal flashings, exposed, unfinished Silicone 50 Standard

E-34 Joints between metal panels, prefinished Silicone 50 Custom

E-37 Perimeter joints around frames, metal, field painted Urethane 25 Standard

E-38 Perimeter joints around frames, metal clad wood, prefinished Silicone 50 Custom

E-39 Perimeter joints around frames, metal, prefinished Silicone 50 Custom

E-40 Setting bed for flashing receivers Butyl 7½ Standard

E-41 Setting bed for thresholds & sills Butyl 7½ Standard

E-42 Setting bed for metal flashing, metal frames, and wood frames Butyl 7½ Standard

ID No. Interior Traffic Joints Sealant Chemistry Class Color

I-2 Control and expansion joints in concrete slabs, concealed None required N/A N/A

I-3 Control and expansion joints in concrete slabs, exposed Urethane 25 Standard

I-6 Control and expansion joints in resinous flooring Urethane 25 Custom

I-9 Control and expansion joints in tile in toilet rooms and kitchens MR silicone 25 Custom


07 92 00.13 - 2 JOINT SEALANT USAGE SCHEDULE

I-10 Control and expansion joints in tile not in toilet rooms and kitchens Urethane 25 Custom

ID No. Interior Non-Traffic Joints Sealant Chemistry Class Color

I-22 Control and expansion joints in tile in toilet rooms and kitchens MR silicone 25 Custom

I-23 Control and expansion joints in tile not in toilet rooms and kitchens Urethane 25 Custom

I-29 Control joints in acoustic walls and partitions including gaps Acoustic latex Min Standard

I-30 Control joints in gypsum board ceilings and partitions Acrylic 7½ Standard

I-32 Joints between gypsum shaftwall panels and penetrations and adjacent surfaces Acoustic latex Min Standard

I-33 Joints between tile backing panels and penetrations MR silicone 25 White

I-34 Joints between woodwork, painted and adjacent surfaces Acrylic or latex 0 Standard

I-35 Joints between woodwork, transparent finished and adjacent surfaces Silicone 50 Custom

I-36 Joints between plumbing fixtures & adjacent walls, floors, & counters MR silicone 25 White

I-37 Joints in and between FRP panels and adjacent surfaces Silicone 50 Custom

I-38 Joints in and between plastic laminate and adjacent surfaces Silicone 50 Custom

I-41 Perimeter joints around frames, metal, field painted Latex 0 Standard

I-42 Perimeter joints around frames, metal, prefinished Silicone 50 Custom

I-43 Perimeter joints around frames, wood, painted finish Acrylic or latex 0 Standard

I-44 Perimeter joints around frames, wood, transparent finish Silicone 50 Custom

ID No. Glazing Sealants Sealant Chemistry Class Color

G-4 Hollow metal frames to glass, cap bead Silicone -neutral 50 Custom

G-6 Butt joints between unframed glass edges Silicone -neutral 50 Clear

Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: Standard Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range for this characteristic. Custom Color: Provide a custom color matching Architect's sample that complies with requirements.


07 92 00.14 - 1 JOINT SEALANT PRODUCTS SCHEDULE

JOINT SEALANT PRODUCTS SCHEDULE

EXPOSURE

USES JOINT SIZE

MANUFACTURER PRODUCT CHEMISTRY CURE MODULUS TYPE GRADE CLASS T NT I M G A O MIN MA x

Tremco Mono 555 Acrylic Solvent --- S NS 7 -- NT -- -- -- -- -- -- --

Pecora BC-158 Butyl Solvent --- S NS 7 -- NT -- -- -- -- -- -- --

Sonneborn Multi-Purpose Butyl Solvent --- S NS 7 -- NT -- -- -- -- -- -- --

Tremco Tremco Butyl Butyl Solvent --- S NS 7 -- NT -- -- -- -- -- -- --

Pecora AC-20+ Latex --- --- S NS 0 -- NT -- -- -- -- -- -- --

Sonneborn Sonolac Latex --- --- S NS 0 -- NT -- -- -- -- -- -- --

Tremco Tremflex 834 Latex --- --- S NS 0 -- NT -- -- -- -- -- -- --

Pecora AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant Acoustical Latex --- --- S NS Min -- NT -- -- -- -- -- -- --

Specified Technologies SpecSeal Smoke and Sound Sealant Acoustical Latex --- --- S NS Min -- NT -- -- -- -- -- -- --

USG SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant Acoustical Latex --- --- S NS Min -- NT -- -- -- -- -- -- --

Dow Corning 786 Mildew Resistant MR Silicone Acid High S NS 25 -- NT -- -- G A O 1/8 x 1/8 1

GE Silicones Sanitary SCS1700 MR Silicone Acid High S NS 25 -- NT -- -- G A O 1/4 x 1/4 1 x 3/8

Tremco Tremsil 200 MR Silicone Acid Medium S NS 25 -- NT -- -- G A -- 1/4 x 1/4 1 x 1/2

Tremco Tremsil 600 Silicone Neutral Medium S NS 25 -- NT -- -- G A O 1/4 x 1/4 1 x 1/2

Pecora 898 MR Silicone Neutral Medium S NS 50 -- NT -- M G A O 1/8 x 1/8 1 x 3/8

Serious Materials, Inc. QuietSeal Acoustical Rubber --- --- S NS Min -- NT -- -- -- -- -- -- --

Tremco Tremco Acoustical Sealant Acoustical Rubber --- --- S NS Min -- NT -- -- -- -- -- -- --

Tremco Spectrem 1 Silicone Basic Low S NS 100/50 -- NT -- M G A O 1/4 x 1/4 1 x 1/2

Dow Corning 995 Silicone Neutral Medium S NS 50 -- NT -- -- G A O 1/4 x 1/4 1 x 3/8

Dow Corning 756 SMS Silicone Neutral Medium S NS 100/50 -- NT -- M G A O 1/4 x 1/4 2 x 1/2

Tremco Spectrem 4TS Silicone Neutral Low M NS 50 -- NT -- M G A O 1/4 x 1/4 ---

GE Silicones SilPruf LM SCS2700 Silicone Neutral Low S NS 100/50 -- NT -- M G A O 1/4 x 1/4 2 x 3/8

Pecora Dynatrol I-XL Urethane --- --- S NS 25 -- NT -- M G A O 1/4 x 1/4 1-1/2 x

1/2

Pecora Urexpan NR-201 Urethane --- --- S P 25 T -- -- M -- A O 1/4 x 1/4 1 x 1/2


07 92 00.14 - 2 JOINT SEALANT PRODUCTS SCHEDULE

EXPOSUR

E

USE

S JOINT

SIZE

Sika Sikaflex -1a Urethane --- --- S NS 25 T NT -- M G A O 1/4 x 1/4 2 x 1/2

Sika Sikaflex -1CSL Urethane --- --- S P 25 T NT -- M -- -- O 1/4 x 1/4 2 x 1/2

Sonneborn NP 1 Urethane --- --- S NS 25 T NT -- M G A O 1/4 x 1/4 2 x 1/2

Sonneborn SL 1 Urethane --- --- S P 25 T NT -- M G A O 1/4 x 5/8 2 x 1/2

Sonneborn Ultra Urethane --- --- S NS 25 T NT -- M G A O 1/4 x 1/4 1 x 1/2

Pecora Dynatrol II Urethane --- --- M NS 50 -- NT -- M G A O 1/4 x 1/4 2 x 1/2

Tremco Vulkem Nova 300 SSL Urethane --- --- S P 50 T NT I M -- A O 1/4 x 1/4 2 x 1/2

DEFINITIONS Type: S = Single Component; M = Multiple Component Grade: NS = Non-Sag; P = Pourable or Self-Leveling Class: Numerical values represent percent elongation/compression capability; "Min" implies "minimal" Exposure: T = Traffic; NT = Non-Traffic; I = Immersion Service Uses: M = Mortar; G = Glass; A = Aluminum; O = Other


08 11 13 - 1HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND

FRAMES

SECTION 08 11 13HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES


A. Non-fire-rated steel doors and frames.B. Steel frames for wood doors.C. Fire-rated steel frames.D. Thermally insulated steel doors.E. Steel glazing frames.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware.B. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing: Glass for doors and borrowed lites.C. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Field painting.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010.B. ANSI/ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and

Facilities; International Code Council; 2009.C. ANSI/SDI A250.8 - Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames (SDI-100); 2014.D. ANSI/SDI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces

for Steel Doors and Frames; 2011.E. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015.F. ASTM C1363 - Standard Test Method for Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies by

Means of a Hot Box Apparatus; 2011.G. BHMA A156.115 - American National Standard for Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and

Steel Frames; 2014.H. ICC A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; 2009.I. NAAMM HMMA 840 - Guide Specifications for Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors

and Frames; 2007.J. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2016.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations,

reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes; and onecopy of referenced grade standard.

C. Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glazing, frame profiles, andidentifying location of different finishes, if any.

D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certification that products meet or exceed specified requirements.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified inthis section with minimum three years documented experience.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Store in accordance with NAAMM HMMA 840.


08 11 13 - 2HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

B. Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent corrosion.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Steel Doors and Frames:1. Assa Abloy Curries: www.assaabloydss.com.2. Republic Doors: www.republicdoor.com.3. Steelcraft, an Allegion brand: www.allegion.com/us.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.02 DOORS AND FRAMESA. Requirements for All Doors and Frames:

1. Accessibility: Comply with ICC A117.1 and ADA Standards.2. Door Top Closures: Flush with top of faces and edges.3. Door Edge Profile: Beveled on both edges.4. Door Texture: Smooth faces.5. Hardware Preparation: In accordance with BHMA A156.115, with reinforcement welded in

place, in addition to other requirements specified in door grade standard.6. Galvanizing for Units in Wet Areas: Components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated

(galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with manufacturer's standardcoating thickness

7. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing.B. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more

than one type of requirement, comply with all the specified requirements for each type; forinstance, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound-rated must comply with therequirements specified for exterior doors and for sound-rated doors; where two requirementsconflict, comply with the most stringent.

2.03 STEEL DOORSA. Exterior Doors:

1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 - SDI-100; Level 1 - Standard-Duty, Physical Performance Level C,Model 1 - Full Flush.

2. Core: Polystyrene.3. Galvanizing: Components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in accordance

with ASTM A653/A653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness.4. Insulating Value: U-value of 0.50, when tested in accordance with ASTM C1363.

B. Interior Doors, Non-Fire-Rated:1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 - SDI-100; Level 1 - Standard-Duty, Physical Performance Level C,

Model 1 - Full Flush.2. Core: Kraftpaper honeycomb.3. Thickness: 1-3/4 inch.

2.04 STEEL FRAMESA. General:

1. Comply with the requirements of grade specified for corresponding door.a. ANSI A250.8 Level 2 Doors: 16 gage frames.b. ANSI A250.8 - SDI-100, Level 2 and 3 Door Frames: 14 gage, 0.067 inch, minimum

thickness.c. Frames for Wood Doors: Comply with frame requirements specified in ANSI A250.8 -

SDI-100, Level 1, 18 gage, 0.042 inch2. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing.3. Provide mortar guard boxes for hardware cut-outs in frames to be installed in masonry or

to be grouted.


08 11 13 - 3HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND

FRAMES

4. Frames in Masonry Walls: Size to suit masonry coursing with head member 4 inches highto fill opening without cutting masonry units.

5. Frames Wider than 48 Inches: Reinforce with steel channel fitted tightly into frame head,flush with top.

6. Frames Installed Back-to-Back: Reinforce with steel channels anchored to floor andoverhead structure.

B. Exterior Door Frames: Face welded, seamless with joints filled.1. Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in

accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with A40/ZF 120 coating.with manufacturer'sstandard coating thickness.

2. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08 71 00.C. Interior Door Frames, Non-Fire-Rated: Knockdown type.D. Interior Door Frames, Fire-Rated: Knockdown type.

1. Fire Rating: Same as door, labeled.E. Frames for Interior Glazing or Borrowed Lights: Construction and face dimensions to match

door frames, and as indicated on drawings.2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Glazing: As specified in Section 08 80 00, factory installed.B. Removable Stops: Formed sheet steel, shape as indicated on drawings, mitered or butted

corners; prepared for countersink style tamper proof screws.C. Astragals for Double Doors: Specified in Section 08 71 00.D. Grout for Frames: Portland cement grout of maximum 4-inch slump for hand troweling; thinner

pumpable grout is prohibited.E. Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole; 3 on strike side of single door, 3 on center

mullion of pairs, and 2 on head of pairs without center mullions.F. Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for all factory- or shop-assembled frames.

2.06 FINISH MATERIALSA. Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard.B. Bituminous Coating: Asphalt emulsion or other high-build, water-resistant, resilient coating.


A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.C. Verify that finished walls are in plane to ensure proper door alignment.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Coat inside of frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted, with bituminous coating, prior

to installation.3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with the requirements of the specified door grade standard and NAAMMHMMA 840.

B. In addition, install fire rated units in accordance with NFPA 80.C. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction.D. Grout frames in masonry construction, using hand trowel methods; brace frames so that

pressure of grout before setting will not deform frames.E. Coordinate installation of hardware.


08 11 13 - 4HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

F. Coordinate installation of glazing.G. Coordinate installation of electrical connections to electrical hardware items.H. Touch up damaged factory finishes.

3.04 TOLERANCESA. Clearances Between Door and Frame: As specified in ANSI A250.8 - SDI-100.B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 in measured with straight edge, corner to corner.

3.05 ADJUSTINGA. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement.



08 14 16 - 1FLUSH WOOD DOORS

SECTION 08 14 16FLUSH WOOD DOORS


A. Flush wood doors; flush configuration; fire rated and non-rated.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.B. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware.C. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2014.B. MBC (Michigan Building Code); 2009C. NFPA 105 - Standard for Smoke Door Assemblies and Other Opening Protectives; 2016.D. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; 2012.E. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.F. UL 10B - Standard for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.G. WDMA I.S. 1A - Interior Architectural Wood Flush Doors; 2013.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and

characteristics.C. Shop Drawings: Show doors and frames, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts, beveling,

blocking for hardware, factory machining, factory finishing, cutouts for glazing and other details.1. Include certification program label.

D. Specimen warranty.E. Samples: Submit two samples of door veneer, 8" x 8" inch in size illustrating wood grain, stain

color, and sheen.F. Warranty, executed in Genral Capital's name.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in

this section with minimum three years of documented experience.1. Accredited participant in the specified certification program prior to the commencement of

fabrication and throughout the duration of the project.B. Installed Fire Rated Door and Transom Panel Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated

class as indicated.1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Package, deliver and store doors in accordance with specified quality standard.B. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage.C. Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Do not store in damp or

wet areas; or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges withtinted sealer if stored more than one week. Break seal on site to permit ventilation.

1.07 WARRANTYA. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.



B. Interior Doors: Provide manufacturer's warranty for the life of the installation.C. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances,

defective materials, and telegraphing core construction.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Molded High Density Fiberboard Faced Doors:1. Lynden Door: www.lyndendoor.com2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.02 DOORS AND PANELSA. All Doors: See drawings for locations and additional requirements.

1. Quality Level: Premium Grade, Standard Duty performance, in accordance withAWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS).

B. Interior Doors: 1-3/4 inches thick unless otherwise indicated; flush construction.1. Provide 1-3/4 inch solid core doors at all common area and unit entry door locations.2. Provide 1-3/8 inch thick hollow core doors at all locations in Apartment Living Units.3. Fire Rated Doors: Tested to ratings indicated on drawings in accordance with NFPA 252

or UL 10B - Negative (Neutral) Pressure; Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) orIntertek/Warnock Hersey (WHI) labeled without any visible seals when door is open.

4. Molded High Density Fiberboard facing with factory opaque finish.a. Wood grain finish.b. Flush faced panels.

2.03 DOOR CORESA. Non-Rated Solid Core and 20 Minute Rated Doors: Type particleboard core (PC), plies and

faces as indicated.B. Fire Rated Doors: Mineral core type, with fire resistant composite core (FD), plies and faces as

indicated above; with core blocking as required to provide adequate anchorage of hardwarewithout through-bolting.

C. Hollow Core Doors: Type Factory Standard; plies and faces as indicated.2.04 DOOR FACINGS

A. Molded high density fiberboard: Manufacturer's Standard.B. Facing Adhesive: Manufacturer's Standard.

2.05 ACCESSORIESA. Glazing Stops: Wood, of same species as door facing, mitered corners; prepared for

countersink style screws.2.06 DOOR CONSTRUCTION

A. Fabricate doors in accordance with door quality standard specified.B. Cores Constructed with stiles and rails:

1. Provide solid blocks at lock edge for hardware reinforcement.2. Provide solid blocking for other throughbolted hardware.

C. Where supplementary protective edge trim is required, install trim after veneer facing has beenapplied full-width.

D. Glazed Openings: Non-removable stops on non-secure side; sizes and configurations asindicated on drawings.

E. Factory machine doors for hardware other than surface-mounted hardware, in accordance withhardware requirements and dimensions.



F. Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings, with edgeclearances in accordance with specified quality standard.1. Exception: Doors to be field finished.

G. Provide edge clearances in accordance with the quality standard specified.2.07 FACTORY FINISHING - WOOD VENEER DOORS

A. Finish work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS), Section 5:B. Factory finish doors in accordance with approved sample.C. Seal door top edge with color sealer to match door facing.


A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for size or

alignment.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and specified quality standard.1. Install fire-rated doors in accordance with NFPA 80 requirements.2. Install smoke and draft control doors in accordance with NFPA 105 requirements.

B. Factory-Finished Doors: Do not field cut or trim; if fit or clearance is not correct, replace door.C. Field-Finished Doors: Trimming to fit is acceptable.

1. Adjust width of non-rated doors by cutting equally on both jamb edges.2. Trim maximum of 3/4 inch off bottom edges.3. Trim fire-rated doors in strict compliance with fire rating limitations.

D. Use machine tools to cut or drill for hardware.E. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware.F. Coordinate installation of glazing.

3.03 TOLERANCESA. Conform to specified quality standard for fit and clearance tolerances.B. Conform to specified quality standard for telegraphing, warp, and squareness.

3.04 ADJUSTINGA. Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement.B. Adjust closers for full closure.

3.05 SCHEDULE - SEE DRAWINGSA. See Door Hardware Section 08 71 00 for Hardware sets and General Requirements.



08 32 00 - 1SLIDING GLASS DOORS

SECTION 08 32 00SLIDING GLASS DOORS


A. Factory fabricated sliding glazed doors with frames and operating hardware.B. Insect screens.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Rough opening framing.B. Section 07 21 00 - Thermal Insulation: Fibrous stuffing insulation at door frame perimeter.C. Section 07 25 00 - Weather Barriers: Perimeter air and vapor seal between sliding door frame

and adjacent construction.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 - North American Fenestration Standard/Specification forwindows, doors, and skylights; 2011.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions.C. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening dimensions, elevations of different types, and framed opening

tolerances.D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include complete preparation, installation, and cleaning

requirements.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in fabrication of residentialsliding doors with not fewer than three years of experience.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Deliver products to project site and store in manufacturer's protective cartons until openings are

ready for door installation.1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F.B. Maintain this minimum temperature during and 24 hours after installation of sealants.

1.08 WARRANTYA. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.C. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against failure of glass seal on insulating glass units,

including interpane dusting or misting. Include provision for replacement of failed units.D. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against excessive degradation of exterior finish.

Include provision for replacement of units with excessive fading, chalking, or flaking.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Plastic Sliding Doors:1. Match Vinyl Windows2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.



2.02 SLIDING GLASS DOORSA. Sliding Glass Doors: Extruded PVC or Vinyl unit frame and operable panel frame, factory

fabricated, factory glazed; complete with integral sloped sill/threshold, flashings, and anchoragedevices.1. Configuration: One fixed panel and one horizontal sliding panel.2. Frame Depth: 6 inches, minimum.3. Color: White.4. PVC Members: Multiple chambered hollow sections; ultra-violet resistant polyvinyl chloride

(PVC) with integral color and heat-welded joints; bracket or spline corner joinery.5. Drainage: Provide drainage to exterior for moisture entering glazing rabbet.6. Glass Stops: Same material and color as frame, sloped for wash.

B. Construction: Factory assemble door frame as one unit, including head jambs, and sill; factoryassembly operating and fixed panels.1. Sizes: Allow for tolerances of rough framed openings, clearances, and shims around

perimeter of assemblies.2. Joints and Connections: Flush, hairline width, and waterproof; accurately and rigidly joined

corners.3. Sills: One piece, sloped to drain, with integral roller track.4. Provide insect screen for each operable panel; finish frame same as door unless otherwise

indicated.C. Performance Requirements: Provide products that comply with the following:

1. Grade: AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 Class R Performance Grade 15.2. Grade Substantiation: Either AAMA Certification Label or independent test report itemizing

compliance will constitute acceptable evidence of compliance.2.03 COMPONENTS

A. Glazing: Double glazed, clear, low-E coated, argon filled, fully tempered, with glass thicknessesas recommended by manufacturer for specified wind conditions.

B. Insect Screens: Extruded aluminum frame with mitered and reinforced corners; screen meshtaut and secure to frame; adjustable spring-loaded top and bottom rollers; screen removablewithout use of tools; high-transparency vinyl-coated fiberglass screen mesh.

2.04 HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIESA. Pull Handles: Manufacturer's standard type.B. Sliding Panel Bottom Rollers: Stainless steel, adjustable from interior.C. Limit Stops: Resilient rubber.D. Anchors: Hot-dipped galvanized or stainless steel.


A. Verify that openings are ready to receive work and opening dimensions and clearances are asindicated on shop drawings.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Prepare opening to permit correct installation of door unit in conjunction with air and vapor seal.

3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Install door unit assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Attach frame and shims to perimeter opening to accommodate construction tolerances and

other irregularities.C. Use anchorage devices to securely fasten sliding door assembly to wall construction without

distortion or imposed stresses.



D. Install perimeter foam insulation and sealant. Double bead sealant, interior and exteriorsurfaces.

E. Place threshold in bed of butyl sealant.3.04 TOLERANCES

A. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work.B. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/16 inch.C. Maximum Variation from Level: 1/16 inch.D. Longitudinal or Diagonal Warp: Plus or minus 1/8 inch from 10 foot straight edge.

3.05 ADJUSTINGA. Adjust hardware for smooth operation.

3.06 CLEANINGA. Remove protective material from factory finished surfaces.B. Remove labels and visible markings.C. Wash surfaces by method recommended and acceptable to sealant and window manufacturer;

rinse and wipe surfaces clean.D. Remove excess sealant by moderate use of mineral spirits or other solvent acceptable to

sealant manufacturer.3.07 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products from damage during subsequent construction activities.END OF SECTION 08 32 00


08 53 13 - 1VINYL WINDOWS

SECTION 08 53 13VINYL WINDOWS


A. Energy Star qualified, Vinyl-framed, factory-glazed windows and matching doors.B. Operating hardware.C. Insect screens.D. Perimeter sealant.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 - North American Fenestration Standard/Specification for

windows, doors, and skylights; 2011.B. ASTM E1105 - Standard Test Method for Field Determination of Water Penetration of Installed

Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls, by Uniform or Cyclic Static Air PressureDifference; 2015.

1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTSA. Energy Star rated vinyl windows and doors.

1. U Value of 0.33 or lower2. SHGC of 0.33 or lower

1.05 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTSA. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week week before starting work of this section.

1.06 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, anchorage and fasteners, glass, internal

drainage details.C. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening dimensions, framed opening tolerances, affected related

work, installation requirements.1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in thissection, with not less than three years of documented experience.

1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Protect finished surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings that

bond when exposed to sunlight or weather.B. Jig, brace, and box the window frame assemblies for transport to minimize flexing of members

or joints.1.09 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F.B. Maintain this minimum temperature during and after installation of sealants.

1.10 WARRANTYA. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.C. Provide ten year manufacturer warranty for insulated glass units from seal failure, interpane

dusting or misting, and replacement of same. Include coverage for degradation of color finish.



PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Vinyl Windows:1. MI Window www.miwd.com2. Or similar Michigan based window supplier.3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.02 VINYL WINDOWSA. Vinyl Windows: Factory fabricated frame and sash members of extruded hollow

ultra-violet-resistant polyvinyl chloride (PVC) with integral color; with factory-installed glazing,hardware, related flashings, and anchorage and attachment devices.1. Configuration: As indicated on drawings, with single hung sash.2. Integral J-Channel: Provide integral j-channel around perimeter of all vinyl windows,

compatible with vinyl siding.3. Sliding Glass Doors: Match window frame style and color.4. Color: White.5. Size to fit openings with minimum clearance around perimeter of assembly but still

providing adequate space for perimeter seals.6. Framing Members: Fusion welded corners and joints, with internal reinforcement where

required for structural rigidity; concealed fasteners.7. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any

water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, or migrating moistureoccurring within system.

8. Glazing Stops, Trim, Flashings, and Accessory Pieces: Formed of extruded PVC, fittingtightly into frame assembly.

9. Nailing Flange: Integral to frame assembly, providing weather stop around entire unit.10. Insect Screens: Located on outside of windows.

B. Performance Requirements: Provide products that comply with the following:1. Grade: AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 Class R Performance Grade 15.2. Grade Substantiation: Either AAMA Certification Label or independent test report itemizing

compliance will constitute acceptable evidence of compliance.3. Overall U-value, Including Glazing: 0.29, maximum, measured on the window size required

for this project.4. Overall SHGC, including Glazing: 0.30, maximum.

2.03 COMPONENTSA. Glazing: Double glazed, clear, low-E coated, argon filled, with glass thicknesses as

recommended by manufacturer for specified wind conditions.B. Windows: Extruded, hollow, tubular, ultra-violet resistant polyvinyl chloride (PVC) with integral

color; factory fabricated; with vision glass, related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices.C. Insect Screens: Extruded aluminum frame with mitered and reinforced corners; screen mesh

taut and secure to frame; secured to window with adjustable hardware allowing screen removalwithout use of tools.1. Hardware: Spring loaded steel pins; four per screen unit.2. Screen Mesh: Vinyl-coated fiberglass, window manufacturer's standard mesh.3. Frame Finish: Baked enamel, color to match window interior color.

D. Insect Screen Frame: Rolled aluminum frame of rectangular sections; fit with adjustablehardware; nominal size similar to operable glazed unit.

E. Insect Screens: 14/18 mesh, steel strands.1. Color: Black.

F. Operable Sash Weatherstripping: Wool pile; permanently resilient, profiled to effect weatherseal.



G. Fasteners: Stainless steel.2.04 GLASS AND GLAZING MATERIALS

A. Glass and Glazing Materials: As specified in Section 08 80 00 of Types described below:1. Glass in Exterior Lights: Clear Insulated Type.

2.05 SEALANT MATERIALSA. Perimeter Sealant and Backing Materials: Minimally Expanding Foamed in Place Type as

specified in Section 07 90 05.2.06 HARDWARE

A. Double Hung Sash at Second Level Units: Metal and nylon spiral friction slide cylinder, eachsash, each jamb. Provide Fall Protection opening stops on bottom sash, to minimize opening to4" high. Top sash shall remain operable for ventilation.

B. Single Hung Sash at Ground Level Units: Metal and nylon spiral friction slide cylinder, operablesash, each jamb.

C. Sash lock: Lever handle with cam lock.1. Comply UFAS and ADA accessibilty guidelines for reachable hardware and force required

to operate.D. Finish For Exposed Hardware: White baked enamel.

2.07 FABRICATIONA. Fabricate framing, mullions and sash members with fusion welded corners and joints, in a rigid

jig. Supplement frame sections with internal reinforcement where required for structural rigidity.B. Form snap-in glass stops, closure molds, weather stops, and flashings of extruded PVC for tight

fit into window frame section.C. Form weather stop flange to perimeter of unit.D. Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of

assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal.E. Arrange fasteners to be concealed from view.F. Permit internal drainage weep holes and channels to migrate moisture to exterior. Provide

internal drainage of glazing spaces to exterior through weep holes.G. Assemble insect screen frame, miter and reinforced frame corners. Fit mesh taut into frame

and secure. Fit frame with four spring loaded steel pin retainers.H. Double weatherstrip operable units.I. Factory glaze window units.


A. Verify wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of thisSection.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install window units in accordance with manufacturers instructions.B. Attach window frame and shims to perimeter opening to accommodate construction tolerances

and other irregularities.C. Align window plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain dimensional tolerances and

alignment with adjacent work.D. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. Foam in

place insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermalbarrier.



E. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials.F. Install operating hardware.G. Install perimeter sealant and backing materials in accordance with Section 07 90 05.

3.03 TOLERANCESA. Maximum Variation from Level or Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft non-cumulative or 0.5 inches

per 100 ft, whichever is less.3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Test installed windows for compliance with performance requirements for water penetration, inaccordance with ASTM E1105 using uniform pressure and same pressure difference asspecified for laboratory tests.1. Test 5 percent of installed windows.2. If any window fails, test additional windows at Oakwood Construction's expense.

B. Replace windows that have failed field testing and retest until performance is satisfactory.3.05 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and secure weathertight closure.3.06 CLEANING

A. Remove protective material from pre-finished surfaces.B. Wash surfaces by method recommended and acceptable to sealant and window manufacturer;

rinse and wipe surfaces clean.C. Remove excess sealant by moderate use of mineral spirits or other solvent acceptable to

sealant manufacturer.END OF SECTION 08 53 13


09 05 61 - 1COMMON WORK RESULTS

FOR FLOORING PREPARATION

SECTION 09 05 61COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING PREPARATION


A. This section applies to all floors identified in the contract documents as to receive the followingtypes of floor coverings:1. Resilient tile and sheet.2. Broadloom carpet.

B. Removal of existing floor coverings.C. Preparation of new and existing concrete floor slabs for installation of floor coverings.D. Testing of concrete floor slabs for moisture and pH.E. Remediation of concrete floor slabs due to unsatisfactory moisture or pH conditions.

1. Oakwood Construction shall perform all specified remediation of concrete floor slabs. Ifsuch remediation is indicated by testing agency's report and is due to a condition not underOakwood Construction's control or could not have been predicted by examination prior toentering into the contract, a contract modification will be issued.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Handling of existing floor

coverings removed.B. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Limitations on curing requirements for new

concrete floor slabs.1.03 REFERENCES

A. ASTM C109/C109M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic CementMortars (Using 2-in. or (50-mm) Cube Specimens); 2013.

B. ASTM C472 - Standard Test Methods for Physical Testing of Gypsum, Gypsum Plasters andGypsum Concrete; 1999 (Reapproved 2014).

C. ASTM F710 - Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring;2011.

D. ASTM F1869 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of ConcreteSubfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride; 2011.

E. ASTM F2170 - Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete FloorSlabs Using in situ Probes; 2011.

F. RFCI (RWP) - Recommended Work Practices for Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings;Resilient Floor Covering Institute; October 2011.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTSA. Coordinate scheduling of cleaning and testing, so that preliminary cleaning has been completed

for at least 24 hours prior to testing.1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Visual Observation Report: For existing floor coverings to be removed.B. Floor Covering and Adhesive Manufacturers' Product Literature: For each specific combination

of substrate, floor covering, and adhesive to be used; showing:1. Moisture and pH limits and test methods.2. Manufacturer's required bond/compatibility test procedure.

C. Testing Agency's Report: Include:1. Description of areas tested; include floor plans and photographs if helpful.2. Summary of conditions encountered.


09 05 61 - 2COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING PREPARATION

3. Moisture and pH test reports.4. Copies of specified test methods.5. Recommendations for remediation of unsatisfactory surfaces.6. Submit report directly to Genral Capital.7. Submit report not more than two business days after conclusion of testing.

D. Adhesive Bond and Compatibility Test Report.E. Copy of RFCI Recommended Work Practices for Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Moisture and pH testing will be performed by an independent testing agency employed and paid

by Genral Capital.B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Independent testing agency experienced in the types of testing

specified.1. Submit evidence of experience consisting of at least 3 test reports of the type required,

with project Owner's project contact information.C. Oakwood Construction's Responsibility Relating to Independent Agency Testing:

1. Provide access for and cooperate with testing agency.2. Confirm date of start of testing at least 10 days prior to actual start.3. Allow at least 4 business days on site for testing agency activities.4. Achieve and maintain specified ambient conditions.5. Notify Genral Capital when specified ambient conditions have been achieved and when

testing will start.1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Maintain ambient temperature in spaces where concrete testing is being performed, and for atleast 48 hours prior to testing, at not less than 65 degrees F or more than 85 degrees F.

B. Maintain relative humidity in spaces where concrete testing is being performed, and for at least48 hours prior to testing, at not less than 40 percent and not more than 60 percent.


A. Patching Compound: Floor covering manufacturer's recommended product, suitable forconditions, and compatible with adhesive and floor covering. In the absence of anyrecommendation from flooring manufacturer, provide a product with the followingcharacteristics:1. Cementitious moisture-, mildew-, and alkali-resistant compound, compatible with floor,

floor covering, and floor covering adhesive, and capable of being feathered to nothing atedges.

2. Latex or polyvinyl acetate additions are permitted; gypsum content is prohibited.3. Compressive Strength: 3000 psi, minimum, after 28 days, when tested in accordance with

ASTM C109/C109M or ASTM C472, whichever is appropriate.B. Alternate Flooring Adhesive: Floor covering manufacturer's recommended product, suitable for

the moisture and pH conditions present; low-VOC. In the absence of any recommendation fromflooring manufacturer, provide a product recommended by adhesive manufacturer as suitablefor substrate and floor covering and for conditions present.

C. Remedial Floor Coating: Single- or multi-layer coating or coating/overlay combination intendedby its manufacturer to resist water vapor transmission to degree sufficient to meet flooringmanufacturer's emission limits, resistant to the level of pH found, and suitable for adhesion offlooring without further treatment.1. Thickness: 1/8 inch, maximum.2. If testing agency recommends any particular products, use one of those.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20C109/C109M












09 05 61 - 3 COMMON WORK RESULTSFOR FLOORING PREPARATION

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 CONCRETE SLAB PREPARATION

A. Perform following operations in the order indicated:1. Existing concrete slabs (on-grade and elevated) with existing floor coverings:

a. Visual observation of existing floor covering, for adhesion, water damage, alkalinedeposits, and other defects.

b. Removal of existing floor covering.2. Existing concrete slabs with coatings or penetrating sealers/hardeners/dustproofers:

a. Do not attempt to remove coating or penetrating material.b. Do not abrade surface.

3. Preliminary cleaning.4. Moisture vapor emission tests; 3 tests in the first 1000 square feet and one test in each

additional 1000 square feet, unless otherwise indicated or required by flooringmanufacturer.

5. Internal relative humidity tests; in same locations as moisture vapor emission tests, unlessotherwise indicated.

6. pH tests; in same locations as moisture vapor emission tests, unless otherwise indicated.7. Specified remediation, if required.8. Patching, smoothing, and leveling, as required.9. Other preparation specified.10. Adhesive bond and compatibility test.11. Protection.

B. Remediations:1. Active Water Leaks or Continuing Moisture Migration to Surface of Slab: Correct this

condition before doing any other remediation; re-test after correction.2. Excessive Moisture Emission or Relative Humidity: If an adhesive that is resistant to the

level of moisture present is available and acceptable to flooring manufacturer, use thatadhesive for installation of the flooring; if not, apply remedial floor coating over entiresuspect floor area.

3. Excessive pH: If remedial floor coating is necessary to address excessive moisture, noadditional remediation is required; if not, if an adhesive that is resistant to the level presentis available and acceptable to the flooring manufacturer, use that adhesive for installationof the flooring; otherwise, apply a skim coat of specified patching compound over entiresuspect floor area.

3.02 REMOVAL OF EXISTING FLOOR COVERINGSA. Comply with local, State, and federal regulations and recommendations of RFCI Recommended

Work Practices for Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings, as applicable to floor covering beingremoved.

B. Dispose of removed materials in accordance with local, State, and federal regulations and asspecified.

3.03 PRELIMINARY CLEANINGA. Clean floors of dust, solvents, paint, wax, oil, grease, asphalt, residual adhesive, adhesive

removers, film-forming curing compounds, sealing compounds, alkaline salts, excessivelaitance, mold, mildew, and other materials that might prevent adhesive bond.

B. Do not use solvents or other chemicals for cleaning.3.04 MOISTURE VAPOR EMISSION TESTING

A. Where the floor covering manufacturer's requirements conflict with either the referenced testmethod or this specification, comply with the manufacturer's requirements.
























































09 05 61 - 4COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING PREPARATION

B. Where this specification conflicts with the referenced test method, comply with the requirementsof this section.

C. Test in accordance with ASTM F1869 and as follows.D. Plastic sheet test and mat bond test may not be substituted for the specified ASTM test method,

as those methods do not quantify the moisture content sufficiently.E. In the event that test values exceed floor covering manufacturer's limits, perform remediation as

indicated. In the absence of manufacturer limits, perform remediation if test values exceed 3pounds per 1000 square feet per 24 hours.

F. Report: Report the information required by the test method.3.05 INTERNAL RELATIVE HUMIDITY TESTING


B. Test in accordance with ASTM F2170 Procedure A and as follows.C. Testing with electrical impedance or resistance apparatus may not be substituted for the

specified ASTM test method, as the values determined are not comparable to the ASTM testvalues and do not quantify the moisture content sufficiently.

D. In the event that test values exceed floor covering manufacturer's limits, perform remediation asindicated. In the absence of manufacturer limits, perform remediation if any test value exceeds75 percent relative humidity.

E. Report: Report the information required by the test method.3.06 PH TESTING


B. Note: This procedure is the equivalent of that described in ASTM F710, repeated here for theOakwood Construction's convenience.

C. Use a wide range pH paper, its associated chart, and distilled or deionized water.D. Place several drops of water on a clean surface of concrete, forming a puddle approximately 1

inch in diameter. Allow the puddle to set for approximately 60 seconds, then dip the pH paperinto the water, remove it, and compare immediately to chart to determine pH reading.

E. In the event that test values exceed floor covering manufacturer's limits, perform remediation asindicated. In the absence of manufacturer limits, perform remediation if any test value is over10.

3.07 PREPARATIONA. See individual floor covering section(s) for additional requirements.B. Comply with requirements and recommendations of floor covering manufacturer.C. Fill and smooth surface cracks, grooves, depressions, control joints and other non-moving

joints, and other irregularities with patching compound.D. Do not fill expansion joints, isolation joints, or other moving joints.

3.08 ADHESIVE BOND AND COMPATIBILITY TESTINGA. Comply with requirements and recommendations of floor covering manufacturer.

3.09 APPLICATION OF REMEDIAL FLOOR COATINGA. Comply with requirements and recommendations of coating manufacturer.

3.10 PROTECTIONA. Cover prepared floors with building paper or other durable covering.





















































09 05 61 - 5 COMMON WORK RESULTSFOR FLOORING PREPARATION








09 21 16 - 1GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

SECTION 09 21 16GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES


A. Performance criteria for gypsum board assemblies.B. Metal stud wall framing.C. Metal channel ceiling framing.D. Acoustic insulation.E. Gypsum sheathing.F. Cementitious backing board.G. Gypsum wallboard.H. Joint treatment and accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 01 61 16 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions.B. Section 05 40 00 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Exterior wind-load-bearing metal stud framing.C. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking product and execution requirements.D. Section 07 25 00 - Weather Barriers: Water-resistive barrier over sheathing.E. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping: Sealing top-of-wall assemblies and through-wall penetrations

at fire rated walls.F. Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Acoustic sealant.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. AISI SG02-1 - North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural

Members; American Iron and Steel Institute; 2001 with 2004 supplement. (replaced SG-971)B. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015.C. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,

Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2014.D. ASTM C475/C475M - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing

Gypsum Board; 2015.E. ASTM C645 - Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members; 2014.F. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light

Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2012.G. ASTM C754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive

Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products; 2015.H. ASTM C840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2013.I. ASTM C954 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel

Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm)in Thickness; 2015.

J. ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for Application ofGypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs; 2014.

K. ASTM C1047 - Standard Specification for Accessories For Gypsum Wallboard and GypsumVeneer Base; 2014a.

L. ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2014.M. ASTM C1658/C1658M - Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Panels; 2013.



N. ASTM D3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface ofInterior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber; 2012.

O. GA-216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2013.P. GA-600 - Fire Resistance Design Manual; 2015.Q. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; current edition.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on metal framing, gypsum board, accessories, and joint finishing

system.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing gypsum board application andfinishing, with minimum 5 years of documented experience.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

A. Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C840 and GA-216.1. See PART 3 for finishing requirements.

B. Interior Partitions : Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics:1. Acoustic Attenuation: STC as indicated in Drawings calculated in accordance with ASTM

E413, based on tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E90. STC 50 minimumrequired between living units and corridors (per MI Bldg Code).

C. Shaft Walls at HVAC Shafts: Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics:1. Air Pressure Within Shaft: Sustained loads of 5 lbf/sq ft with maximum mid-span

deflection of L/240.2. Acoustic Attenuation: STC of 35-39 calculated in accordance with ASTM E413, based on

tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E90.D. Fire Rated Assemblies: Provide completed assemblies complying with applicable code.

1. Gypsum Association File Numbers: Comply with requirements of GA-600 for the particularassembly.

2. UL Assembly Numbers: Provide construction equivalent to that listed for the particularassembly in the current UL Fire Resistance Directory.

2.02 METAL FRAMING MATERIALSA. Acceptable Manufacturers - Metal Framing, Connectors, and Accessories:

1. Clarkwestern Dietrich Building Systems LLC: www.clarkdietrich.com.2. Marino: www.marinoware.com.3. Phillips Manufacturing Company: www.phillipsmfg.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Non-Loadbearing Framing System Components: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, of sizeand properties necessary to comply with ASTM C754 for the spacing indicated, with maximumdeflection of wall framing of L/240 at 5 psf.1. Studs: "C" shaped with flat or formed webs with knurled faces.2. Runners: U shaped, sized to match studs.3. Ceiling Channels: C shaped.4. Furring: Hat-shaped sections, minimum depth of 7/8 inch.5. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2 inch depth, for attachment to substrate through one leg

only.a. Manufacturers - Resilient Furring Channels:

1) Same manufacturer as other framing materials.



C. Shaft Wall Studs and Accessories: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, of size and propertiesnecessary to comply with ASTM C754 and specified performance requirements. 1. Manufacturers - Shaft Wall Studs and Accessories:

a. Same manufacturer as other framing materials.b. Phillips Manufacturing Co: www.phillipsmfg.com.c. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

D. Ceiling Hangers: Type and size as specified in ASTM C754 for spacing required.E. Partition Head to Structure Connections: Provide mechanical anchorage devices that

accommodate deflection using slotted holes, screws and anti-friction bushings, preventingrotation of studs while maintaining structural performance of partition.1. Structural Performance: Maintain lateral load resistance and vertical movement capacity

required by applicable code, when evaluated in accordance with AISI North AmericanSpecification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members.

2. Material: ASTM A653/A653M steel sheet, SS Grade 50/340, with G60/Z180 hot dippedgalvanized coating.

3. Provide components UL-listed for use in UL-listed fire-rated head of partition joint systemsindicated on drawings.

4. Deflection and Firestop Track:a. Provide mechanical anchorage devices as described above that accommodate

deflection while maintaining the fire-rating of the wall assembly.b. Acceptable Products:

1) "Posi Clip" by Fire Trak Corporation.2) "The System" by Metal-Lite, Inc.

5. Provide top track preassembled with connection devices spaced to fit stud spacingindicated on drawings; minimum track length of 12 feet.

2.03 BOARD MATERIALSA. Manufacturers - Gypsum-Based Board:

1. American Gypsum: www.americangypsum.com.2. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum: www.gpgypsum.com.3. National Gypsum Company: www.nationalgypsum.com.4. USG Corporation: www.usg.com.5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Gypsum Wallboard: Paper-faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes tominimize joints in place; ends square cut.1. Application: Use for vertical surfaces and ceilings, unless otherwise indicated.2. Glass mat faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1658/C1658M, suitable for paint

finish, of the same core type and thickness may be substituted for paper-faced boardbehind ceramic tile in toilet rooms.

3. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.a. Mold-resistant board is required behind ceramic tile in all toilet rooms.

4. At Assemblies Indicated with Fire-Rating: Use type required by indicated tested assembly;if no tested assembly is indicated, use Type X or C board, UL or WH listed.

5. Thickness: a. Vertical Surfaces: 5/8 inch.b. Ceilings: 5/8 inch.c. Multi-Layer Assemblies: Thicknesses as indicated on drawings.

6. Mold-Resistant Paper-Faced Products:a. American Gypsum; M-Bloc.b. American Gypsum; M-Bloc Type X.c. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ToughRock Mold-Guard.d. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ToughRock Fireguard X Mold-Guard.e. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond XP Gypsum Board .



f. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.7. Glass Mat Faced Products:

a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; DensArmor Plus.b. Temple-Inland Inc; GreenGlass Interior Gypsum Board.c. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond eXP Fire-Shield Interior Extreme Gypsum

Panel.C. Backing Board For Wet Areas: Shower walls and ceilings:

1. Application: Surfaces around shower ceilings and walls.2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.3. ANSI Cement-Based Board: Non-gypsum-based; aggregated Portland cement panels

with glass fiber mesh embedded in front and back surfaces complying with ANSI A118.9 orASTM C1325.a. Thickness: 1/2 inch.b. Products:

1) Custom Building Products: www.custombuildingproducts.com.2) National Gypsum Company; PermaBase Brand Cement Board.3) USG Corporation: www.usg.com.

4. Glass Mat Faced Board: Coated glass mat water-resistant gypsum backing panel asdefined in ASTM C1178/C1178M.a. Standard Type: Thickness 1/2 inch.b. Fire Resistant Type: Type X core, thickness 5/8 inch. Where required per Code

Compliance Plansc. Products:

1) Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; DensShield Tile Backer.2) National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond eXP Tile Backer.3) Temple-Inland Inc; GreenGlass Tile Backer.

D. Ceiling Board: Special sag-resistant gypsum ceiling board as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M;sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut.1. Application: Ceilings, unless otherwise indicated.2. Thickness: 5/8 inch.3. Edges: Tapered.4. Products:

a. CertainTeed Corporation; ProRoc Interior Ceiling.b. Lafarge North America Inc; Sagcheck.c. National Gypsum Company; High Strength Brand Ceiling Board.d. USG Corporation; Sheetrock Brand Sag-Resistant Interior Gypsum Ceiling Board.

E. Shaftwall and Coreboard: Type X; 1 inch thick by 24 inches wide, beveled long edges, endssquare cut.1. Paper Faced Type: Gypsum shaftliner board or gypsum coreboard as defined ASTM

C1396/C1396M; water-resistant faces.2. Glass Mat Faced Type: Glass mat shaftliner gypsum panel or glass mat coreboard

gypsum panel as defined in ASTM C1658/C1658M.3. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.4. Products:

a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; DensGlass Shaftliner (mold-resistant).b. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Brand eXP Shaftliner.c. Temple-Inland Inc; GreenGlass Liner Panel.

2.04 FRP PANELSA. Provide panels equal to Crane Composite's Glasbord FSI (FSI) Glass Fiber Reinforced Plastic

Paneling; Class A; Smooth; Color: 85-White. Provide all trim (corner, vertical, bottom, and top)as required so there are no exposed panel edges.










































09 21 16 - 5 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

2.05 ACCESSORIESA. Acoustic Insulation: ASTM C665; preformed glass fiber, friction fit type, unfaced. Thickness:

_____ inch.B. Acoustic Insulation: 1; preformed glass fiber, friction fit type, unfaced. Thickness: As indicated

on drawingsC. Acoustic Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex or water-based elastomeric sealant; do not use

solvent-based non-curing butyl sealant.D. Finishing Accessories: ASTM C1047, galvanized steel or rolled zinc, unless otherwise

indicated.1. Types: As detailed or required for finished appearance.2. Special Shapes: In addition to conventional cornerbead and control joints, provide U-bead

at exposed panel edges.3. Manufacturers - Finishing Accessories:

a. Same manufacturer as framing materials.b. Phillips Manufacturing Co: www.phillipsmfg.com.

E. Joint Materials: ASTM C475 and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for projectconditions.1. Tape: 2 inch wide, creased paper tape for joints and corners, except as otherwise

indicated.2. Ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound.3. Chemical hardening type compound.

F. High Build Drywall Surfacer: Vinyl acrylic latex-based coating for spray application, designed totake the place of skim coating and separate paint primer in achieving Level 5 finish.

G. Screws for Attachment to Steel Members Less Than 0.033 inch In Thickness, to WoodMembers, and to Gypsum Board: ASTM C1002; self-piercing tapping type; cadmium plated forexterior locations.

H. Screws for Attachment to Steel Members From 0.033 to 0.112 inch in Thickness: ASTM C954;steel drill screws for application of gypsum board to loadbearing steel studs.

I. Anchorage to Substrate: Tie wire, nails, screws, and other metal supports, of type and size tosuit application; to rigidly secure materials in place.

J. Exterior Soffit Vents: One piece, perforated, ASTM B 221 6063 T5 alloy aluminum, with edgesuitable for direct application to gypsum board and manufactured especially for soffit application. Provide continuous vent.


A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence.3.02 SHAFT WALL INSTALLATION

A. Shaft Wall Framing: Install in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.1. Fasten runners to structure with short leg to finished side, using appropriate power-driven

fasteners at not more than 24 inches on center.2. Install studs at spacing required to meet performance requirements.

B. Shaft Wall Liner: Cut panels to accurate dimension and install sequentially between specialfriction studs. 1. On walls over sixteen feet high, screw-attach studs to runners top and bottom.2. Seal perimeter of shaft wall and penetrations with acoustical sealant.

3.03 FRAMING INSTALLATIONA. Metal Framing: Install in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's instructions.B. Suspended Ceilings and Soffits: Space framing and furring members as indicated.
























































1. Level ceiling system to a tolerance of 1/1200.2. Laterally brace entire suspension system.3. Install bracing as required at exterior locations to resist wind uplift.

C. Studs: Space studs at 16 inches on center.1. Extend partition framing to structure where indicated and to ceiling in other locations.2. Partitions Terminating at Ceiling: Attach ceiling runner securely to ceiling track in

accordance with manufacturer's instructions.3. Partitions Terminating at Structure: Attach top runner to structure, maintain clearance

between top of studs and structure, and connect studs to track using specified mechanicaldevices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; verify free movement of top of studconnections; do not leave studs unattached to track.

D. Openings: Reinforce openings as required for weight of doors or operable panels, using notless than double studs at jambs.

E. Standard Wall Furring: Install at masonry walls scheduled to receive gypsum board, not morethan 4 inches from floor and ceiling lines and abutting walls. Secure in place on alternatechannel flanges at maximum 24 inches on center.

F. Acoustic Furring: Install resilient channels at maximum 24 inches on center. Locate joints overframing members.

G. Furring for Fire Ratings: Install as required for fire resistance ratings indicated and to GA-600requirements.

H. Blocking: Install 2x wood or mechanically fastened steel sheet blocking for support of:1. Framed openings.2. Wall mounted cabinets.3. Plumbing fixtures.4. Toilet partitions.5. Toilet accessories.6. Wall mounted door hardware.

3.04 ACOUSTIC ACCESSORIES INSTALLATIONA. Acoustic Insulation: Place tightly within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around

electrical and mechanical items within partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions.B. Acoustic Sealant: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

1. Place one bead continuously on substrate before installation of perimeter framingmembers.

2. Place continuous bead at perimeter of each layer of gypsum board.3. Seal around all penetrations by conduit, pipe, ducts, and rough-in boxes, except where

firestopping is provided.3.05 BOARD INSTALLATION

A. Comply with ASTM C 840, GA-216, manufacturer's instructions, and underwriter's laboratories(UL). Install to minimize butt end joints, especially in highly visible locations.

B. Single-Layer Non-Rated: Install gypsum board in most economical direction, with ends andedges occurring over firm bearing.1. Exception: Tapered edges to receive joint treatment at right angles to framing.

C. Fire-Rated Construction: Install gypsum board in strict compliance with requirements ofassembly listing.

D. Exposed Gypsum Board in Interior Wet Areas: Seal joints, cut edges, and holes withwater-resistant sealant.

E. Cementitious Backing Board: Install over steel framing members where indicated, inaccordance with ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's instructions.























































09 21 16 - 7 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

F. Installation on Metal Framing: Use screws for attachment of all gypsum board except face layerof non-rated double-layer assemblies, which may be installed by means of adhesive lamination.

G. Moisture Protection: Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board and exteriorgypsum soffit board with sealant.

3.06 INSTALLATION OF FRP PANELSA. Install FRP panels using adhesive per manufacturer's recommendations. Seal all joints and

perimeter between FRP trim and adjacent surfaces.3.07 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES

A. Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and as follows:1. Not more than 25 feet apart on walls over 40 feet long.

B. Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths. C. Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials and as indicated.

3.08 JOINT TREATMENTA. Glass Mat Faced Gypsum Board and Exterior Glass Mat Faced Sheathing: Use fiberglass joint

tape, bedded and finished with chemical hardening type joint compound.B. Paper Faced Gypsum Board: Use paper joint tape, bedded with ready-mixed vinyl-based joint

compound and finished with chemical hardening type joint compound.C. Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C840, as follows:

1. Level 4: Walls and ceilings to receive paint finish or wall coverings, unless otherwiseindicated.

2. Level 2: In utility areas, behind cabinetry, and on backing board to receive tile finish.3. Level 1: Fire rated wall areas above finished ceilings, whether or not accessible in the

completed construction.4. Level 0: Temporary partitions.5. Level 0: Surfaces indicated to be finished in later stage of project.

D. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready toreceive finishes.1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch.2. Taping, filling, and sanding is not required at surfaces behind adhesive applied ceramic tile

unless required by fire rating of wall system.3. Taping, filling and sanding is not required at base layer of double layer applications.

E. Fill and finish joints and corners of cementitious backing board as recommended bymanufacturer.

3.09 TOLERANCESA. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet

in any direction.END OF SECTION 09 21 16












































09 65 00 - 1RESILIENT FLOORING

SECTION 09 65 00RESILIENT FLOORING


A. Resilient sheet flooring.B. Resilient tile flooring.C. Resilient base.D. Resilient stair accessories.E. Installation accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 01 61 16 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions.B. Section 09 05 61 - Common Work Results for Flooring Preparation: Independent agency

testing of concrete slabs, removal of existing floor coverings, cleaning, and preparation.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM E648 - Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Usinga Radiant Heat Energy Source; 2014c.

B. ASTM F710 - Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring;2011.

C. ASTM F1066 - Standard Specification for Vinyl Composition Floor Tile; 2004 (Reapproved2014).

D. ASTM F1303 - Standard Specification for Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering with Backing; 2004(Reapproved 2014).

E. ASTM F1861 - Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base; 2008 (Reapproved 2012).F. ASTM F1913 - Standard Specification for Vinyl Sheet Floor Covering Without Backing; 2004

(Reapproved 2014).G. ASTM F2169 - Standard Specification for Resilient Stair Treads; 2015.H. BAAQMD 8-51 - Bay Area Air Quality Management District Regulation 8, Rule 51, Adhesive and

Sealant Products; www.baaqmd.gov; 2002.I. NFPA 253 - Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using

a Radiant Heat Energy Source; 2015.J. RFCI (RWP) - Recommended Work Practices for Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings;

Resilient Floor Covering Institute; October 2011.K. SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; current edition;

www.aqmd.gov.L. SCS (CPD) - SCS Certified Products; Scientific Certification Systems; current listings at

www.scscertified.com.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance

characteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions.C. Selection Samples: Submit manufacturer's complete set of color samples for HDJ's initial

selection.D. Concrete Testing Standard: Submit a copy of ASTM F710.E. Certification: Prior to installation of flooring, submit written certification by flooring manufacturer

and adhesive manufacturer that condition of sub-floor is acceptable.



F. Enterprise Green Communities (EGC) Report: Report recycled content and VOC emission offlooring; VOC content of adhesives.

G. Resilient flooring is to be manufactured within 500 miles of project location.1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect roll materials from damage by storing on end.1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Maintain temperature in storage area between 55 degrees F and 90 degrees F.B. Store materials for not less than 48 hours prior to installation in area of installation at a

temperature of 70 degrees F to achieve temperature stability. Thereafter, maintain conditionsabove 55 degrees F.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 SHEET FLOORING

A. Vinyl Sheet Flooring : Homogeneous without backing, with color and pattern throughout fullthickness, and:1. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F1913.2. Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, when tested in

accordance with ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253.3. VOC Content: Certified as Low Emission by one of the following :

a. SCS Floorscore; www.scscertified.com.4. Total Thickness and Wear Layer Thickness: 0.080 inch nominal.5. Sheet Width: 72 inch minimum.6. Heat welded seams.7. Pattern: Wood grain.

B. Vinyl Welding Rod: Solid vinyl bead produced by manufacturer of vinyl flooring for heat weldingseams, in color matching field color.

2.02 TILE FLOORINGA. Vinyl Composition Tile: Homogeneous, with color extending throughout thickness, and:

1. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F1066, of Class corresponding to typespecified.

2. Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, when tested inaccordance with ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253.

3. Size: 12 x 12 inch.4. VOC Content: Certified as Low Emission by one of the following :

a. SCS Floorscore; www.scscertified.com.5. Thickness: 0.125 inch.6. Pattern: Solid color.

2.03 STAIR COVERINGA. Stair Treads: Rubber; full width and depth of stair tread in one piece; tapered thickness; nosing

not less than 1-5/8 inch deep.1. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F2169, Type TS, rubber, vulcanized

thermoset.2. Nominal Thickness: 0.1875 inch.3. Nosing: Square.4. Style: Contrasting color strips full width.5. Color: Solid.

B. Stair Risers: Full height and width of tread in one piece, matching treads in material and color:1. Thickness: 0.080 inch.



2.04 RESILIENT BASEA. Resilient Base: ASTM F1861, Type TS rubber, vulcanized thermoset; top set Style B, Cove,

and as follows:1. Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, when tested in

accordance with ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253.2. Height: 4 inch.3. Thickness: 0.125 inch thick.4. Finish: Satin.5. Color: Color as selected from manufacturer's standards.6. Accessories: Premolded external corners and end stops.

2.05 ACCESSORIESA. Subfloor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by adhesive material manufacturer.B. Primers, Adhesives, and Seaming Materials: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring

manufacturer.1. Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than required

by the more stringent of the South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168and the Bay Area Air Quality Management District Regulation 8, Rule 51.

C. Moldings, Transition and Edge Strips: Same material as flooring.D. Filler for Coved Base: Plastic.E. Sealer and Wax: Types recommended by flooring manufacturer.


A. Verify that surfaces are flat to tolerances acceptable to flooring manufacturer, free of cracks thatmight telegraph through flooring, clean, dry, and free of curing compounds, surface hardeners,and other chemicals that might interfere with bonding of flooring to substrate.

B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work,are dust-free, and are ready to receive resilient base.

C. Cementitious Sub-floor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are dry enough and ready for resilientflooring installation by testing for moisture and pH.1. Test in accordance with ASTM F710.2. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by resilient flooring

manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer.D. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Remove existing resilient flooring and flooring adhesives; follow the recommendations of RFCI

Recommended Work Practices for Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings.B. Comply with requirements of Phase 1 and Due Care Plans for removal of hazardous materials.C. Prepare floor substrates as recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers.D. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other

defects with sub-floor filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface.E. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured.F. Clean substrate.

3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions.B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.C. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set.



D. Fit joints tightly.E. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion.F. Where type of floor finish, pattern, or color are different on opposite sides of door, terminate

flooring under centerline of door.G. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, where flooring terminates, and where

indicated.1. Metal Strips: Attach to substrate before installation of flooring using stainless steel screws.2. Resilient Strips: Attach to substrate using adhesive.

H. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to producetight joints.

3.04 SHEET FLOORINGA. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to longer room dimensions, to produce minimum

number of seams. Lay out seams to avoid widths less than 1/3 of roll width; match patternscarefully at seams.

B. Double cut sheet at seams.C. Lay flooring with tightly butted seams, without any seam sealer unless otherwise indicated.D. Finish seams in sheet vinyl by heat welding.

3.05 TILE FLOORINGA. Mix tile from container to ensure shade variations are consistent when tile is placed, unless

manufacturer's instructions say otherwise.B. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical tile pattern.

3.06 RESILIENT BASEA. Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches between joints.B. Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces.C. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions.

3.07 STAIR COVERINGSA. Install stair coverings in one piece for full width and depth of tread.B. Adhere over entire surface. Fit accurately and securely.

3.08 CLEANINGA. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage.B. Clean in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.09 PROTECTIONA. Prohibit traffic on resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation.



09 91 13 - 1 EXTERIOR PAINTING

SECTION 09 91 13 – EXTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on exterior substrates.

1. Concrete. 2. Steel. 3. Galvanized metal. 4. Stainless-steel flashing. 5. Wood.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

B. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

C. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

D. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

E. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

F. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

B. Samples: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat.

C. Product List: For each product indicated. Include printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted.

1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.




A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3.

a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft.. b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.

2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.

a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other Part 2 articles for the paint category indicated.

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List."

B. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

C. VOC Content: Provide materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

1. 20 percent of surface area will be painted with deep tones.

2.3 BLOCK FILLERS

A. Block Filler, Latex, Interior/Exterior: MPI #4.

2.4 PRIMERS/SEALERS

A. Primer, Alkali Resistant, Water Based: MPI #3.



B. Primer, Bonding, Water Based: MPI #17.

C. Wood-Knot Sealer: Sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for exterior use in paint system indicated.

2.5 METAL PRIMERS

A. Primer, Alkyd, Anti-Corrosive for Metal: MPI #79.

B. Primer, Galvanized, Water Based: MPI #134.

C. Primer, Galvanized: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer.

2.6 WOOD PRIMERS

A. Primer, Latex for Exterior Wood: MPI #6.

2.7 WATER-BASED PAINTS

A. Latex, Exterior Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #11.

B. Light Industrial Coating, Exterior, Water Based, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #163.

2.8 TEXTURED AND HIGH-BUILD COATINGS

A. Primer for Textured Coating, Latex, Flat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer.

B. Intermediate Coat for Textured Coating, Latex, Flat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer.

C. Textured Coating, Latex, Flat: MPI #42.

D. Primer for Latex, Exterior, High Build: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer.

E. Intermediate Coat for Latex, Exterior, High Build: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer.

F. Latex, Exterior, High Build: MPI #40.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:



1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent. 3. Wood: 15 percent. 4. Portland Cement Plaster: 12 percent. 5. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

D. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.

B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual."

B. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

B. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.5 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces:

1. Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkali resistant, water based, MPI #3. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior gloss (Gloss Level 6), MPI #119.



B. Concrete Substrates, Traffic Surfaces: 1. Alkyd Floor Enamel System:

a. Prime Coat: Floor enamel, alkyd, gloss (Gloss Level 6), MPI #27. b. Intermediate Coat: Floor enamel, alkyd, gloss (Gloss Level 6), MPI #27. c. Topcoat: Floor enamel, alkyd, gloss (Gloss Level 6), MPI #27. d. Additive: Manufacturer's standard additive to increase skid resistance of painted

surface.

2. Water-Based Clear Sealer System:

a. Prime Coat: Sealer, water based, for concrete floors, MPI #99. b. Intermediate Coat: Sealer, water based, for concrete floors, MPI #99. c. Topcoat: Sealer, water based, for concrete floors, MPI #99.

C. Steel Substrates:

1. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System: a. Prime Coat: Shop primer specified in Section 05 12 00 "Structural Steel Framing"

where substrate is specified. b. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, matching

topcoat. c. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, semi-gloss (Gloss

Level 5), MPI #163.

D. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:

1. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized metal, as recommended in writing by topcoat

manufacturer for exterior use on galvanized-metal substrates with topcoat indicated.

b. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, matching topcoat.

c. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #163.

E. Cementitious Composition Board Substrates:

1. Latex over Alkali-Resistant Primer System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkali resistant, water based, MPI #3. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #11.

F. Exterior Plastic (PVC) Board Substrates:

1. Latex System:

a. Topcoat: Latex, exterior semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #11.



09 91 23 - 1 INTERIOR PAINTING

SECTION 09 91 23 - INTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates. 1. Concrete. 2. Steel. 3. Galvanized metal. 4. Wood. 5. Gypsum board.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. A traditional matte finish, Flat

B. Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. A high side side sheen flat, “a velvet like” finish

C. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. A traditional “egg-shell like” finish.

D. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. A “satin-like” finish

E. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. A traditional semi gloss

F. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. A traditional gloss

G. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. A high gloss


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

B. Samples: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat.

C. Product List: For each product indicated. Include printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.

1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.




A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of

each paint system specified in Part 3. a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft.. b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.

2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of

additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, comply with one of the following manufacturers: 1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. Sherwin-Williams Co. 3. ICI Devoe

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List."

B. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another

and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

C. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction and, for interior paints and coatings applied at Project site, the following VOC limits, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L. 3. Dry-Fog Coatings: 400 g/L. 4. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L. 5. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L. 6. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 340 g/L. 7. Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L. 8. Floor Coatings: 100 g/L. 9. Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/L. 10. Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/L.

D. Low-Emitting Materials: Interior paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing



of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

E. Colors: As indicated in a color schedule . 1. 20 percent of surface area will be painted with deep tones.

2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS

A. Primer Sealer, Latex, Interior: MPI #50.

B. Primer, Latex, for Interior Wood: MPI #39.

C. Primer, Bonding, Water Based: MPI #17.

D. Wood-Knot Sealer: Sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for use in paint systems indicated.

2.4 METAL PRIMERS

A. Primer, Rust-Inhibitive, Water Based: MPI #107.

B. Primer, Galvanized, Water Based: MPI #134.

C. Primer, Vinyl Wash: MPI #80.

2.5 WATER-BASED PAINTS

A. Latex, Interior, High Performance Architectural, (Gloss Level 3): MPI #139.

B. Latex, Interior, High Performance Architectural, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #141.

C. Light Industrial Coating, Interior, Water Based, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #153.

D. Light Industrial Coating, Interior, Water Based, Gloss (Gloss Level 6): MPI #154.

2.6 DRY FOG/FALL COATINGS

A. Dry Fall, Latex, Flat: MPI #118.

B. Dry Fall, Water Based, for Galvanized Steel, Flat (Gloss Level 1): MPI #133.

C. Dry Fall, Alkyd, Flat: MPI #55.

2.7 FLOOR COATINGS

A. Sealer, Water Based, for Concrete Floors: MPI #99.

B. Floor Enamel, Alkyd, Gloss (Gloss Level 6): MPI #27.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent. 3. Wood: 15 percent. 4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 5. Plaster: 12 percent.

C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

D. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall

items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie

coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual."

B. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.



B. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.5 LIFE SAFETY LABELING

A. Label all fire-rated and/or smoke partitions with 3” high Red (or contrasting color) lettering with stencil, signage, or method approved by Authority Having Jurisdiction. 1. Label shall be appropriate to the wall system and shall include the language “PROTECT

ALL OPENINGS” under the Wall Type label. 2. Label must be placed every 30’-0” o.c. (maximum) and 15’-0” from corners (maximum) on

all Wall Assemblies requiring labeling. a. Labeling shall be placed on walls within accessible and concealed floor, floor-

ceiling, or attic spaces. 3. Use paint or products appropriate to wall surface being labeled (gyp bd, CMU, concrete,

etc.) a. Example: 1 HOUR FIREWALL

PROTECT ALL OPENINGS

3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces: 1. High-Performance Architectural Latex System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkali resistant, water based, MPI #4. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching

topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, semi-gloss (Gloss

Level 5), MPI #141.

B. Concrete Substrates, Traffic Surfaces: 1. Alkyd Floor Enamel System:

a. Prime Coat: Floor enamel, alkyd, gloss (Gloss Level 6), MPI #27. b. Intermediate Coat: Floor enamel, alkyd, gloss (Gloss Level 6), MPI #27. c. Topcoat: Floor enamel, alkyd, gloss (Gloss Level 6), MPI #27.

2. Water-Based Clear Sealer System: a. First Coat: Sealer, water based, for concrete floors, MPI #99. b. Topcoat: Sealer, water based, for concrete floors, MPI #99.

C. Steel Substrates: 1. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, rust-inhibitive, water based MPI #107. b. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, matching

topcoat. c. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, semi-gloss (Gloss

Level 5), MPI #153.

D. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: 1. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating Over Waterborne Primer System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based, MPI #134. b. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, matching

topcoat. c. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, gloss (Gloss

Level 6), MPI #154.



E. Wood Substrates: Including wood trim doors wood-based panel products . 1. High-Performance Architectural Latex System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex, for interior wood, MPI #39. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching

topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, semi-gloss (Gloss

Level 5), MPI #141.

F. Stained Wood Substrates: Including wood base, trim, and custom casework. a. Refer to Section 09 93 00, Staining and Transparent Finishing

1) Custom stain color to match samples provided by Arch. Provide (3) samples of each stain color for Architect Approval. Architect may select one additional stain sample for each color before incurring additional expense to the Owner.

G. Fiberglass and Plastic Substrates: 1. High-Performance Architectural Latex System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, bonding, water based, MPI #17. b. c. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching

topcoat. d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, semi-gloss (Gloss

Level 5), MPI #141.

H. Gypsum Board Substrates: 1. High-Performance Architectural Latex System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, MPI #50. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching

topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, (Gloss

Level 3), MPI #139.

I. Cotton or Canvas Insulation-Covering Substrates: Including pipe and duct coverings . 1. Latex System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, MPI #50. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #52.

J. Basis of Design: ICI Devoe: 1. Interior gypsum board walls and ceilings.

a. Prep and Prime, odorless interior water-based primer sealer #LM 9116 (primer) b. (2) coats ICI Dulux Lifemaster 2000 #LM 9100 Flat Latex (walls and ceilings)

2. Wood trim and base cove. a. Prep and Prime, odorless interior water-based primer sealer #LM 9116 (primer) b. (3) coats ICI Dulux Lifemaster 2000 #LM 9200 Semi-gloss (trim)

3. Exposed steel. a. Prime, ICI Devoe Devguard #4160 Primer Gray b. (2) coats, ICI Devoe Devguard #4308 Alkyd industrial gloss enamel – color as

selected by architect.



10 14 00 - 1SIGNAGE

SECTION 10 14 00SIGNAGE


A. Room and door signs.B. Emergency evacuation maps.C. Building identification signs.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 22 05 53 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.B. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. 36 CFR 1191 - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and

Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines; current edition.B. ICC A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; 2009.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Manufacturer's printed product literature for each type of sign, indicating sign

styles, font, foreground and background colors, locations, overall dimensions of each sign.C. Signage Schedule: Provide information sufficient to completely define each sign for fabrication,

including room number, room name, other text to be applied, sign and letter sizes, fonts, andcolors.1. When room numbers to appear on signs differ from those on the drawings, include the

drawing room number on schedule.2. When content of signs is indicated to be determined later, request such information from

Genral Capital through HDJ at least 2 months prior to start of fabrication; upon request,submit preliminary schedule.

3. Submit for approval by Genral Capital through HDJ prior to fabrication.D. Samples: Submit two samples of each type of sign, of size similar to that required for project,

illustrating sign style, font, and method of attachment.E. Selection Samples: Where colors are not specified, submit two sets of color selection charts or

chips.1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Package signs as required to prevent damage before installation.B. Package room and door signs in sequential order of installation, labeled by floor or building.C. Store tape adhesive at normal room temperature.

1.06 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Do not install tape adhesive when ambient temperature is lower than recommended by

manufacturer.B. Maintain this minimum temperature during and after installation of signs.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 SIGNAGE APPLICATIONS

A. Accessibility Compliance: All signs are required to comply with ADA Standards for AccessibleDesign and ANSI/ICC A 117.1 and applicable building codes, unless otherwise indicated; in theevent of conflicting requirements, comply with the most comprehensive and specificrequirements.


10 14 00 - 2SIGNAGE

B. Room and Door Signs: Provide a sign for every doorway, whether it has a door or not, notincluding corridors, lobbies, and similar open areas.1. Sign Type: Flat signs with engraved panel media as specified.2. Provide "tactile" signage, with letters raised minimum 1/32 inch and Grade II braille.3. Character Height: 1 inch.4. Sign Height: 2 inches, unless otherwise indicated.5. Office Doors: Identify with room numbers to be determined later, not the numbers shown

on the drawings; in addition, provide "window" section for replaceable occupant name.6. Conference and Meeting Rooms: Identify with room numbers to be determined later, not

the numbers shown on the drawings; in addition, provide "window" section with sliding "InUse/Vacant" indicator.

7. Service Rooms: Identify with room names and numbers to be determined later, not thoseshown on the drawings.

8. Rest Rooms: Identify with pictograms, the names "MEN" and "WOMEN", room numbersto be determined later, and braille.

C. Emergency Evacuation Maps: 1. Allow for one map per elevator lobby.2. Map content to be provided by Genral Capital. 3. Use clear plastic panel silk-screened on reverse, in brushed aluminum frame,

screw-mounted.D. Building Identification Signs:

1. Use individual metal letters.2. Mount on outside wall in location shown on drawings.

E. Traffic Signs: To match campus standards; locate where indicated on the drawings.2.02 SIGN TYPES

A. Flat Signs: Signage media without frame.1. Edges: Square.2. Corners: Square.3. Wall Mounting of One-Sided Signs: Tape adhesive.

B. Color and Font: Unless otherwise indicated:1. Character Font: Helvetica, Arial, or other sans serif font.2. Character Case: Upper case only.3. Background Color: Clear.4. Character Color: Contrasting color.

2.03 TACTILE SIGNAGE MEDIAA. Engraved Panels: Laminated colored plastic; engraved through face to expose core as

background color:1. Total Thickness: 1/16 inch.

2.04 NON-TACTILE SIGNAGE MEDIAA. Silk Screened Plastic Panels: Letters and graphics silk screened onto reverse side of plastic

surface:1. Sign Color: Clear.2. Total Thickness: 1/8 inch.

2.05 DIMENSIONAL LETTERSA. Metal Letters:

1. Mounting: Tape adhesive.2.06 ACCESSORIES

A. Tape Adhesive: Double sided tape, permanent adhesive.


10 14 00 - 3SIGNAGE


A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Install neatly, with horizontal edges level.C. Locate signs where indicated:

1. Room and Door Signs: Locate on wall at latch side of door with centerline of sign at 60inches above finished floor.

2. If no location is indicated obtain Genral Capital's instructions.D. Protect from damage until Substantial Completion; repair or replace damage items.



10 28 00 - 1TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY

ACCESSORIES

SECTION 10 28 00TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES


A. Accessories for toilet rooms, showers, residential bathrooms, and utility rooms.B. Grab bars.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. 36 CFR 1191 - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and

Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines; current edition.B. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010.C. ASTM A269/A269M - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless

Steel Tubing for General Service; 2015.D. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel

Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2015.E. ASTM B456 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus

Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium; 2011.F. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2011.G. ASTM C1503 - Standard Specification for Silvered Flat Glass Mirror; 2008 (Reapproved 2013).H. ASTM F2285 - Standard Consumer Safety Performance Specification for Diaper Changing

Tables for Commercial Use; 2004 (Reapproved 2010).1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordinate the work with the placement of internal wall reinforcement, concealed ceilingsupports, and reinforcement of toilet partitions to receive anchor attachments.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Submit data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, and

attachment methods.C. Samples: Submit two samples of each accessory, illustrating color and finish.


A. Products listed in Living Units are made by American Pride or Creative SpecialtiesB. Products listed in Community Rooms are made by Bobrick.C. All items of each type to be made by the same manufacturer.

2.02 MATERIALSA. Accessories - General: Shop assembled, free of dents and scratches and packaged complete

with anchors and fittings, steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation.B. Keys: Provide 3 keys for each accessory to Genral Capital; master key lockable accessories.C. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A666, Type 304.D. Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A269/A269M, Type 304 or 316.E. Mirror Glass: Annealed float glass, ASTM C1036 Type I, Class 1, Quality Q2, with silvering,

protective and physical characteristics complying with ASTM C1503.F. Adhesive: Two component epoxy type, waterproof.G. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized; tamper-proof; security type.


10 28 00 - 2TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES

H. Expansion Shields: Fiber, lead, or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer forcomponent and substrate.

2.03 FINISHESA. Stainless Steel: No. 4 Brushed finish, unless otherwise noted.B. Chrome/Nickel Plating: ASTM B456, SC 2, satin finish, unless otherwise noted.C. Shop Primed Ferrous Metals: Pretreat and clean, spray apply one coat primer and bake.D. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis.

2.04 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIESA. Toilet Paper Dispenser: Single roll, surface mounted bracket type, chrome-plated zinc alloy

brackets, eccentric-shaped plastic spindle for 1/2 revolution delivery designed to prevent theft oftissue roll.

B. Toilet Paper Dispenser: Single roll, semi-recessed, stainless steel unit with pivot hinge, tumblerlock.

C. Combination Towel Dispenser/Waste Receptacle: Recessed flush with wall, stainless steel;seamless wall flanges, continuous piano hinges, tumbler locks on upper and lower doors.1. Waste receptacle liner: Reusable, heavy-duty vinyl.2. Towel dispenser capacity: 350 C-fold.

D. Soap Dispenser: Liquid soap dispenser, deck-mounted on vanity, with polyethylene containerconcealed below deck; piston and 4 inch spout of stainless steel with bright polished finish;chrome-plated deck escutcheon.1. Minimum Capacity: 16 ounces.

E. Grab Bars: Stainless steel, 1-1/2 inches outside diameter, minimum 0.05 inch wall thickness,nonslip grasping surface finish, concealed flange mounting; 1-1/2 inches clearance betweenwall and inside of grab bar.1. Length and configuration: As indicated on drawings.

F. Diaper Changing Station: Wall-mounted folding diaper changing station for use in commercialtoilet facilities, meeting or exceeding ASTM F2285.1. Style: Horizontal.2. Material: Polyethylene.3. Mounting: Surface.4. Color: White.5. Minimum Rated Load: 250 lbs.

2.05 SHOWER AND TUB ACCESSORIESA. Shower Curtain Rod: Stainless steel tube, 1 inch outside diameter, 0.04 inch wall thickness,

satin-finished, with 3 inch outside diameter, minimum 0.04 inch thick satin-finished stainlesssteel flanges, for installation with exposed fasteners.

B. Shower Curtain: 1. Material: Opaque vinyl, 0.008 inch thick, matte finish, with antibacterial treatment,

flameproof and stain-resistant.2. Size: 36 by 72 inches, hemmed edges.3. Grommets: Stainless steel; pierced through top hem on 6 inch centers.4. Color: White.5. Shower curtain hooks: Chrome-plated or stainless steel spring wire designed for snap

closure.C. Folding Shower Seat: Wall-mounted recessed; welded tubular seat frame, structural support

members, hinges and mechanical fasteners of Type 304 stainless steel, L-shaped, right handseat.1. Seat: Phenolic or polymeric composite one-piece seat or seat slats, of white color.2. Size: ADA Standards compliant.


10 28 00 - 3TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY

ACCESSORIES

D. Towel Bar: Stainless steel Type 304, 3/4 inch square tubular bar; rectangular brackets,concealed attachment, satin finish.

2.06 RESIDENTIAL ACCESSORIESA. Toilet Paper Dispenser: Single roll, surface mounted bracket type.B. Towel Bars: Provide (1) towel bar and one towel ring per bathroom.

2.07 UTILITY ROOM ACCESSORIESA. Mop and Broom Holder: 0.05 inch thick stainless steel, Type 304, hat-shaped channel.

1. Holders: 3 spring-loaded rubber cam holders.2. Length: 36 inches.


A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.B. Verify exact location of accessories for installation.C. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on drawings.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site for timely installation.B. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required.

3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturers' instructions in locations indicated on the

drawings.B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate.C. Mounting Heights: As required by accessibility regulations, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Grab Bars: As indicated on the drawings.2. Other Accessories: As indicated on the drawings.

D. Mounting Heights and Locations: As required by accessibility regulations, as indicated ondrawings, and as follows:1. Bottom of Mirrors at Accessible Units: 40" max..

3.04 PROTECTIONA. Protect installed accessories from damage due to subsequent construction operations.

3.05 SCHEDULEA. Community Area Bathroom Accessories:

1. Surface Mounted Soap Dispenser: Bobrick 8186152. Recessed paper towel dispenser and waste receptacle: Bobrick B-3693. Glass mirror: Bobrick B-290 24364. Recessed multi-roll toilet tissue dispenser: Bobrick B-43885. 1 1/2" grab bars with concealed screw: Creative Specialties 8900

B. Unit Bathroom Accessories:1. Glass mirror: Frameless Glass Mirror, 24x362. 24" towel bar3. 18" towel bar4. Toilet tissue dispenser:5. 1 1/2" grab bars with concealed screw: (Installed at accessible units only)



10 44 00 - 1FIRE PROTECTION

SPECIALTIES

SECTION 10 44 00FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES


A. Fire extinguishers.B. Fire extinguisher cabinets.C. Accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking product and execution requirements.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. NFPA 10 - Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers; 2013.B. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; current listings at database.ul.com.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide extinguisher operational features.

1.05 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Do not install extinguishers when ambient temperature may cause freezing of extinguisher

ingredients.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Fire Extinguishers:1. JL Industries, Inc..2. Larsen's Manufacturing Co..3. Potter-Roemer.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets and Accessories:1. JL Industries, Inc: www.jlindustries.com.2. Larsen's Manufacturing Co: www.larsensmfg.com.3. Potter-Roemer: www.potterroemer.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHERSA. Fire Extinguishers - General: Comply with product requirements of NFPA 10 and applicable

codes, whichever is more stringent.1. Provide extinguishers labeled by UL for the purpose specified and indicated.

B. Dry Chemical Type Fire Extinguishers: Carbon steel tank, with pressure gage.1. Cartridge Operated: Spun shell.2. Class: 4A-60B:C and 2A-10B:C. Locate as required per Code3. Size and classification as scheduled.4. Finish: Baked polyester powder coat, red color.

2.03 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETSA. Metal: Formed primed steel sheet; 0.036 inch thick base metal.B. Cabinet Configuration: Semi-recessed type.

1. Trim: Returned to wall surface, with 4 inch projection, (per manufacturer) inch wide face.2. Form cabinet enclosure with right angle inside corners and seams. Form perimeter trim

and door stiles.


10 44 00 - 2FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES

C. Door: 0.036 inch thick, reinforced for flatness and rigidity; lock with break glass access. Hingedoors for 180 degree opening with continuous piano hinge. Provide roller type catch.

D. Door Glazing: Glass, clear, 1/8 inch thick float. Set in resilient channel gasket glazing.E. Cabinet Mounting Hardware: Appropriate to cabinet. Pre-drill for anchors.F. Weld, fill, and grind components smooth.G. Finish of Cabinet Exterior Trim and Door: Baked enamel, white color.H. Finish of Cabinet Interior: White enamel.

2.04 ACCESSORIESA. Extinguisher Brackets: Formed steel, chrome-plated.B. Cabinet Signage: Fire Extinguisher. Or as directed by Code.


A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.B. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Install cabinets plumb and levelin wall openings, 32 inches from finished floor to inside bottom

of cabinet.C. Secure rigidly in place.D. Place extinguishers in cabinets.

3.03 SCHEDULESA. Common Spaces and Corridors: Multipurpose Dry Chemical Type: UL-rated 4-A:60-B:C, 10 LB

nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in manufacturer'sstandard enameled container, placed in semi-recessed painted steel cabinet with clear visionpanel; locate as indicated on Code Compliance Plans/ Drawings.

B. Kitchen in Community Room: Multipurpose Dry Chemical Type: UL-rated 4-A:60-B:C, 10 LBnominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in manufacturer'sstandard enameled container, 1 required for wall bracket mounting, red color.

C. Mechanical, Electrical, Janitor Rooms: Multipurpose Dry Chemical Type: UL-rated 4-A:60-B:C,10 LB nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in manufacturer'sstandard enameled container, [1] required for wall bracket mounting, red color

D. Living Units: Multipurpose Dry Chemical Type: UL-rated 2-A:10-B:C, 2.5 LB nominal capacity,with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in manufacturer's standard enameledcontainer, [1] required for wall bracket mounting, red color. Mount under sink and label.

E. Additional Locations: Provide fire extinguishers as directed by local Code Official and/or localFire Marshal.



10 55 00 - 1POSTAL SPECIALTIES

SECTION 10 55 00POSTAL SPECIALTIES


A. Central mail delivery boxes.1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. 39 CFR 111 - U.S. Postal Service Standard 4C; effective date September 3, 2006.B. 36 CFR 1191 - Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and

Facilities; Final Rule; current edition; (ADA Standards for Accessible Design).1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's specifications and descriptive literature, installation

instructions, maintenance information, and current USPS approval documentation.C. Shop Drawings: Indicate plans for each unit or groups of units, front elevations with

compartment layout and model number, overall dimensions, rough-in opening sizes, construction and anchorage details.

1.04 WARRANTYA. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.B. Provide manufacturer's warranty against defects in materials or workmanship for a period of 5

years from Date of Substantial Completion.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 CENTRAL MAIL DELIVERY BOXES

A. Manufacturers:1. Florence Manufacturing Company: www.florencemailboxes.com.2. Postal Products Unlimited, Inc: www.postalproducts.com.3. Salsbury Industries: www.mailboxes.com.

B. Central Mail Delivery Boxes: Provide products approved for United States Postal Service(USPS) delivery.1. Materials: Aluminum with stainless steel hardware.2. Finish: Powder coat in color selected by Owner from manufacturer's standard colors.3. Unit Types and Sizes: As indicated on drawings.4. Configurations: See drawings for overall dimensions and layouts.5. Quantity: Provide (1) Unit B, (2) Unit C mailbox units. (41) total customer compartments,

(4) parcel compartments and (3) outgoing mail compartments.a. Submit to local Postmaster for final approval of location and quantity.

C. Wall-Mounted Mailboxes: Fully-recessed, complying with USPS-STD-4C.1. Unit B: Front-loading with master door, double-column design, [11] customer

compartments, 1 outgoing mail compartment, and 2 parcel compartments.2. Unit C: Front-loading with master door, double-column design, 15 customer

compartments, 1 outgoing mail compartment, and 1 parcel compartment.2.02 COMPONENTS

A. Locking - Front Loading Master Door: Three-point latching mechanism with USPS master lockfurnished and installed by postmaster.

B. Locking - Customer Compartment Doors: USPS approved cam lock, 3 keys each lock.C. Locking - Parcel Compartment Doors: Double-lock arrangement with USPS approved cam lock

for customer access, and USPS master lock furnished and installed by postmaster.


10 55 00 - 2POSTAL SPECIALTIES

D. Identification - Customer and Parcel Compartments: Sequential numerical or alphabeticcharacters, top to bottom, left to right; factory-installed.1. Silver adhesive decals, 3/4 inch high black characters centered on 1-1/2 inch high by 1-3/4

inch long decal.2. Customer Name Marking: Self-adhesive labels; attach below front of each compartment

shelf.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that rough-openings are ready to receive wall-mounted units.B. Do not begin installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install postal specialties in accordance with approved shop drawings, manufacturer's

instructions, and USPS requirements.B. Adjust and lubricate door hardware to operate properly.



10 56 23 - 1WIRE STORAGE SHELVING

SECTION 10 56 23WIRE STORAGE SHELVING


A. Wall mounted wire closet shelving.B. Accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Blocking in walls for attachment of shelving.B. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Blocking in metal stud walls for attachment of

standards.1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, with installation

instructions. C. Shop Drawings: Provide drawings prepared specifically for this project; show dimensions of

shelving and attachment to substrates.1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in thissection, with not less than three years of documented experience.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.B. Store products under cover and elevated above grade.C. Store flat to prevent warpage and bending.


A. Wire Storage Shelving:1. ClosetMaid Corporation : www.closetmaid.com.

2.02 SHELVING APPLICATIONSA. Shelf Depth: 12 inches, unless otherwise indicated.B. Closets at Accessible Units:

1. Wall to wall adjustable shelf with free sliding hanger rod capable of being set at 47"maximum a.f.f.a. Product: ClosetMaid ShelfTrack or Equal.

C. Bedroom Closets:1. Not less than 6 feet of shelving equipped with free sliding hanger rod; up to 3 feet may be

arranged double height.D. Other Bedroom Closets:

1. Wall-to-wall shelf with free sliding hanger rod.2. Not less than 4 feet of shoe shelf.

E. Coat Closets:1. Wall-to-wall shelf with integral hanger rod.

F. Linen Closets:1. (5) Wall-to-wall shelves spaced at +/-13" inch vertically, not less than 16 inch deep.



G. Laundry Closets: Wall-to-wall shelf with integral hanger rod at 6'-0" aff - EXCEPT at handicapaccessible units, install shelf no higher than 47" aff.

H. Community Room Office Closet: (3) shelves,. Provide intermediate supports as required.2.03 MATERIALS

A. Wire Shelving: Factory-assembled coated wire mesh shelf assemblies for wall-mounting, withall components and connections required to produce a rigid structure that is free of buckling andwarping.1. Construction: Cold-drawn steel wire with average tensile strength of 100,000 psi

resistance welded into uniform mesh units, square, rigid, flat, and free of dents or otherdistortions, with wires trimmed smooth.

2. Coating: PVC or epoxy, applied after fabrication, covering all surfaces.3. PVC Coating: 9 to 11 mils thick.4. Epoxy Coating: Non-toxic epoxy-polyester powder coating baked-on finish, 3 to 5 mils

thick.5. Standard Mesh Shelves: Cross deck wires spaced at 1 inch.6. Shelf and Rod Units: Integral hanging rod at front edge of shelf.7. Free-Sliding Hanging Rod: Integral hanging rod that permits uninterrupted sliding of

hangers the full width of the shelf.8. Corner Units: Same wire spacing as standard mesh shelves; provide wherever shelves

meet at right angles.B. Mounting Hardware: Provide manufacturer's standard mounting hardware; include support

braces, wall brackets, back clips, end clips, poles, and other accessories as required forcomplete and secure installation; factory finished to match shelving.

C. Fasteners: As recommended by manufacturer for mounting substrates.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Inspect areas to receive shelving, to verify that spaces are properly prepared to receive shelfunits, and are of dimensions indicated on shop drawings.

B. Verify appropriate fastening hardware.C. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.D. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify HDJ of unsatisfactory


A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best

result for the substrate under the project conditions.3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with shelf surfaces level.B. Cap exposed ends of cut wires.C. Install back clips, end clips at side walls, and support braces at open ends. Install intermediate

support braces as recommended by manufacturer.3.04 CLEANING

A. Clean soiled surfaces after installation.3.05 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed work from damage.



B. Touch-up, repair, or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion in a manner thateliminates evidence of replacement.



12 21 13 - 1HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS

SECTION 12 21 13HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS


A. Horizontal slat louver blinds at all windows and swinging terrace/ deck doors including hardwareto clip blinds to bottom edge of blinds on swing doors. Refer to Vertical Blinds for handicapaccessible units and sliding doors.

B. Operating hardware.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Concealed wood blocking for attachment of headrailbrackets.

B. Section 12 21 16 - Vertical Louver Blinds.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. WCMA A100.1 - Safety of Corded Window Covering Products; Current Edition, Including AllRevisions.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTSA. Coordinate the placement of concealed blocking to support blinds. See Section 06 10 00.

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data indicating physical and dimensional characteristics.C. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening sizes, tolerances required, method of attachment,

clearances, and operation.D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures.E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Genral Capital's use in maintenance of project.

1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.2. Extra Blind Assemblies: One of each size.3. Extra Slats: 20 of each type and size.4. Extra Lift Cords, Control Cords, and Wands: One of each type.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in

this section with minimum three years documented experience.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 BLINDS WITHOUT SIDE GUIDES

A. Description: Horizontal slat louvers hung from full-width headrail with full-width bottom rail.B. Blinds: Horizontal slat louvers hung from full-width headrail with full-width bottom rail; manual

control of raising and lowering by cord with full range locking; blade angle adjustable by controlwand; complying with WCMA A100.1.

C. Plastic Slats: Polymer composite, radiused slat corners.1. Width: 1 inch.2. Texture: Smooth.

D. Slat Support: Woven polypropylene cord, ladder configuration.E. Head Rail: Pre-finished, formed aluminum box, with end caps; internally fitted with hardware,

pulleys, and bearings for operation; same depth as width of slats.F. Bottom Rail: Pre-finished, formed PVC with top side shaped to match slat curvature; with end

caps. Color: Same as headrail.


12 21 13 - 2HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS

G. Control Wand: Extruded hollow plastic; hexagonal shape.1. Non-removable type.2. Length of window opening height less 3 inch.

H. Headrail Attachment: Wall brackets.2.02 FABRICATION

A. At 48" wide or larger window assemblies, install (2) blind assemblies, equal width. Such as 48"wide windows will have (2) 24" wide blind assemblies.

B. Determine sizes by field measurement.C. Fabricate blinds to cover window frames completely.D. At openings requiring multiple blind units, provide separate blind assemblies with space of 1/4

inch between blinds, located at window mullion centers.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that openings are ready to receive the work.B. Ensure structural blocking and supports are correctly placed. See Section 06 10 00.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install blinds in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Secure in place with flush countersunk fasteners.

3.03 TOLERANCESA. Maximum Variation of Gap at Window Opening Perimeter: 1/4 inch.B. Maximum Offset From Level: 1/8 inch.

3.04 ADJUSTINGA. Adjust blinds for smooth operation.

3.05 CLEANINGA. Clean blind surfaces just prior to occupancy.



12 35 30 - 1RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK

SECTION 12 35 30RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK


A. Kitchen cabinets.B. Vanity cabinets.C. Casework hardware.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 12 36 00 - Countertops.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. BHMA A156.9 - American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware; 2010.B. KCMA A161.1 - Performance and Construction Standard for Kitchen and Vanity Cabinets; 2012.C. KCMA (DIR) - Directory of Certified Cabinet Manufacturers; current edition, online.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions and construction details.C. Shop Drawings: Indicate casework locations, large scale plans, elevations, clearances

required, rough-in and anchor placement dimensions and tolerances.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Products: Complying with KCMA A161.1 and KCMA Certified.B. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this

section, with minimum three years of documented experience.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 COMPONENTS

A. Must comply with all requirements of Enterprise Green Communities (EGC).B. Cabinet Construction: Softwood lumber framing and particle board.C. Countertops: As specified in Section 12 36 00.D. Door and Drawer Fronts: Solid wood.E. Bolts, Nuts, Washers and Screws: Of size and type to suit application.F. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel.

2.02 HARDWAREA. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard. .B. Shelf Standards and Rests: Vertical chrome steel standards with rubber button fitted steel

rests.C. Drawer and Door Pulls: Chrome wire pulls, 4 inches wide.D. Sliding Door Pulls: Recessed steel circular design.E. Catches: Magnetic.F. Drawer Slides: Extension arms, steel construction.G. Hinges: Butt.H. Sliding Door Track Assemblies: Nylon track with roller bearing followers.


12 35 30 - 2RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK

2.03 FABRICATIONA. Shop assemble casework for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage

through building openings.B. Fabricate corners and joints without gaps or inaccessible spaces or areas where dirt or moisture

could accumulate.C. Fabricate each unit to be rigid and not dependent on building structure for rigidity.D. Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse side of plastic laminate finished surfaces.E. Form smooth edges. Form material for countertops, shelves, and drain boards from continuous

sheets.F. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures, appliances, and fixtures and fittings. Prime paint contact

surfaces of cut edges.G. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting.

Provide trim for scribing and site cutting.2.04 FINISHES

A. Exposed To View Surfaces: Stain, seal, and varnish of standard color as selected by Owner orArchitect.

B. Interior Surfaces: Shellac.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify adequacy of support framing.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate exact finished counter heights with counter manufacturer to ensure top of sink edgeis not higher than 34" above finished floor in Accessible Living Units

B. Install casework, components and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.C. Use anchoring devices to suit conditions and substrate materials encountered.D. Set casework items plumb and square, securely anchored to building structure.E. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Use

filler strips; not additional overlay trim for this purpose.F. Close ends of units, back splashes, shelves and bases.

3.03 ADJUSTINGA. Adjust doors, drawers, hardware, fixtures, and other moving or operating parts to function

smoothly.3.04 CLEANING

A. Clean casework, countertops, shelves, and hardware.3.05 PROTECTION

A. Do not permit finished casework to be exposed to continued construction activity.END OF SECTION 12 35 30


12 36 00 - 1COUNTERTOPS

SECTION 12 36 00COUNTERTOPS


A. Countertops for manufactured casework.B. Wall-hung counters and vanity tops.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 12 35 30 - Residential Casework.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ANSI A208.1 - American National Standard for Particleboard; 2009.B. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

2015a.C. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2014.D. NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; 2005.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.3. Specimen warranty.

C. Shop Drawings: Complete details of materials and installation; combine with shop drawings ofcabinets and casework specified in other sections.

D. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, color chips representing manufacturer'sfull range of available colors and patterns.

E. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, minimum size 6 inches square,representing actual product, color, and patterns.

F. Report: Submit for wood products made from sustainably harvested wood, salvaged and reusedwood, wood fabricated from recovered timber, and locally-sourced wood, as specified in Section01 35 15.

G. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations.H. Enterprise Green Communities (EGC): Comply with all requirements.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Fabricator Qualifications: Same fabricator as for cabinets on which tops are to be installed.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.B. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials,

in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limitsrecommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products underenvironmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 COUNTERTOP ASSEMBLIES

A. Quality Standard: Premium Grade, in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS).



B. Plastic Laminate Countertops: High pressure decorative laminate sheet bonded to substrate.1. Laminate Sheet, Unless Otherwise Indicated: NEMA LD 3, Grade HGS, 0.048 inch

nominal thickness.a. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread 25, maximum; smoke developed 450,

maximum; when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.b. Wear Resistance: In addition to specified grade, comply with NEMA LD 3 High Wear

Grade requirements for wear resistance.c. Finish: Matte or suede, gloss rating of 5 to 20.d. Surface Color and Pattern: As selected by HDJ from the manufacturer's full line.

2. Exposed Edge Treatment: Postformed laminate; front edge substrate built up to minimum1-1/4 inch thick with radiused edge, integral backsplash.

3. Back and End Splashes: Same material, same construction.2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Wood-Based Components:1. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.2. Provide sustainably harvested wood, certified or labeled as specified in Section 01 60 00.3. Provide wood harvested within a 500 mile radius of the project site.

B. Particleboard for Supporting Substrate: ANSI A208.1 Grade 2-M-2, 45 pcf minimum density;minimum 3/4 inch thick; join lengths using metal splines.

C. Adhesives: Chemical resistant waterproof adhesive as recommended by manufacturer ofmaterials being joined. Comply with VOC requirements.

D. Joint Sealant: Mildew-resistant silicone sealant, clear.2.03 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate tops and splashes in the largest sections practicable, with top surface of joints flush.1. Join lengths of tops using best method recommended by manufacturer.2. Fabricate to overhang fronts and ends of cabinets 1 inch except where top butts against

cabinet or wall.3. Prepare all cutouts accurately to size; replace tops having improperly dimensioned or

unnecessary cutouts or fixture holes.B. Provide back/end splash wherever counter edge abuts vertical surface unless otherwise

indicated.1. Secure to countertop with concealed fasteners and with contact surfaces set in waterproof

glue.2. Height: 4 inches, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Wall-Mounted Counters: Provide skirts, aprons, brackets, and braces as indicated on drawings,finished to match.


A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify HDJ of unsatisfactory

preparation before proceeding.C. Verify that wall surfaces have been finished and mechanical and electrical services and outlets

are installed in proper locations.3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best

result for the substrate under the project conditions.



3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Coordinate exact finished counter heights with cabinet manufacturer to ensure top of sink edge

is not higher than 34" above finished floor in Accessible Living Units.B. Securely attach countertops to cabinets using concealed fasteners. Make flat surfaces level;

shim where required.C. Attach plastic laminate countertops using screws with minimum penetration into substrate board

of 5/8 inch.D. Seal joint between back/end splashes and vertical surfaces.

3.04 CLEANINGA. Clean countertops surfaces thoroughly.

3.05 PROTECTIONA. Protect installed products until completion of project.B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion.



12 93 13 - 1BICYCLE RACKS

SECTION 12 93 13BICYCLE RACKS


A. Bicycle racks.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Mounting surface for bicycle racks.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2014.B. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,

Welded and Seamless; 2012.C. ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon

Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2013.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.3. Installation methods.

C. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, color chips representing manufacturer'sfull range of available colors and patterns.


A. Outdoor Bicycle Racks:1. Recreation Creations Inc. .2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.02 BICYCLE RACKSA. Exterior Bicycle Racks: Device allows user provided lock to simultaneously secure one wheel

and part of the frame on each bicycle parked or racked.1. Style: Serpentine rack formed from a continuous round pipe.2. Capacity:7 bicycles. 5'-0" long3. Mounting, Ground: Surface flange.4. Finish: Powder coat, maintenance-free and weather-resistant.5. Color: Black.6. Accessories: Surface flange cover.

B. Materials:1. Pipe: Carbon steel, ASTM A53/A53M, Schedule 40.2. Tube: Carbon steel, ASTM A500/A 500M.3. Bar, Round and Flat, Carbon Steel, ASTM A36/A36M.


A. Examine surfaces to receive bicycle racks.B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify HDJ of unsatisfactory

preparation before proceeding.C. Do not begin installation until unsatisfactory substrates have been properly repaired.


12 93 13 - 2BICYCLE RACKS

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Ensure surfaces to receive bicycle racks are clean, flat, and level.

3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Install bicycle racks level, plumb, square, and correctly located as indicated on the drawings.C. Surface Flange Installation: Anchor bicycle racks securely in place with 1/2 inch by 4 inch

anchor bolts through flange holes.D. Freestanding installation: Place in location shown on drawings.

3.04 CLEANINGA. Clean installed work to like-new condition. Do not use cleaning materials or methods that could

damage finish.3.05 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products until completion of project.B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.



31 10 00 - 1SITE CLEARING

SECTION 31 10 00SITE CLEARING


A. Clearing and grubbing.protection of vegetation.B. Protection of existing vegetation to remainC. Removal of existing vegetation and other debris.D. Removing above and below ground site improvementsE. Disconnecting, capping or sealing site utilities.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 01 10 00 - Summary: Limitations on Oakwood Construction's use of site and premises.B. Section 01 50 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Site fences, security, protective barriers,

and waste removal.C. Section 01 57 13 - Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control.D. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Project conditions; protection of

bench marks, survey control points, and existing construction to remain; reinstallation ofremoved products.

E. Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Limitations on disposal ofremoved materials; requirements for recycling.

F. Section 31 22 00 - Grading: Topsoil removal.G. Section 31 22 00 - Grading: Fill material for filling holes, pits, and excavations generated as a

result of removal operations.H. Section 32 93 00 - Plants: Relocation of existing trees, shrubs, and other plants.


A. Ownership: Cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed fromProject site.

B. Fill Material: As specified in Section 31 22 00 - GradingPART 3 EXECUTION3.01 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupiedor used facilities during site-clearing operations.1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without

permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by Owner or

authorities having jurisdiction.3.02 SITE CLEARING

A. Comply with other requirements specified in Section 01 70 00.B. Minimize production of dust due to clearing operations; do not use water if that will result in ice,

flooding, sedimentation of public waterways or storm sewers, or other pollution.C. C. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control

and tree-protection measures are in place.


31 10 00 - 2SITE CLEARING

3.03 EXISTING UTILITIES AND BUILT ELEMENTSA. Coordinate work with utility companies; notify before starting work and comply with their

requirements; obtain required permits.B. Protect existing utilities to remain from damage.C. Do not disrupt public utilities without permit from authority having jurisdiction.D. Protect existing structures and other elements that are not to be removed.

3.04 VEGETATIONA. Scope: Remove trees, shrubs, brush, and stumps in areas to be covered by building structure,

paving, and detention basins, and planting beds.B. Do not begin clearing until vegetation to be relocated has been removed.C. Vegetation Removed: Do not burn, bury, landfill, or leave on site, except as indicated.

1. Chip, grind, crush, or shred vegetation for mulching, composting, or other purposes;preference should be given to on-site uses.

2. Trees: Sell if marketable; if not, treat as specified for other vegetation removed; removestumps and roots to depth of 18 inches.

3. Fill holes left by removal of stumps and roots, using suitable fill material, with top surfaceneat in appearance and smooth enough not to constitute a hazard to pedestrians.

D. Dead Wood: Remove all dead trees (only as directed by construction manager), limbs, and drybrush on entire site; treat as specified for vegetation removed.

E. Restoration: If vegetation outside removal limits or within specified protective fences isdamaged or destroyed due to subsequent construction operations, replace at no cost to GenralCapital.

3.05 DEBRISA. Remove debris, junk, and trash from site.B. Leave site in clean condition, ready for subsequent work.C. Clean up spillage and wind-blown debris from public and private lands.



31 22 00 - 1GRADING

SECTION 31 22 00GRADING


A. Removal of topsoil.B. Rough grading the site for site structures.C. Finish grading .

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 31 10 00 - Site Clearing.B. Section 31 23 16 - Excavation.C. Section 31 23 16.13 - Trenching: Trenching and backfilling for utilities.D. Section 31 23 23 - Fill: Filling and compaction.E. Section 32 92 19 - Seeding: Finish ground cover.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Perform Work in accordance with State of Michigan, Highway Department standards.


A. Topsoil: Topsoil excavated on-site.1. Graded.2. Free of roots, rocks larger than 1/2 inch, subsoil, debris, large weeds and foreign matter.


A. Verify that survey bench mark and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated.3.02 PREPARATION

A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum.B. Stake and flag locations of known utilities.C. Locate, identify, and protect from damage above- and below-grade utilities to remain.D. Notify utility company to remove and relocate utilities.E. Protect site features to remain, including but not limited to bench marks, survey control points,

existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs, from damage by grading equipmentand vehicular traffic.

F. Protect plants and lawns to remain as a portion of final landscaping.3.03 ROUGH GRADING

A. Remove topsoil from areas to be further excavated, re-landscaped, or re-graded, without mixingwith foreign materials.

B. Do not remove topsoil when wet.C. Remove subsoil from areas to be further excavated, re-landscaped, or re-graded.D. Do not remove wet subsoil .E. Stability: Replace damaged or displaced subsoil to same requirements as for specified fill.

3.04 SOIL REMOVALA. Stockpile topsoil to be re-used on site; remove remainder from site.B. Remove excavated subsoil from site.


31 22 00 - 2GRADING

C. Stockpiles: Use areas designated on site; pile depth not to exceed 8 feet; protect from erosion.3.05 FINISH GRADING

A. Before Finish Grading:1. Verify building and trench backfilling have been inspected.2. Verify subgrade has been contoured and compacted.

B. Remove debris, roots, branches, stones, in excess of 1/2 inch in size. Remove soilcontaminated with petroleum products.

C. Where topsoil is to be placed, scarify surface to depth of 3 inches.D. In areas where vehicles or equipment have compacted soil, scarify surface to depth of 3 inches.E. Place topsoil to thickness as scheduled.F. Place topsoil to the following compacted thicknesses:

1. Areas to be Seeded with Grass: 6 inches.2. Areas to be Sodded: 4 inches.3. Shrub Beds: 18 inches.4. Flower Beds: 12 inches.

G. Place topsoil during dry weather.H. Remove roots, weeds, rocks, and foreign material while spreading.I. Near plants spread topsoil manually to prevent damage.J. Fine grade topsoil to eliminate uneven areas and low spots. Maintain profiles and contour of

subgrade.3.06 TOLERANCES

A. Top Surface of Subgrade: Plus or minus 0.10 foot (1-3/16 inches) from required elevation.B. Top Surface of Finish Grade: Plus or minus 1 inch.

3.07 REPAIR AND RESTORATIONA. Existing Facilities, Utilities, and Site Features to Remain: If damaged due to this work, repair or

replace to original condition.B. Other Existing Vegetation to Remain: If damaged due to this work, replace with vegetation of

equivalent species and size.3.08 CLEANING

A. Clean all excess soil from paved areas on site and all entrance road areas next to site on aregular and timely basis and as directed by the Construction Manager.

B. All storm lines, catch basins, manholes and sumps shall be free from silt, soil, and debris.C. Remove unused stockpiled topsoil. Grade stockpile area to prevent standing water.D. Leave site clean and raked, ready to receive landscaping.



31 23 16 - 1EXCAVATION

SECTION 31 23 16EXCAVATION

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Document Material Testing Consultants, Inc.: Geotechnical report; bore hole locations andfindings of subsurface materials. Dec. 2003

B. Section 01 57 13 - Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Slope protection anderosion control.

C. Section 31 22 00 - Grading: Soil removal from surface of site.D. Section 31 22 00 - Grading: Grading.E. Section 31 23 16.13 - Trenching: Excavating for utility trenches _____.F. Section 31 23 23 - Fill: Fill materials, filling, and compacting.G. Section 31 37 00 - Riprap.

1.02 DEFINITIONSA. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated

lines and dimensions as directed by Architect. Authorized additional excavation andreplacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work.

B. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines anddimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial workdirected by Architect, shall be without additional compensation.

1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONSA. Verify that survey bench mark and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USEDPART 3 EXECUTION3.01 PREPARATION

A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations.B. See Section 31 22 00 for additional requirements.C. Locate, identify, and protect utilities that remain and protect from damage.D. Notify utility company to remove and relocate utilities.E. Protect bench marks, survey control points, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and

curbs from excavating equipment and vehicular traffic.F. Protect plants, lawns, rock outcroppings, and other features to remain.

3.02 EXCAVATINGA. Underpin adjacent structures that could be damaged by excavating work.B. Excavate to accommodate new structures and construction operations.C. Notify HDJ of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue affected Work in area until

notified to resume work.D. Slope banks of excavations deeper than 4 feet to angle of repose or less until shored.E. Cut utility trenches wide enough to allow inspection of installed utilities.F. Hand trim excavations. Remove loose matter.G. Remove lumped subsoil, boulders, and rock up to 1/3 cu yd measured by volume. See Section

31 23 16.26 for removal of larger material.


31 23 16 - 2EXCAVATION

H. Correct areas that are over-excavated and load-bearing surfaces that are disturbed; seeSection 31 23 23.

I.J. Grade top perimeter of excavation to prevent surface water from draining into excavation.K. Remove excavated material that is unsuitable for re-use from site.L. Remove excess excavated material from site.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection and

testing.B. Provide for visual inspection of load-bearing excavated surfaces before placement of

foundations.3.04 PROTECTION

A. Prevent displacement of banks and keep loose soil from falling into excavation; maintain soilstability.

B. Protect bottom of excavations and soil adjacent to and beneath foundation from freezing.END OF SECTION 31 23 16


31 23 23 - 1FILL

SECTION 31 23 23FILL


A. Filling, backfilling, and compacting for building volume below grade.B. Backfilling and compacting for utilities outside the building to utility main connections.C. Filling holes, pits, and excavations generated as a result of removal (demolition) operations.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Document Materials Testing Consultants, Inc.: Geotechnical report; bore hole locations and

findings of subsurface materials - December,2003B. Section 01 57 13 - Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Slope protection and

erosion control.C. Section 31 22 00 - Grading: Site grading.D. Section 31 23 16.13 - Trenching: Excavating for utility trenches outside the building to utility

main connections.E. Section 31 37 00 - Riprap.

1.03 DEFINITIONSA. Finish Grade Elevations: Indicated on drawings.

1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. AASHTO T 180 - Standard Specification for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 4.54 kg

(10-lb) Rammer and a 457 mm (18 in.) Drop; 2010.B. ASTM D698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using

Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)); 2012.C. ASTM D1557 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using

Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN m/m3)); 2012.D. ASTM D2487 - Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified

Soil Classification System); 2011.E. ASTM D6938 - Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and

Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth); 2010.1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Fill Composition Test Reports: Results of laboratory tests on proposed and actual materials

used.C. Compaction Density Test Reports.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 FILL MATERIALS

A. General Fill - Fill Type Class II - Sand: Conforming to State of Michigan Highway Departmentstandard.

B. General Fill - Fill Type poorly graded sand: Subsoil excavated on-site, meeting MDOT Class IIsand, as approved by geotechnical engineer.1. Free of lumps larger than 2 inches, rocks larger than 2 inches, and debris.2. Conforming to ASTM D2487 Group Symbol SW, SP, SW-SM, or SP-SM.

C. Structural Fill - Fill Type Class II - Sand: Conforming to State of Michigan Highway Departmentstandard.


31 23 23 - 2FILL

D. Structural Fill - Fill Type poorly graded sand: Subsoil excavated on-site, meeting MDOT Class IIsand, as approved by geotechnical engineer.1. Free of lumps larger than 2 inches, rocks larger than 2 inches, and debris.2. Conforming to ASTM D2487 Group Symbol SW, SP, SW-SM, or SP-SM.

E. Granular Fill - Fill Type Class II - Sand: Conforming to State of Michigan Highway Departmentstandard.

F. Topsoil: Topsoil excavated on-site.1. Free of roots, rocks larger than 1/2 inch, subsoil, debris, large weeds and foreign matter.2. Containing a minimum of 4 percent and a maximum of 25 percent inorganic matter.

2.02 ACCESSORIESA. Geotextile Fabric: Non-biodegradable, woven, Provide Geotex 2130.or equivalent.B. Vapor Retarder: 10 mil thick, polyethylene.

2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROLA. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for testing and analysis

of soil material.B. Where fill materials are specified by reference to a specific standard, test and analyze samples

for compliance before delivery to site. For approval by geotechnical engineerC. If tests indicate materials do not meet specified requirements, change material and retest.


A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations.B. See Section 31 22 00 for additional requirements.C. Verify subdrainage, dampproofing, or waterproofing installation has been inspected.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Scarify subgrade surface to a depth of 3 inches to identify soft spots.B. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of compaction in place. Backfill with general fill.C. Compact subgrade to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent fill material.D. Until ready to fill, maintain excavations and prevent loose soil from falling into excavation.

3.03 FILLINGA. Fill to contours and elevations indicated using unfrozen materials.B. Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage other work.C. Systematically fill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not fill over porous, wet,

frozen or spongy subgrade surfaces.D. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain required compaction density.

1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frostor ice.

2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material thatexceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dryunit weight.

E. Granular Fill: Place and compact materials in equal continuous layers not exceeding 8 inchescompacted depth.

F. General Fill: Place and compact material in equal continuous layers not exceeding 8 inchescompacted depth.

G. Slope grade away from building minimum 2 inches in 10 ft, unless noted otherwise. Makegradual grade changes. Blend slope into level areas.


31 23 23 - 3FILL

H. Correct areas that are over-excavated.1. Load-bearing foundation surfaces: Use structural fill, flush to required elevation,

compacted to 100 percent of maximum dry density.2. Other areas: Use general fill, flush to required elevation, compacted to minimum 97

percent of maximum dry density.I. Compaction Density Unless Otherwise Specified or Indicated:

1. Under paving, slabs-on-grade, and similar construction: 97 percent of maximum drydensity.

2. At other locations: 95 percent of maximum dry density.J. Reshape and re-compact fills subjected to vehicular traffic.K. B. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or

construction activities, as directed by Architect, without additional compensation.3.04 FILL AT SPECIFIC LOCATIONS

A. Trench Fill Over Utility Piping, Conduits, and Duct Bank in Trenches :1. B. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated.

Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipesand for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits.

2. Trenches under Footings: Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inchesof bottom of footings with satisfactory soil; fill with concrete to elevation of bottom offootings. Concrete is specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

3. Place and compact initial backfill of satisfactory soil, free of particles larger than 1 inch inany dimension, to a height of 12 inches over the pipe or conduit.a. Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both

sides and along the full length of piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement ofpiping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.

4. G. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches below finished grade,except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs.

5. Compact in maximum 8 inch lifts to 95 percent of maximum dry density.B. Under Flexible Pavement:

1. Use granular fill.2. Fill 10 inches deep below standard duty flexible pavement3. Fill [12] inches ([300] mm) deep below heavy duty flexible pavement4. Fill up to subgrade elevation.5. Maximum compacted depth of each lift: 8 inches.6. Compact to 95 percent of maximum dry density.

3.05 TOLERANCESA. Top Surface of General Filling: Plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations.B. Top Surface of Filling Under Paved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations.

3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection and

testing.B. Evaluate results in relation to compaction curve determined by testing uncompacted material in

accordance with ASTM D698 ("standard Proctor"), ASTM D1557 ("modified Proctor"), orAASHTO T 180.

C. If tests indicate work does not meet specified requirements, remove work, replace and retest.D. Frequency of Tests: one test per 5,000 sq.. Compaction tests are required to confirm that the

fill and natural soil in the building and pavement areas are compacted to the specified density. The minimum testing frequency in new fill is one test per 5000 square feet for each 12.0 inchesof fill. Under foundations, the minimum testing frequency is one test per 100 linear feet for wall


31 23 23 - 4FILL

foundations and one test per three column foundations. One maximum density determination isrequired for every soil type where more than ten compaction tests will performed.

3.07 CLEANINGA. See Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal, for additional

requirements.B. Remove unused stockpiled materials, leave area in a clean and neat condition. Grade stockpile

area to prevent standing surface water.END OF SECTION 31 23 23


31 31 16 - 1TERMITE CONTROL

SECTION 31 31 16TERMITE CONTROL


A. Chemical soil treatment.1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. Title 7, United States Code, 136 through 136y - Federal Insecticide, Fungicide and RodenticideAct; 1947 (Revised 2001).

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Indicate toxicants to be used, composition by percentage, dilution schedule,

intended application rate.C. Record moisture content of soil before application.D. Warranty: Submit warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Genral Capital's

name.1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing this type of work and:1. Having minimum of 2 years documented experience.2. Licensed in the State in which the Project is located.

1.05 WARRANTYA. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.B. Provide 10 year installer's warranty against damage to building caused by termites.

1. Include coverage for repairs to building and to contents damaged due to building damage. Repair damage and, if required, re-treat.


A. Manufacturers:1. Bayer Environmental Science Corp; Product ____:

www.backedbybayer.com/pest-management.2. FMC Professional Solutions: www.fmcprosolutions.com. , or approved equal3. Syngenta Professional Products; Product ____: www.syngentaprofessionalproducts.com.4. As approved by architect .5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Toxicant Chemical: EPA approved; synthetically color dyed to permit visual identification oftreated soil.

C. Diluent: Recommended by toxicant manufacturer.2.02 MIXES

A. Mix toxicant to manufacturer's instructions.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that soil surfaces are unfrozen, sufficiently dry to absorb toxicant, and ready to receivetreatment. B. Do not apply soil poison when surface water is present.

B. Verify final grading is complete.


31 31 16 - 2TERMITE CONTROL

3.02 APPLICATIONA. Comply with requirements of U.S. EPA and applicable state and local codes.B. Spray apply toxicant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.C. Apply toxicant at following locations:

1. Under Slabs-on-Grade.2. At Both Sides of Foundation Surface.3. Soil Within 10 feet of Building Perimeter For a Depth of ____ feet.4. C. Treat the voids of the masonry foundation walls

D. Under slabs, apply toxicant immediately prior to installation of vapor barrier.E. At foundation walls, apply toxicant immediately prior to finish grading work outside foundations.F. Apply extra treatment to structure penetration surfaces such as pipe or ducts, and soil

penetrations such as grounding rods or posts.G. Re-treat disturbed treated soil with same toxicant as original treatment.H. If inspection or testing identifies the presence of termites, re-treat soil and re-test.



32 17 23.13 - 1PAINTED PAVEMENT

MARKINGS

SECTION 32 17 23.13PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS


A. Parking lot markings, including parking bays, crosswalks, arrows, handicapped symbols, andcurb markings.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 32 12 16 - Asphalt Paving.B. Section 32 17 26 - Tactile Warning Surfacing: Plastic tactile and detectable warning tiles for

pedestrian walking surfaces.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. FS TT-P-1952 - Paint, Traffic Black, and Airfield Marking, Waterborne; Rev. E, 2007.B. MPI (APL) - Master Painters Institute Approved Products List; Master Painters and Decorators

Association; current edition, www.paintinfo.com.C. FHWA MUTCD - Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways; U.S.

Department of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration; Current Edition.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.3. Installation methods.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Deliver paint in containers of at least 5 gallons accompanied by batch certificate.B. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.C. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials,

in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MATERIALS

A. Line and Zone Marking Paint: MPI No. 97 Latex Traffic Marking Paint; color(s) as indicated.1. Parking Lots: Yellow.2. Handicapped Symbols: Blue.

B. Line and Zone Marking Paint: Refer to Section 09 90 00.C. Tactile Warning Surfaces: See Section 32 17 26.


A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify HDJ of unsatisfactory


A. Allow new pavement surfaces to cure for a period of not less than 14 days before application ofmarking materials.


32 17 23.13 - 2PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the bestresult for the substrate under the project conditions.

C. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.1. Remove dust, dirt, and other granular surface deposits by sweeping, blowing with

compressed air, rinsing with water, or a combination of these methods. D. Where oil or grease are present, scrub affected areas with several applications of trisodium

phosphate solution or other approved detergent or degreaser, and rinse thoroughly after eachapplication; after cleaning, seal oil-soaked areas with cut shellac to prevent bleeding through thenew paint.

E. Establish survey control points to determine locations and dimensions of markings; providetemplates to control paint application by type and color at necessary intervals.

3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Begin pavement marking as soon as practicable after surface has been cleaned and dried.B. Do not apply paint if temperature of surface to be painted or the atmosphere is less than 50

degrees F or more than 95 degrees F.C. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions using an experienced technician that is

thoroughly familiar with equipment, materials, and marking layouts. D. Comply with FHWA MUTCD manual (http://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov) for details not shown.E. Apply markings in locations determined by measurement from survey control points; preserve

control points until after markings have been accepted.F. Apply uniformly painted markings of color(s), lengths, and widths as indicated on the drawings

true, sharp edges and ends.1. Apply paint in one coat only.2. Wet Film Thickness: 0.015 inch, minimum.3. Width Tolerance: Plus or minus 1/8 inch.

G. Parking Lots: Apply parking space lines, entrance and exit arrows, painted curbs, and othermarkings indicated on drawings.1. Mark the International Handicapped Symbol at indicated parking spaces.2. Hand application by pneumatic spray is acceptable.

H. Symbols: Use a suitable template that will provide a pavement marking with true, sharp edgesand ends, of the design and size indicated.

3.04 DRYING, PROTECTION, AND REPLACEMENTA. Protect newly painted markings so that paint is not picked up by tires, smeared, or tracked.B. Provide barricades, warning signs, and flags as necessary to prevent traffic crossing newly

painted markings.C. Allow paint to dry at least the minimum time specified by the applicable paint standard and not

less than that recommended by the manufacturer.D. Remove and replace markings that are applied at less than minimum material rates; deviate

from true alignment; exceed length and width tolerances; or show light spots, smears, or otherdeficiencies or irregularities.

E. Remove markings in manner to avoid damage to the surface to which the marking was applied,using carefully controlled sand blasting, approved grinding equipment, or other approvedmethod.

F. Replace removed markings at no additional cost to Genral Capital.END OF SECTION 32 17 23.13


32 17 26 - 1TACTILE WARNING

SURFACING

SECTION 32 17 26TACTILE WARNING SURFACING


A. Plastic tactile and detectable warning tiles for pedestrian walking surfaces.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete for sidewalks and platforms.B. Section 32 13 13 - Portland Cement Concrete Paving: Concrete sidewalks.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. 36 CFR 1191 - Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and

Facilities; Final Rule; current edition (ADAAG).B. 49 CFR 37 - Transportation Services for Individuals with Disabilities (ADA); current edition.C. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel

Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2015.D. ATBCB PROWAG - Proposed Accessibility Guidelines for Pedestrian Facilities in the Public

Right-of-Way; 2011.E. FED-STD-595C - Colors Used in Government Procurement (Fan Deck); 2008 (Chg Notice 1).

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, standard details, details specific to this

project; written installation and maintenance instructions.C. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty; complete forms in Genral Capital's name and register

with manufacturer.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Company certified in writing by product manufacturer as havingsuccessfully completed work substantially similar to the work of this section.

1.06 WARRANTYA. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.B. Plastic Tiles: Provide manufacturer's standard five year warranty against manufacturing

defects, breakage or deformation.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Plastic Tactile and Detectable Warning Surface Tiles:1. ADA Solutions, Inc; _______: www.adatile.com.2. Engineered Plastics, Inc..3. DetecTile Corporation.4. AlertTiles5. Access Products, Inc.

2.02 TACTILE AND DETECTABLE WARNING TILESA. Plastic Tactile and Detectable Warning Tiles: ADAAG compliant, glass fiber and carbon fiber

reinforced, exterior grade, matte finish polyester sheet with truncated dome pattern, solid colorthroughout, internal reinforcing of sheet and of truncated domes, integral radius cut lines onback face of tile; with factory applied removable protective sheeting.1. Shape: Rectangular.2. Dimensions: 24 inches by 48 inches.


32 17 26 - 2TACTILE WARNING SURFACING

3. Pattern: In-line pattern of truncated domes complying with ADAAG.4. Color: FED-STD 595C, Table IV, Federal Yellow No. 33538.5. Products:

a. Access Tile, a brand of Access Products, Inc; Cast in Place Replaceable TactileWarning Tile: www.accesstile.com.

b. Engineered Plastics Inc.; Armor Tile Cast in Place Composite.c. DetecTile Corporation; DetecTile Replaceable Tactile Paneld. AlertTiles; AlertCaste. Access Products, Inc.; Access Tile Cast In Place Replaceable

2.03 ACCESSORIESA. Fasteners: ASTM A666, Type 304 stainless steel

1. Type: Countersunk, color matched composite sleeve anchors2. Size: 1/4 inch diameter and 1-1/2 inches long.


A. When installation location is near site boundary or property line, verify required location usingproperty survey.

B. Verify that work area is ready to receive work:1. If existing conditions are not as required to properly complete the work of this section,

notify HDJ.2. Do not proceed with installation until deficiencies in existing conditions have been

corrected.C. Verify that dimensions, tolerances, and attachment methods for work in this section are properly

coordinated with other work on site.3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.1. Do not install damaged, warped, bowed, dented, abraded, or otherwise defective units.2. Do not install when ambient or substrate temperature has been below 40 degrees F during

the preceding 8 daylight hours.B. Field Adjustment:

1. Locate relative to curb line in compliance with PROWAG, Sections 304 and 305.2. Orient so dome pattern is aligned with the direction of ramp.

C. Install units fully seated to substrate, square to straight edges and flat to required slope.3.03 CLEANING PLASTIC UNITS

A. Remove protective plastic sheeting within 24 hours of installation.B. Remove excess sealant or adhesive from joints and edges.C. Clean four days prior to date of scheduled inspection.D. Clean 4 days prior to date of scheduled inspection.

3.04 PROTECTIONA. Protect installed units from traffic, subsequent construction operations or other imposed loads

until concrete is fully cured.B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products prior to Substantial Completion.



32 92 19 - 1SEEDING

SECTION 32 92 19SEEDING


A. Preparation of subsoil.B. Placing topsoil.C. Hydroseeding, mulching and fertilizer.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 31 22 00 - Grading: Topsoil material.B. Section 31 22 00 - Grading: Preparation of subsoil and placement of topsoil in preparation for

the work of this section.C. Section 31 23 23 - Fill: Topsoil material.

1.03 DEFINITIONSA. Weeds: Include Dandelion, Jimsonweed, Quackgrass, Horsetail, Morning Glory, Rush Grass,

Mustard, Lambsquarter, Chickweed, Cress, Crabgrass, Canadian Thistle, Nutgrass, PoisonOak, Blackberry, Tansy Ragwort, Bermuda Grass, Johnson Grass, Poison Ivy, Nut Sedge,Nimble Will, Bindweed, Bent Grass, Wild Garlic, Perennial Sorrel, and Brome Grass.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. A. Product Data, Shop Drawings, Samples: Submit seed mixes for review.C. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance instructions, cutting method and maximum grass

height; types, application frequency, and recommended coverage of fertilizer .1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with regulatory agencies for fertilizer and herbicide composition.1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Qualifications of Workmen: Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times duringexecution of this portion of the work, who shall be thoroughly familiar with the type of materialsbeing installed and the proper materials and methods for their installation, and who shall directall work performed under this section.

B. Standards:1. All seeding material shall meet or exceed the specifications of Federal, State, and County

laws requiring inspection for plant disease and insect control.C. A pre-installation conference may be called to address concerns related to timing, seasonal

concerns, weather conditions, or execution.1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver grass seed mixture in sealed containers. Seed in damaged packaging is notacceptable. Deliver seed mixture in containers showing percentage of seed mix, year ofproduction, net weight, date of packaging, and location of packaging.

B. Deliver fertilizer in waterproof bags showing weight, chemical analysis, and name ofmanufacturer.

C. Properly store all products in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 SEED MIXTURE

A. Hydro-Mulch / Drill Seeding:1. Drill seed Type “A” Mix then hydromulch over.


32 92 19 - 2SEEDING

All hydro-mulch shall be free from noxious weeds, grade A recent crop, recleaned,and treated with appropriate fungicide at time of remixing. Deliver to the site in sealedcontainers with manufacturer’s guaranteed analysis. Wood fiber mulch at 2,000# peracre. All seeding including Meadow Mix shall be hydroseeded.

2. Meadow Mix shall be Economy Prairie Seed Mix. Mixture shall include:

Botanical Name Common Name PLS Ounces/ AcreGRASSES

a. Andropogon gerardii Big Blue Stem 16.00b. Andropogon scoparius Little Blue Stem 20.00c. Bouteloua curtipendula Side Oats Grama 12.00d. Elymus canadensis Canada Wild Rye 16.00e. Panicum virgatumSwitch Grass 2.00f. Sorghastrum nutans Indian Grass10.00

TEMPORARY COVER:g. Avena sativa Seed Oats 360.00h. Lolium multiflorum Annual Rye 100.00i. Phleum pratense Timothy 20.00

FORBS:j. Asclepias tuberosa Butterfly Weed 0.75k. Aster novae-angliae New England Aster 0.75l. Cassia fasciculataPartridge Pea 3.00m. Coreopsis lanceolata Sand Coreopsis 2.00n. Echinacea purpurea Broad-leaved Purple Coneflower 2.00o. Heliopsis helianthoides False Sunflower 1.50p. Liatris aspera Rough Blazing Star 1.25q. Lupinus perennis Wild Lupine 3.00r. Ratibida pinnata Yellow Coneflower 2.50s. Rudbeckia hirta Black-Eyed Susan 0.75

3. Slope stabilization seed mix shall be the following:

Botanical Name Common Name PLS Ounces/ AcreGRASSES

a. Andropogon gerardii Big Blue Stem 20.00b. Andropogon scoparius Little Blue Stem 32.00c. Bouteloua curtipendula Side-oats grama 3.00d. Elymus canadensis Canada Wild Rye 5.00e. Panicum virgatumSwitch Grass 12.00f. Sorghastrum nutans Indian Grass24.00

TEMPORARY COVER:g. Agrostis alba Redtop 16.00h. Avena sativa Seed Oats 512.00i. Lolium multiflorum Annual Rye 160.00j. Phleum pratense Timothy 64.00

Note #1 - Seed mixes different than those specified must submit mixture data and beapproved by Architect.

Note #2 - In general, hydro-seeding shall be provided where shown on drawings andin all areas disrupted by construction procedures.


32 92 19 - 3SEEDING

4. Note #1 - Delivery of seed shall be coordinated closely with the planting time. If seeds arerequired to be held for more than one day, it shall be stored in a cool, dry place until it canbe used.

5. Note #2 - All seed shall be scarified and/or cold/moist stratified as recommended for eachparticular species specified.

6. Note #3 - Acceptable plants: The seed species and seeding rates shall match the abovewith proof of purchase supplied to Architect and Construction Manager.

7. Note #4 - Seeds shall be supplied by J.F. New & Associates, Inc. at 219-586-3400.

2.02 SOIL MATERIALSA. Topsoil: Excavated from site and free of weeds.

2.03 ACCESSORIESA. Mulching Material: Oat or wheat straw, free from weeds, foreign matter detrimental to plant life,

and dry. Hay or chopped cornstalks are not acceptable.B. Fertilizer/Lime: Provide commercial balance fertilizer delivered to the site in bags labeled with

the manufacturer’s guaranteed analysis. If stored at the site, protect fertilizer from the elementsat all times.1. Lime: High calcium pelitized lime, 20 lb. per 1,000 sq.ft. (August 1, 1997 installation).2. Fertilizer “A” (Starter): PAR EX 16-16-16 at 50 lbs. per 5,000 sq.ft. (410 lbs. per acre).3. Fertilizer “B”: PAR EX 24-4-12 at 50 lbs. per 12,000 sq.ft. (180 lbs. per acre)

C. Erosion Fabric: North American Green SC-150 matting, or equalD. Crabgrass Control: (Utilize if seeding is done before June 30 in season)

1. Starter: Tupersan wetable powder (6-8 lb/acre).2. Maintenance: Tupersan Wetable Powder (16 lbs/acre)

E. Weed Control: Apply Trimec or Drive as needed to control weed growth. Submit product data toArchitect for review.

F. Edging:1. Description: Edge all landscape beds and where shown on drawing. Edging shall be

Commercial Grade aluminum edging 1/8” x 4” mill finish. Edging to be in 16’-0” sectionswith line stakes at 48” o.c. and splicer stakes as required.

2. Quality/Material:a. Edging to be 6063 Alloy, T-6 hardness, and to have horizontal undulations along both

faces. A 1/8” horizontal locking ridge is to protrude ½” from the top edge and alocking tab is to be punched at each end of the 16’-0” section.

b. All stakes to be 6061 Alloy, T-6 hardness and to have burr’s protruding back off theface of the stake.

c. Splicing stakes to be 14” long, 2” wide, with a 2” portion folded over, parallel to theface of the stake. The 2” folded portion to have 2 sets of punches. Line stakes to be12-1/2” long, 1” wide, with a 2” portion folded over parallel to the face of the stake. The 2” folded over portion to have one (1) set of punches.

3. Resource: Call PermaLoc at 1-800-356-9660 for product information and availability.G. J. Other Materials: All other materials, not specifically described, but required for a complete

and proper installation, shall be as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of theArchitect/Engineer.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate all work with job site superintendent and all applicable trades.


32 92 19 - 4SEEDING

3.02 EXAMINATIONA. Verify that prepared soil base is ready to receive the work of this Section.B. Preliminary Investigations: The Contractor shall visit the site and make his own interpretation of

conditions, based on his investigation of existing conditions and on soil conditions. Whereunderground services, utilities, structures, etc. are located on the drawings or given at the site,they are based on available records, but are not guaranteed to be complete or correct. Theyare merely available for assistance.

3.03 PREPARATIONA. Prepare subgrade in accordance with Section 31 22 00.B. Place topsoil in accordance with Section 31 22 00.

1. Spreading of Topsoil:a. Rough grading will be performed under another contract. Landscaping Contractor will

be responsible for fine grading.b. Fine grading: Perform all fine grading required in planting areas, using topsoil

obtained from the site. Hand rake all lawn seeded areas (Type A ) removing rocksand debris over 1-1/2”. Gill raking in Wildflower seeding is acceptable - remove alldebris over 2”.

3.04 FERTILIZINGA. Apply fertilizer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

1. Fertilizer “A”: Install starter fertilizer at time of planting.2. Fertilizer “B”: Install four (4) and again eight (8) weeks after planting.3. Notify Owner of future fertilizer requirements when grass has been accepted.

B. Apply after smooth raking of topsoil and prior to roller compaction.C. Do not apply fertilizer at same time or with same machine as will be used to apply seed.D. Mix thoroughly into upper 2 inches of topsoil.E. Lightly water to aid the dissipation of fertilizer.

3.05 HYDROSEEDINGA. Apply seed at a rate as specified in Section 2.01, evenly in two intersecting directions. Rake in

lightlyB. Do not hydroseed area in excess of that which can be mulched on same day.C. Immediately following seeding, apply mulch to a thickness of 1/8 inches. Maintain clear of

shrubs and trees.D. Apply water with a fine spray immediately after each area has been mulched. Saturate to 4

inches of soil.E. Following germination, immediately re-seed areas without germinated seeds that are larger than

8 by 8 inches.3.06 PROTECTION

A. Cover seeded slopes where grade is 4 inches per foot or greater with erosion fabric. Roll fabriconto slopes without stretching or pulling.

B. Lay fabric smoothly on surface, bury top end of each section in 6 inch deep excavated topsoiltrench. Provide 12 inch overlap of adjacent rolls. Backfill trench and rake smooth, level withadjacent soil.

C. Secure outside edges and overlaps at 36 inch intervals with stakes.D. Lightly dress slopes with topsoil to ensure close contact between fabric and soil.E. At sides of ditches, lay fabric laps in direction of water flow. Lap ends and edges minimum 6

inches.


32 92 19 - 5SEEDING

3.07 ADJUSTING AND CLEANINGA. Remove trash and excess materials from project site.B. Maintain paved areas in clean condition.C. Remove all barriers and signs from project site at termination of establishment period.D. Immediately after seeding, erect barricades and warning signs to protect seeded areas from

traffic until grass is established.3.08 MAINTENANCE
